Apdcivc4430 PDF
Apdcivc4430 PDF
Apdcivc4430 PDF
DocuCentre-IV C4430
Administrator Guide
SD Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows Server, Windows Vista, Microsoft Network, and Internet
Explorer are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other
countries.
Novell, NetWare, and NDS are a registered trademark of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other
countries.
Adobe, Acrobat, PostScript, and Adobe PostScript 3 are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
AppleTalk, EtherTalk, Macintosh, and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
PCL, HP-GL, and HP-GL/2 are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Corporation.
ThinPrint is a registered trademark of ThinPrint GmbH in Germany and other countries.
Unicode is a registered trademark of Unicode, Inc.
All product/brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective holders.
Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
For information on license, refer to About License in the User Guide.
The data saved in the hard disk of the machine may be lost if there is any problem in the hard disk.
Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any direct and indirect damages arising from or caused by such data
loss.
Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due to infection of computer virus or
computer hacking.
Important
1. This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not
be copied or modified in whole or part, without the written consent of the publisher.
2. Parts of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
3. We welcome any comments on ambiguities, errors, omissions, or missing pages.
4. Never attempt any procedure on the machine that is not specifically described in this manual.
Unauthorized operation can cause faults or accidents. Fuji Xerox is not liable for any problems
resulting from unauthorized operation of the equipment.
An export of this product is strictly controlled in accordance with Laws concerning Foreign
Exchange and Foreign Trade of Japan and/or the export control regulations of the United States.
XEROX, the sphere of connectivity design, PDF Bridge, ContentsBridge, ApeosWare, CentreWare,
and DocuShare are trademarks or registered trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the U.S. or Fuji
Xerox Co., Ltd. DocuWorks is a trademark of Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
3 Maintenance............................................................................................................. 53
Replacing Consumables............................................................................................ 54
Replacing Toner Cartridges .................................................................................. 56
Replacing Waste Toner Container........................................................................ 58
Replacing Drum Cartridges R1, R2, R3, or R4 ..................................................... 60
Replacing Staple Cartridge (for Finisher- AB1)..................................................... 65
Replacing Fusing Unit........................................................................................... 66
Replacing Transfer Belt Unit ................................................................................. 68
Replacing Transfer Roller ..................................................................................... 73
Replacing Separator Rollers ................................................................................. 74
3
Cleaning the Machine.................................................................................................79
Cleaning the Exterior .............................................................................................79
Cleaning the Interior (Laser Scanners)..................................................................79
Cleaning the Conductivity Temperature Depth (CTD) Sensor...............................81
Cleaning the Touch Screen ...................................................................................84
Cleaning the Document Cover and Document Glass ............................................85
Cleaning the White Chute and Constant Velocity Transport Glass .......................85
Cleaning the Document Feeder Rollers.................................................................86
Executing Calibration .................................................................................................87
Adjusting Color Registration.......................................................................................90
Auto Color Registration..........................................................................................90
Side Color Registration..........................................................................................91
Printing a Report/List..................................................................................................93
Deleting a Private Charge Print Job with an Invalid User ID ......................................94
Setting Restore Tool...................................................................................................95
5 Tools........................................................................................................................119
System Settings Procedure......................................................................................120
Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode .....................................................120
Step 2 Entering the System Administrator User ID and Passcode......................120
Step 3 Selecting [Tools].......................................................................................121
Step 4 Selecting a Setting Item on the [Tools] Screen ........................................121
Step 5 Setting a Feature......................................................................................123
Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode........................................................123
Tools Menu List ........................................................................................................124
Common Service Settings........................................................................................138
Machine Clock/Timers .........................................................................................138
Audio Tones.........................................................................................................141
4
Table of Contents
5
Fax Received Options .........................................................................................212
Reduce / Enlarge Presets....................................................................................213
Original Size Defaults ..........................................................................................213
Local Terminal Information ..................................................................................213
Internet Fax Control .............................................................................................214
E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings ........................................................................217
E-mail Control ......................................................................................................217
Folder Service Settings ............................................................................................220
Job Flow Service Settings (ApeosPort Series Models Only)....................................221
Media Print Service Settings ....................................................................................222
Stored File Settings ..................................................................................................223
Web Applications Service Setup (ApeosPort Series Models Only) ..........................225
Server Setup........................................................................................................225
Other Settings......................................................................................................227
Web Browser Setup (ApeosPort Series Models Only) .............................................228
Setup ........................................................................................................................230
Create Folder.......................................................................................................230
Stored Programming............................................................................................232
Create Job Flow Sheet ........................................................................................232
Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword .........................................................................240
Add Address Book Entry......................................................................................240
Create Fax Group Recipients ..............................................................................246
Add Fax Comment...............................................................................................247
Paper Tray Attributes...........................................................................................247
Accounting................................................................................................................248
Create / View User Accounts...............................................................................248
View Account .......................................................................................................251
Reset User Accounts ...........................................................................................251
System Administrator's Meter (Copy Jobs)..........................................................252
Accounting Type ..................................................................................................252
Accounting Login Screen Settings.......................................................................253
Fax Billing Data....................................................................................................254
Accounting / Billing Device Settings ....................................................................255
Authentication / Security Settings.............................................................................257
System Administrator Settings.............................................................................257
Authentication ......................................................................................................258
Allow User to Disable Active Settings..................................................................264
Job Status Default ...............................................................................................265
Overwrite Hard Disk.............................................................................................265
6
Table of Contents
7
9 Scanner Environment Settings .............................................................................301
Scan Service Overview ............................................................................................302
Configuration of Store to Folder ...............................................................................304
Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP .......................................................304
Step 2 Registering a Folder .................................................................................305
Step 3 Configuring a Computer ...........................................................................305
Configuration of Scan to PC.....................................................................................306
Step 1 Preparations .............................................................................................306
Step 2 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP .......................................................307
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer ................................................................308
Configuration of Store to USB ..................................................................................309
Step 1 Available USB Memory Devices...............................................................309
CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items .......................................................309
Configuration of Network Scanning (Job Template Scanning).................................310
Step 1 Preparations .............................................................................................310
Step 2 Enabling Ports and Setting up TCP/IP .....................................................310
Step 3 Configuring the SNMP Port ......................................................................311
Step 4 Configuration on the Computer ................................................................312
Configuration of Scan to Home (ApeosPort Series Models Only)............................313
Step 1 Preparations .............................................................................................313
Step 2 Enabling SMB Port and Setting up TCP/IP ..............................................313
Step 3 Configuring Remote Authentication..........................................................314
Step 4 Configuring Scan to Home .......................................................................315
Step 5 Configuration on the Computer ................................................................317
Configuration of Job Flow Sheets ............................................................................318
Step 1 Enabling Ports and Setting up TCP/IP .....................................................318
Step 2 Configuring the SNMP Port ......................................................................319
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer ................................................................319
Configuration of Store & Send Link ..........................................................................320
Step 1 Configuring E-mail....................................................................................320
Step 2 Enabling Authentication............................................................................320
Step 3 Other Settings ..........................................................................................320
CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items .......................................................321
8
Table of Contents
9
Services Restricted by User ID Authentication ....................................................359
Services Restricted by the Combined Use of Smart Card Authentication .................
and User ID Authentication..................................................................................362
Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders......................................................365
Overview..............................................................................................................365
When the Authentication Feature is Disabled......................................................367
When the Authentication Feature is Enabled ......................................................370
Jobs Manageable by Account Administration ..........................................................373
Configuration for Authentication ...............................................................................376
Installation Overview............................................................................................376
Enabling Authentication .......................................................................................376
Changing the Default Authorization Group Settings ............................................379
Creating an Authorization Group .........................................................................379
Configuration for IC Card Reader (Optional) ............................................................381
Step 1 Preparations .............................................................................................381
Step 2 Logout Method Using the Smart Card......................................................381
Step 3 Registering Smart Card Information.........................................................382
Configuration for Account Administration .................................................................383
Step 1 Selecting an Accounting Type..................................................................383
Step 2 Registering User Information....................................................................383
User Authentication Operations ..............................................................................385
Authenticating Login Users..................................................................................385
Changing Passcode.............................................................................................386
10
Table of Contents
11
Emulation.............................................................................................................556
Fonts....................................................................................................................557
Output Feature.....................................................................................................558
PCL Emulation Settings.......................................................................................559
HP-GL2 Emulation ...................................................................................................563
Emulation.............................................................................................................563
Fonts....................................................................................................................563
Output Feature.....................................................................................................564
Factory Default Settings ......................................................................................564
HP-GL/2 Emulation Settings................................................................................565
Hard Clip Area .....................................................................................................571
Printable Area ......................................................................................................572
Auto Layout..........................................................................................................573
Notes and Restrictions .............................................................................................580
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Machine..............................................580
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Copy Feature .....................................582
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Print Feature ......................................583
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Scan Features....................................585
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Fax Feature........................................589
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the E-mail/Internet Fax Feature ...............590
Notes and Restrictions when Connecting with Internet Service Provider............594
Notes and Restrictions on the Interrupt Mode .....................................................596
Notes and Restrictions on Folders.......................................................................597
Notes and Restrictions when Connecting to Internet or Intranet .........................597
Notes and Restrictions when Operating from Computers ...................................598
Notes and Restrictions on Job Flows ..................................................................599
Notes and Restrictions on the Security Features ................................................600
Notes and Restrictions on the Authentication and Accounting ............................600
Notes and Restrictions for Using SMB ................................................................601
Notes and Restrictions for Using TCP/IP.............................................................603
Notes and Restrictions for Using EtherTalk.........................................................604
Notes and Restrictions for Using Bonjour............................................................605
Notes and Restrictions for IPv6 Connection ........................................................605
Notes and Restrictions for Print E-mail................................................................607
Using the Telephone ................................................................................................608
Placing a Call.......................................................................................................608
Activity Report ..........................................................................................................610
Installing the HDD Extension Kit (Optional)..............................................................612
Glossary ...................................................................................................................614
EP System................................................................................................................616
Index...............................................................................................................................617
12
1 Before Using the Machine
This chapter describes the organization of this guide and conventions used in
this guide.
z Preface .......................................................................................................14
z Types of Manuals .......................................................................................15
z Using This Guide ........................................................................................16
z Interface Cables.......................................................................................... 19
z
Energy Saver Mode .................................................................................... 21
z Customizing the Control Panel ...................................................................24
z
Entering Text ..............................................................................................32
1 Before Using the Machine
Preface
Thank you for selecting this machine (hereafter referred to as “the machine”).
Before Using the Machine
Warning:
This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails.
14
Types of Manuals
Types of Manuals
Manual (HTML)
The manual describes installation and configuration procedures for print drivers and
the printer environment. This manual is included in the Driver CD Kit.
15
1 Before Using the Machine
3 Maintenance
Describes how to replace consumables and to clean the machine.
4 Machine Status
Describes how to check the faults that occurred on the machine and to print various
reports/lists.
5 Tools
Describes the procedures to set up the system.
16
Using This Guide
15 Appendix
Describes the specifications of the machine, optional accessories, and cautions/
restrictions.
Conventions
z The screen shots and illustrations used in this guide vary depending on the machine 1
configuration and optional components installed. Some of the items in the screen
shots may not be displayed or available depending on your machine configuration.
z The procedures in this guide may vary depending on the driver and utility software
being used due to the upgrades.
z
In this document, "Computer" refers to a personal computer or workstation.
z
The following terms are used in this guide:
Important : Important information that you should read.
Note : Additional information on operations or features.
z
The following symbols are used in this guide:
" " : • A cross-reference included in this guide.
• Names of CD-ROM, features, and touch screen messages
and input text.
[ ] : • Folders, files, applications, button or menu names displayed
on the touch screen.
• Names of menus, commands, windows, or dialog boxes
displayed on the computer screen and their buttons and
menu names.
< > button : Hardware buttons on the control panel.
< > key : Keys on the keyboard of the computer.
> : • Path to a certain item within a procedure on the control panel.
For example: When you see the procedure "select [Tools] >
[Setup] > [Create Folder]", this means that you need to select
[Tools], select [Setup], and then select [Create Folder].
• Path to a certain item within a procedure on a computer.
For example: When you see the procedure "to search for files
and folders, click [Start] > [Search] > [For Files or Folders]",
this means that you need to click [Start], click [Search], and
then click [For Files or Folders] to search for files and folders.
• Cross-reference
For example: "Refer to "5 Tools" > "Common Service
Settings" > "Audio Tone" in the Administrator Guide."
The sentence above means that you need to refer to the
section "Audio Tone", which can be found under "Common
17
1 Before Using the Machine
18
Interface Cables
Interface Cables
When connecting the machine directly to a computer, use the USB interface. When
1 Press the power switch to the [ ] position to switch off the power.
2 Make sure that the touch screen is blank and the <Energy Saver> button does not
light up. 1
3 Press the main power switch to the [ ] position to switch off the main power.
4 Connect a USB cable to the USB 2.0
interface connector.
1 Press the power switch to the [ ] position to switch off the power.
2 Make sure that the touch screen is blank and the <Energy Saver> button does not
light up.
3 Press the main power switch to the [ ] position to switch off the main power.
19
1 Before Using the Machine
Note • Always use the correct network cable with your network connection. When you replace the
cable, contact our Customer Support Center.
5 Press the main power switch to the [ | ] position to switch on the main power.
20
Energy Saver Mode
The machine is equipped with the Energy Saver mode that reduces the power
Sleep Mode
The Sleep mode reduces the power to the machine even more than the Low Power
mode.
It takes longer time than the Low Power mode to deactivate the Sleep mode and enable
to use the machine.
21
1 Before Using the Machine
22
Energy Saver Mode
23
1 Before Using the Machine
You can change the services displayed on the touch screen or the features assigned
Before Using the Machine
24
Customizing the Control Panel
1
7 Select [Save].
25
1 Before Using the Machine
1
6 Select [Last Selection Screen] or [Services
Home].
7 Select [Save].
z
Copy
z
Fax / Internet Fax
z
E-mail
z
Simple Copy
z
Simple Fax
z Scan to PC Service buttons Additional feature
z Store to Folder
z
Send from Folder
z Stored Programming
z
Network Scanning (ApeosPort series
models only)
z
Store & Send Link
Note • To use this feature, an optional
component is required.
• This service is displayed when the User
Authentication feature is used.
26
Customizing the Control Panel
z Store to USB
z Media Print - Text
z Media Print - Photos
Services Home
You can select service buttons, which are displayed on the [Services Home] screen.
If you select [(Not Assigned)], the position of the selected button becomes blank.
27
1 Before Using the Machine
1
5 Select [Services Home], and then select
[Change Settings].
Note • Select [ ] to display the previous screen
or [ ] to display the next screen.
8 Select [Save].
9 Select [Save].
28
Customizing the Control Panel
29
1 Before Using the Machine
8 Select [Save].
9 Select [Save].
30
Customizing the Control Panel
1
5 Select [Custom Button 2], and then select
[Change Settings].
Note • Select [ ] to display the previous screen
or [ ] to display the next screen.
7 Select [Save].
3 Select [Save].
To adjust the screen brightness from the [Tools] screen, refer to "Screen Brightness" (P.143).
31
1 Before Using the Machine
Entering Text
During operations, a screen for entering text sometimes appears. The following
Before Using the Machine
1 You can enter the following characters: numerals, alphabets, and symbols.
Item Description
Entering alphabets and numerals To enter uppercase letters, select [Shift]. To return to the
lowercase letters, select [Shift] again.
Entering symbols Select [More Characters].
Note • Depending on the keyboard, you can select a
symbol from the pull-up options displayed on the
bottom left of the screen.
Entering a space Select [Space].
Deleting characters Select [Backspace] to delete one character at a time.
32
2 Paper and Other Media
This chapter describes the paper that can be used with the machine,
precautions when handling paper, and how to load paper in trays.
z Paper Types ............................................................................................... 34
z Loading Paper ............................................................................................41
z Changing the Paper Settings......................................................................49
2 Paper and Other Media
Paper Types
This section describes the paper that can be used with this machine.
Use of unrecommended paper may result in paper jams, lower print quality,
malfunctions, or damage to the machine. To achieve optimum performance of the
machine, we recommend that you use only paper recommended by Fuji Xerox.
Paper and Other Media
If you desire to use paper other than the paper recommended by Fuji Xerox, contact
our Customer Support Center.
WARNING
Do not use conductive paper such as origami paper, carbonic paper or conductively-
coated paper. When paper jam occurs, it may cause short-circuit and eventually a
fire accident.
Important • Moisture generated by water, rain, or vapor may cause the printed images to fade. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
2
Loadable Quantity and Weight for Supported Paper
34
Paper Types
Standard Paper
When printing or copying on commonly used paper (plain paper), use paper meeting
the standards described below. To copy or print as clear as possible, we recommend
the following standard paper.
*1:Select the paper type setting for the paper loaded on a tray. For more information, refer to "Changing
the Paper Settings" (P.49).
*2:Most ideal image quality with the paper can be obtained by setting the image quality for each type of
paper. For more information on the settings, refer to "Image Quality" (P.146).
Note • "Low humidity conditions" means an environment with humidity of 20%.
35
2 Paper and Other Media
*1:Select the paper type setting for the paper loaded on a tray. For more information, refer to "Changing
the Paper Settings" (P.49).
*2:Most ideal image quality with the paper can be obtained by setting the image quality for each type of
paper. For more information on the settings, refer to "Image Quality" (P.146).
Note • "High temperature and humidity conditions" means an environment with temperature of
28 °C and humidity of 85%.
• "Low humidity conditions" means an environment with humidity of 20%.
Usable Paper
In addition to the standard paper, the following paper also can be used.
36
Paper Types
37
2 Paper and Other Media
*1:Select the paper type setting for the paper loaded on a tray. For more information, refer to "Changing
the Paper Settings" (P.49).
*2:Most ideal image quality with the paper can be obtained by setting the image quality for each type of
paper. For more information on the settings, refer to "Image Quality" (P.146).
2 Note • "High temperature and humidity conditions" means an environment with temperature of
28 °C and humidity of 85%.
• "Low humidity conditions" means an environment with humidity of 20%.
Special Media
You can use the following special media such as postcards and envelopes.
*1:Select the paper type setting for the paper loaded on a tray. For more information, refer to "Changing
the Paper Settings" (P.49).
*2:Most ideal image quality with the paper can be obtained by setting the image quality for each type of
paper. For more information on the settings, refer to "Image Quality" (P.146).
Limited Paper
You can use the following paper with limitations.
38
Paper Types
*1:Select the paper type setting for the paper loaded on a tray. For more information, refer to "Changing
the Paper Settings" (P.49).
*2:Most ideal image quality with the paper can be obtained by setting the image quality for each type of
paper. For more information on the settings, refer to "Image Quality" (P.146).
Note • "High temperature and humidity conditions" means an environment with temperature of
28 °C and humidity of 85%.
Inhibited Media
You can use the following special media such as postcards and envelopes.
*1:Select the paper type setting for the paper loaded on a tray. For more information, refer to "Changing
the Paper Settings" (P.49).
*2:Most ideal image quality with the paper can be obtained by setting the image quality for each type of
paper. For more information on the settings, refer to "Image Quality" (P.146).
39
2 Paper and Other Media
Note • For more information on special paper such as other heavyweight paper, contact our
Customer Support Center.
Unusable Paper
Using paper and transparencies not recommended by Fuji Xerox may cause a paper
jam or machine malfunction. Use paper and transparencies recommended by Fuji
Xerox.
Paper and Other Media
40
Loading Paper
Loading Paper
Adding paper
When the machine runs out of paper during copying or printing, a message appears on
the touch screen. Add paper according to the message instructions. Copying or printing
automatically resumes when paper is added.
Note • Carefully fan the paper before loading it in a tray. Otherwise, the paper may stick together,
resulting in paper jams, or multiple sheets being fed to the machine simultaneously.
41
2 Paper and Other Media
2
3 Before loading the paper, flex the sheets
back and forth, and then fan them.
42
Loading Paper
43
2 Paper and Other Media
2
4 Load the envelope in the tray.
When Loading COM-10, Monarch, or DL
When Loading C5
44
Loading Paper
1 Open Tray 5.
45
2 Paper and Other Media
46
Loading Paper
2
When Loading C5
47
2 Paper and Other Media
z Print media should be loaded with the recommended print side down and the top of
the print media going into the machine first.
z Do not place objects on the Tray 5. Also, avoid pressing down or applying excessive
force on it.
Paper and Other Media
48
Changing the Paper Settings
This section describes how to change the paper type for Trays and how to set image
quality processing by the individual paper type.
After loading paper in a tray, specify the type of paper loaded and select image quality
for the paper type. Setting Image quality for each paper type enables you to print with
the most suitable image quality for the paper type.
49
2 Paper and Other Media
9 Select [Cancel], [Save], [Close] or [Confirm] repeatedly until the [Paper Tray Settings]
screen is displayed.
10 Select [Image Quality].
Note • Select [ ] to display the previous screen
or [ ] to display the next screen.
50
Changing the Paper Settings
51
3 Maintenance
This chapter describes how to replace consumables, clean the machine, calibrate
colors, print a report/list, and delete a print job with an invalid User ID.
z Replacing Consumables .............................................................................54
z
Cleaning the Machine .................................................................................79
z Executing Calibration ..................................................................................87
z
Adjusting Color Registration .......................................................................90
z Printing a Report/List ..................................................................................93
z Deleting a Private Charge Print Job with an Invalid User ID.......................94
z
Setting Restore Tool ...................................................................................95
3 Maintenance
Replacing Consumables
The machine is provided with the following consumables and periodic replacement parts.
We recommend the use of the following consumables as they are manufactured to meet
the specifications of the machine.
Note • We recommend that you always keep spare consumables/periodic replacement parts
available.
WARNING
z Use a broom or a wet cloth to wipe off spilled toner. Never use a vacuum cleaner
for the spills. It may catch fire by electric sparks inside the vacuum cleaner and
cause explosion. If you spill a large volume of toner, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative.
z
Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame. Remaining toner in the cartridge
may catch fire and cause burn injuries or explosion.
If you have a used toner cartridge no longer needed, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative for its disposal.
z
Never throw a waste toner container into an open flame. Toner may catch fire and
cause burn injuries or explosion.
If you have a used waste toner container no longer needed, contact your local Fuji
Xerox representative for its disposal.
54
Replacing Consumables
CAUTION
z Keep drum cartridges and toner cartridges out of the reach of children. If a child
accidentally swallows toner, spit it out, rinse mouth with water, drink water and
consult a physician immediately.
z When replacing drum cartridges and toner cartridges, be careful not to spill the
toner. In case of any toner spills, avoid contact with clothes, skin, eyes and mouth
as well as inhalation.
z
If toner spills onto your skin or clothing, wash it off with soap and water.
If you get toner particles in your eyes, wash it out with plenty of water for at least
15 minutes until irritation is gone. Consult a physician if necessary.
If you inhale toner particles, move to a fresh air location and rinse your mouth with
water.
Maintenance
If you swallow toner, spit it out, rinse your mouth with water, drink plenty of water
and consult a physician immediately.
55
3 Maintenance
*1 The messages in the above table apply to Yellow Toner. "Yellow Toner [Y]" shown in the
messages vary depending on the color and number of the applicable toner.
3 *2 The remaining page yield for copy/print jobs is applicable when A4 paper is used. The value is an
estimate and varies depending on the conditions such as the content printed, dot coverage (area
coverage), paper size, paper type, copy/print density, output image type, and the machine operating
environment.
CAUTION
z Keep drum cartridges and toner cartridges out of the reach of children. If a child
accidentally swallows toner, spit it out, rinse mouth with water, drink water and
consult a physician immediately.
z When replacing drum cartridges and toner cartridges, be careful not to spill the
toner. In case of any toner spills, avoid contact with clothes, skin, eyes and mouth
as well as inhalation.
z If toner spills onto your skin or clothing, wash it off with soap and water.
If you get toner particles in your eyes, wash it out with plenty of water for at least
15 minutes until irritation is gone. Consult a physician if necessary.
If you inhale toner particles, move to a fresh air location and rinse your mouth with
water.
If you swallow toner, spit it out, rinse your mouth with water, drink plenty of water
and consult a physician immediately.
Important • To prevent electric shock, always turn off the machine and disconnect the power cable from
the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
• When replacing a toner cartridge, toner may spill and soil the floor. We recommend laying
paper on the floor beforehand.
• The use of toner cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may degrade image quality and
performance. Use only toner cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox.
• When the remaining amount of toner is low, the machine may stop printing and display a
message. If this occurs, replace the toner cartridge to resume copying or printing.
• Replace toner cartridges while the machine is on.
• Copy or print density may decrease slightly after the message "Please order a XXX Toner
Cartridge" appears on the touch screen.
• If you replace a toner cartridge with a partially used toner cartridge, the number of pages that
you can copy or print after the message "Please order a XXX Toner Cartridge" is displayed
may differ significantly from the values described in the above table.
56
Replacing Consumables
1 Make sure that the <Data> indicator light is off and there are no jobs currently in
process.
2 Press the power switch to the [ ] position to
switch the power off.
Maintenance
3
4 Pull out the toner cartridge slowly, and slide
it out.
WARNING
Never throw a toner cartridge into an open
flame. Remaining toner in the cartridge
may catch fire and cause burn injuries or
explosion.
If you have a used toner cartridge no
longer needed, contact your local Fuji
Xerox representative for its disposal.
Important • Slide out the toner cartridge gently. Otherwise, toner may spill from the cartridge.
• Do not touch the shutter part as shown in the illustration. Toner can dirty and stain your
hands.
• Be careful not to spill toner when handling the toner cartridge.
57
3 Maintenance
3
Replacing Waste Toner Container
The waste toner container holds used toner. The following messages are displayed on
the touch screen according to the status of the waste toner container. Follow the
messages as necessary.
*1 The remaining page yield for copy/print jobs is applicable when A4 paper is used. The value is an
estimate and varies depending on the conditions such as the content printed, dot coverage (area
coverage), paper size, paper type, copy/print density, output image type, and machine operating
environment.
When replacing the waste toner container, clean the laser scanners located behind the
waste toner container by using the cleaning bar supplied with a new waste toner
container to prevent inconsistencies in density or color in copies and prints.
WARNING
z Use a broom or a wet cloth to wipe off spilled toner. Never use a vacuum cleaner
for the spills. It may catch fire by electric sparks inside the vacuum cleaner and
cause explosion. If you spill a large volume of toner, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative.
z Never throw a waste toner container into an open flame. Toner may catch fire and
cause burn injuries or explosion.
If you have a used waste toner container no longer needed, contact your local Fuji
Xerox representative for its disposal.
58
Replacing Consumables
Important • To prevent electric shock, always turn off the machine and disconnect the power cable from
the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
• Do not touch the five gray-colored sponge parts on the back side of the waste toner
container. Otherwise, your hands may get dirty with toner.
• When replacing the waste toner container, toner may spill and soil the floor. We recommend
laying paper on the floor beforehand.
• The proper disposal of used waste toner containers is required. Return the old waste toner
container to our Customer Support Center.
• The use of waste toner containers not recommended by Fuji Xerox may degrade image
quality and performance. Use only waste toner containers recommended by Fuji Xerox.
Maintenance
2 Hook your finger under the waste toner 3
container handle.
WARNING
Never throw a waste toner container into
an open flame. Toner may catch fire and
cause burn injuries or explosion.
If you have a used waste toner container
no longer needed, contact your local Fuji
Xerox representative for its disposal.
59
3 Maintenance
3
Replacing Drum Cartridges R1, R2, R3, or R4
The machine displays the following messages when a drum cartridge needs to be
replaced. When the message is displayed, contact our Customer Support Center.
Refer to this section and locate the position or the indicated drum cartridge (R1, R2,
R3, or R4), and replace the drum cartridge.
If you continue to copy or print without replacing the drum cartridge after the message
is displayed on the touch screen, the machine will stop after copying or printing the
number of pages shown in the following table.
60
Replacing Consumables
CAUTION
z Keep drum cartridges and toner cartridges out of the reach of children. If a child
accidentally swallows toner, spit it out, rinse mouth with water, drink water and
consult a physician immediately.
z
When replacing drum cartridges and toner cartridges, be careful not to spill the
toner. In case of any toner spills, avoid contact with clothes, skin, eyes and mouth
as well as inhalation.
z
If toner spills onto your skin or clothing, wash it off with soap and water.
If you get toner particles in your eyes, wash it out with plenty of water for at least
15 minutes until irritation is gone. Consult a physician if necessary.
If you inhale toner particles, move to a fresh air location and rinse your mouth with
Maintenance
water.
If you swallow toner, spit it out, rinse your mouth with water, drink plenty of water
and consult a physician immediately.
Important • To protect the drum cartridges against bright light, close the inner cover within five minutes.
If the front cover remains open for more than five minutes, print quality may deteriorate.
3
• The use of drum cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may degrade image quality and
performance. Use only drum cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox.
Note • To prevent electric shock, always turn off the machine and disconnect the power cable from
the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
• Do not expose drum cartridges to direct sunlight or strong light from indoor fluorescent
lighting. Do not touch or scratch the surface of the drum. Doing so may result in
unsatisfactory printing.
• The remaining page yield is applicable when A4 paper is used. The value is an estimate and
varies depending on the conditions such as the paper size, the paper orientation, the
number of pages continuously print, and the machine operating environment.
• Images output from the machine may get dirty after the message "Please order a Drum
Cartridge XXX RX" appears on the touch screen.
1 Make sure that the <Data> indicator light is off and there are no jobs currently in
process.
2 Press the power switch to the [ ] position to
switch the power off.
61
3 Maintenance
7 Take the new drum cartridge out of the box, and insert the used drum cartridge into
the supplied plastic bag and place it into the box.
Important • To protect the drum from overexposure to bright light, do not remove the orange protective
covering until you insert the cartridge in the machine.
• Do not place the new drum cartridge in an upright position.
Note • Be careful not to spill toner when handling the drum cartridge.
62
Replacing Consumables
Maintenance
3
63
3 Maintenance
3
15 Take the new cleaning bar out of the plastic bag.
16 Attach the new cleaning pad to the cleaning
bar.
18 Repeat step 17 for the other three holes. One insertion is enough for each hole.
19 Return the cleaning bar to its original
position.
64
Replacing Consumables
Maintenance
replaced, a message appears on the touch screen. When this message appears, load
a new staple case into the staple cartridge.
Important • The use of staple cartridges not recommended by Fuji Xerox may degrade quality and
performance. Use only staple cartridges recommended by Fuji Xerox.
65
3 Maintenance
66
Replacing Consumables
CAUTION
Fusing Safety
When removing the fusing unit, always switch off first and wait for 40 minutes until it
cools off.
Note • To prevent electric shock, always turn off the machine and disconnect the power cable from
the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
• To avoid burns, do not replace the fusing unit immediately after printing. The fusing unit
becomes extremely hot during use.
1 Make sure that the <Data> indicator light is off and there are no jobs currently in
process.
2 Press the power switch to the [ ] position to
Maintenance
switch the power off and wait for 30 minutes
before removing the fusing unit.
67
3 Maintenance
6 Hold the new fusing unit by the grips on both sides, and then place the fusing unit onto
the machine.
Important • Hold the fusing unit with both hands so
that you do not drop it.
Note • To prevent electric shock, always turn off the machine and disconnect the power cable from
the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
Important • Ensure nothing touches or scratches the surface (black-colored film) of the transfer belt unit.
Scratches, dirt, or oil from your hands on the film of the transfer belt unit may reduce print
quality.
• To protect the drum cartridges from overexposure to bright light, close the inner cover within
five minutes. If the front cover remains open for more than five minutes, print quality may
degrade.
1 Make sure that the <Data> indicator light is off and there are no jobs currently in
process.
68
Replacing Consumables
Maintenance
3 Lift up the latch of the right hand cover to
open the cover.
3
69
3 Maintenance
70
Replacing Consumables
Maintenance
3
71
3 Maintenance
72
Replacing Consumables
Maintenance
firmly to the machine.
• If the front cover is not completely closed,
a message will appear and the machine
will remain paused.
3
Replacing Transfer Roller
Note • To prevent electric shock, always turn off the machine and disconnect the power cable from
the grounded outlet before performing maintenance.
1 Make sure that the <Data> indicator light is off and there are no jobs currently in
process.
2 Press the power switch to the [ ] position to
switch the power off.
73
3 Maintenance
74
Replacing Consumables
Maintenance
3
3 Push the separator roller cartridge towards
the front of the machine, and then rotate the
separator roller cartridge to the right.
75
3 Maintenance
76
Replacing Consumables
Maintenance
3
77
3 Maintenance
78
Cleaning the Machine
This section describes how to clean the machine such as the machine exterior,
document cover, document feeder, and document glass.
WARNING
When cleaning this product, use the designated cleaning materials exclusive to it.
Other cleaning materials may result in poor performance of the product. Never use
aerosol cleaners, or it may catch fire and cause explosion.
CAUTION
When cleaning this product, always switch off the power and then the main power
Maintenance
inside the body front cover, and unplug the product. Access to a live machine interior
may cause electric shock.
79
3 Maintenance
80
Cleaning the Machine
1 Make sure that the <Data> indicator light is off and there are no jobs currently in
process.
2 Press the power switch to the [ ] position to
Maintenance
switch the power off.
3
3 Lift up the latch of the right hand cover to
open the cover.
81
3 Maintenance
82
Cleaning the Machine
Maintenance
12 Slide the transfer belt unit into the machine
and stop when the visible line reaches the
3
machine.
83
3 Maintenance
84
Cleaning the Machine
Maintenance
then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.
Important • Do not use cleaning agents other than
water or neutral detergent.
Note • If you cannot remove dirt easily, gently
wipe the document cover with a soft cloth
moistened with a small amount of neutral
detergent. 3
2 Wipe the document glass with a soft cloth
moistened with water to remove any dirt, and
then wipe it with a soft, dry cloth.
Important • Do not use cleaning agents other than
water or neutral detergent.
Note • If you cannot remove dirt easily, gently
wipe the document glass with a soft cloth
moistened with a small amount of neutral
detergent.
85
3 Maintenance
86
Executing Calibration
Executing Calibration
The machine can automatically calibrate colors when the reproducibility of density or
color in copies and prints deteriorates. The machine can adjust the gradation for each
screen type.
The following three types of screen are available.
z
Copy Job
Calibrates the screen for [Text], [Photo & Text], or [Map] of [Original Type].
z Print Job 1
For PCL print drivers
- Calibrates the screen used for the functions ([Image Quality], [Image Adjustment
Maintenance
Mode], and [Image Types]) set in the [Color Options] tab.
- Calibrates the screen when [Auto Screening], [Fineness], or [Standard] is selected
for [Screen] in the [Advanced] tab.
For PostScript print drivers
- Calibrates the screen when [High Quality] or [High Resolution] of [Image Quality]
and [Auto Screening], [Fineness], or [Standard] of [Screen] in the [Color Options]
3
tab is selected.
- Calibrates the screen when [High Speed] of [Image Quality] and [Fineness] or
[Standard] of [Screen] in the [Color Options] tab is selected.
z Print Job 2
For PCL print drivers
- Calibrates the screen when [Gradation] is selected for [Screen] in the [Advanced]
tab (except when [High Resolution] is selected for [Image Quality]).
- Calibrates the screen when [Print Page Mode] is selected in the [Advanced] tab
(except when [High Resolution] is selected for [Image Quality]).
For PostScript print drivers
- Calibrates the screen when [High Quality] or [High Resolution] of [Image Quality]
and [Gradation] of [Screen] in the [Color Options] tab is selected.
- Calibrates the screen when [High Speed] of [Image Quality] and [Auto Screening]
or [Gradation] of [Screen] in the [Color Options] tab is selected.
Note • We recommend executing auto calibration for all four screen types. When the adjustment for
one screen type is complete, specify the next screen type and repeat the procedure.
• If color is not calibrated despite the periodic execution of auto calibration, contact our
Customer Support Center.
• Confirm the settings of the following items under [Tools] > [Copy Service Settings] > [Copy
Defaults] in the System Administration mode before executing auto calibration:
- Lighten/Darken: Normal
- Contrast: Normal
- Sharpness: Normal
- Saturation: Normal
- Color Balance: 0, 0, 0
- Color Shift: Normal
• After finishing the auto calibration, change the settings of [Copy Defaults] if necessary. For
information on [Copy Defaults], refer to "Copy Defaults" (P.163).
• During auto calibration, the machine cannot receive print jobs and faxes.
The following describes how to perform calibration.
87
3 Maintenance
3 Select [Start].
Note • The message "Outputting the Calibration
Chart... - Copy Job" appears and the
document for calibration (Calibration
Chart) is printed.
6 Select [Start].
The message "Calibration in progress. - Copy Job" appears and the machine
automatically calibrates the colors. It takes about 10 seconds to complete calibration.
A screen showing the result appears.
88
Executing Calibration
7 Select [Confirm].
8 To continue calibration for other screen types, repeat steps 2 to 7.
9 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
10 Select [Close].
11 Copy to confirm the image quality.
Note • During auto calibration, the machine cannot receive print jobs or faxes.
• After executing the calibration, you can manually perform horizontal color calibration. For
more information, refer to "Adjusting Color Registration" (P.90).
12 Select [Close].
Maintenance
3
89
3 Maintenance
3
<Log In/Out> button
90
Adjusting Color Registration
Maintenance
7 Select [Auto Color Registration].
8 Select [Start].
91
3 Maintenance
4 Find the values of the straightest lines from (LEFT) (Lead Edge) (RIGHT)
the LY (left) and RY (right) patterns for Yellow Magenta Yellow
yellow.
Maintenance
Cyan Cyan
92
Printing a Report/List
Printing a Report/List
You can print a report/list to check the settings and communication status.
This section describes how to print a report/ list.
Note • When the <Data> indicator is not lit, you cannot print the Stored Documents List.
For information on the types of report/list, refer to "Print Reports" (P.101).
Maintenance
<Machine Status> button
4 Select a report or list to print, and then press the <Start> button.
93
3 Maintenance
When the Private Charge Print feature is used, all the print jobs with a User ID,
regardless of its validity, are stored with the Private Charge Print feature. The system
administrator can set the expiration date and can set up the machine to delete the
expired jobs automatically, or manually delete them.
This section describes how to delete documents with an invalid User ID stored with the
Private Charge Print feature.
For more information on how to set the period of time save jobs, refer to "Stored File Settings" (P.223).
94
Setting Restore Tool
Setting Restore Tool backs up the settings data of the machine to a network-connected
computer to prevent the loss of data resulting from the malfunction of the machine's
hard disk.
The feature is designed to restore data to the machine after the hard disk is replaced.
For more information on Setting Restore Tool, contact our Customer Support Center.
Note • You can back up the setting data of the machine when the hard disk and the Ethernet
interface are installed on the machine.
Maintenance
z Address Book
z
Folder (except for document files)
z
User account list
z
Job Flow
z Stored Programming 3
z
Job log
z
Error log
z Auditron log
z Other information such as user setting data
Users cannot replace the hard disk by themselves. When replacing the hard disk,
contact our Customer Support Center.
95
4 Machine Status
This chapter describes the features for checking the machine status.
z Overview of Machine Status .......................................................................98
z Machine Information ...................................................................................99
z Faults ........................................................................................................114
z Supplies ....................................................................................................115
z
Billing Information .....................................................................................116
4 Machine Status
You can check machine status and the number of printed pages on the screen. You
can also print various reports/lists to check the job history, settings and registered
information.
You can check the following information on the [Machine Status] screen:
Machine Information
4 You can check the machine configuration, paper tray status, and hard disk overwriting
status. You can also change or set print modes, and check the number of pages printed
per meter or per user. You also can print various reports/lists to check the job history,
settings and registered information.
Note • To perform the Overwrite Hard Disk feature, an optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
For more information, refer to "Machine Information" (P.99).
Faults
You can check the information on errors that occurred on the machine.
For more information, refer to "Faults" (P.114).
Supplies
You can check the status of consumables.
For more information, refer to "Supplies" (P.115).
Billing Information
You can check the number of pages printed by meter (meters 1 to 4).
For more information, refer to "Billing Information" (P.116).
98
Machine Information
Machine Information
On the [Machine Information] screen, you can check the machine configuration and
paper tray status, print various reports/lists, and change and set print mode settings.
The following shows the reference section for each item.
General Information ................................................................................................................... 99
Paper Tray Status ..................................................................................................................... 101
Print Reports............................................................................................................................. 101
Automatically Printed Reports/Lists ........................................................................................ 109
Overwrite Hard Disk ................................................................................................................ 110
Print Mode................................................................................................................................ 110
Fax Receiving Mode ................................................................................................................ 113
Machine Status
1 Press the <Machine Status> button.
2 On the [Machine Information] screen
displayed, you can check the machine
status.
General Information
On the [General Information] screen, you can check the serial number of the machine,
machine configuration, and software version.
Website
Tells you whom to contact when making inquiries about maintenance and operation.
IP Address
Indicates the IP address of the machine.
Machine Configuration
Displays the [Machine Configuration] screen.
For more information, refer to "[Machine Configuration] Screen" (P.100).
Software Version
Displays the [Software Version] screen.
For more information, refer to "[Software Version] Screen" (P.100).
99
4 Machine Status
On the [Machine Configuration] screen, you can check the following items:
Machine Status
z
Configuration Code z
System Memory Size z
TIFF/JPEG
z Document Feeder z PCL 6 / 5e z PDF
z Paper Tray z KS z XPS*1
z Offset Stacking Module z KSSM z DocuWorks
z Output Device z KS5895 z USB
4 z Duplex Module z PostScript 3 z Fax Kit 2
z Hard Disk z HP-GL/2 z Fax Main Board
z Page Memory Size z ESC/P z Gigabit Ethernet Board
On the [Software Version] screen, you can check the following items:
z Controller ROM z Fax ROM
z IOT ROM z Boot ROM
z Finisher AB ROM z SJFI
z ADF ROM z SSMI
100
Machine Information
Machine Status
Print Reports 4
The following describes how to print a report and a list.
Note • The items displayed vary depending on the optional features installed.
101
4 Machine Status
printed.
Activity Report
You can check whether transmissions completed successfully or not. The remote
terminal name and the result and status are recorded by sorting into incoming or
outgoing fax.
Copy Reports
Configuration Report
You can check the hardware configuration, network information, and print and copy
settings of the machine.
Note • The contents of [Configuration Report] are identical whether it is printed from [Copy
Reports], [Printer Reports], [Scan Reports], or [Fax Reports].
102
Machine Information
Printer Reports
Machine Status
You can print the following items when printer related options are installed.
When Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) is installed:
z PostScript Logical Printers List z PostScript Font List
Configuration Report
You can check the hardware configuration, network information, and print and copy 4
settings of the machine with the report.
Note • The contents of [Configuration Report] are identical whether it is printed from [Copy
Reports], [Printer Reports], [Scan Reports], or [Fax Reports].
103
4 Machine Status
Font List
Prints the list of fonts available on the machine.
Note • Information printed varies depending on the options installed.
Machine Status
Reports
You can print the Configuration Report, Scan/Fax Configuration Report, and Domain
Filter List. Select a list to print, and then press the <Start> button.
z Configuration Report
You can check the hardware configuration, network information, and print and copy
settings of the machine.
Note • The contents of [Configuration Report] are identical whether it is printed from [Copy
Reports], [Printer Reports], [Scan Reports], or [Fax Reports].
z Scan/Fax Configuration
You can check the settings configured for the Scan feature and the Fax feature.
z
Domain Filter List
You can check the settings configured for the domain which filters data
transmissions.
104
Machine Information
Address Book
You can check the settings for the address numbers. When you specify a range of
address numbers, the list of settings for the specified address numbers is printed. Each
page contains the settings information on 50 address numbers.
Machine Status
Fax Reports
Reports
You can print the Configuration Report, Scan/Fax Configuration Report, Folder
Selector List, Inbound Fax Spam List, and Domain Filter List. Select a list to print, and
then press the <Start> button.
z Configuration Report
You can check the hardware configuration, network information, and print and copy
settings of the machine.
Note • The contents of [Configuration Report] are identical whether it is printed from [Copy
Reports], [Printer Reports], [Scan Reports], or [Fax Reports].
z Scan/Fax Configuration
You can check the settings configured for the Fax feature and the Scan feature.
Note • The contents of [Configuration Report] are identical whether it is printed from [Copy
Reports], [Printer Reports], [Scan Reports], or [Fax Reports].
z Folder Selector List
You can check the settings for the Folder Sorting feature.
105
4 Machine Status
Address Book
You can check the settings for the address numbers (speed dial), fax group recipients,
and relay stations.
When you specify a range of address numbers, the lists of settings for the specified
address numbers and relay stations are printed. Each page contains the settings
information on 50 address numbers.
Machine Status
For information on how to register speed dial and fax group recipients, refer to "Add Address Book
Entry" (P.240) and "Create Fax Group Recipients" (P.246).
Selecting [Address Book] displays the screen for specifying a range of address
numbers. Select a range of numbers, and then press the <Start> button.
z
Fax Group Recipients
You can print the list of settings for Fax Group Recipients.
z Select All
You can print the lists of settings for all address numbers, fax group recipients, and
relay stations.
z
Select All
You can print the list of all billing data.
106
Machine Information
Folder List
Prints the list of folder settings and the procedure for saving files to folders.
Note • [Folder List] appears when the [Tools] button is displayed on the [Services Home] screen.
For information on how to create a folder, refer to "Create Folder" (P.230).
Machine Status
3 Press the <Start> button.
Auditron Reports
You can print an auditron report by each user. Note that the content on the screen
differs depending on whether the Auditron mode for services is enabled or not.
Note • [Auditron Reports] appears when the [Tools] button is displayed on the [Services Home]
screen.
• You cannot output the report to a file. To output a report to a file, use the ApeosWare Log
Management (purchase separately) or ApeosWare Accounting Service (purchase
separately).
107
4 Machine Status
108
Machine Information
Note • [No.] displayed on the report is the User Administration Number assigned when a user is
registered under [Accounting] or [Authentication/Security Settings].
Machine Status
registered under [Accounting] or [Authentication/Security Settings].
Transmission Report
The report is automatically printed when a transmission of scanned data to a computer
on a network or a transmission of scanned data by e-mail succeeds. When a fax or the
Internet Fax transmission succeeds, this report is also printed. You can check a
thumbnail of the scanned data and its transmission result.
You can set not to print out the Transmission Report - Undelivered automatically.
For information on setting whether to print the report for e-mails automatically, refer to "Scan File
Transfer Report" (P.149).
For information on setting whether to print the report for faxes automatically, refer to "Transmission
Report - Job Undelivered" (P.148).
Folder Report
You can confirm that a document is stored in a folder.
For information on setting whether to print the report automatically, refer to "Folder Report" (P.148).
Broadcast Report
You can check the result of a broadcast transmission. The recipients and transmission
result/status are recorded.
If you set to print this report automatically, it is printed each time a broadcast
transmission is completed.
109
4 Machine Status
For information on setting whether to print the report automatically, refer to "Broadcast/Multi-Poll
Report" (P.149).
Multi-poll Report
You can check the result of a multi-poll communication (polling from multiple
recipients). The remote terminal name and transmission result/status are recorded.
If you set to print this report automatically, it is printed each time a multi-poll
transmission is completed.
For information on setting whether to print the report automatically, refer to "Broadcast/Multi-Poll
Report" (P.149).
result. To have the report printed, enter the System Administration mode.
For information on specifying whether or not to have the report printed automatically, refer to "Scan File
Transfer Report (Fax Server)" (P.149).
Print Mode
You can print the programming settings configured in the ESC/P-K emulation mode
and retrieve the programming.
Note • The items displayed vary depending on the options installed.
110
Machine Information
Off-line
The machine does not accept data from a computer. Any data being sent is cancelled
and not printed.
On-line
The printer accepts data from a computer.
Machine Status
3 Select a printer language to set a print mode.
4 Set each item.
Note • The items displayed vary depending on
the printer language.
Retrieve Programming
You can retrieve and use settings registered in memory.
Factory Defaults
You can use the factory default settings.
Custom Settings
Displays the numbers stored in the memory.
Programming
You can check or change the value set for the print mode item number.
For the item numbers that can be configured in each mode menu, refer to "ESC/P-K Emulation" (P.537),
"PDF Direct Print" (P.552), "PCL Emulation Settings" (P.559), and "HP-GL/2 Emulation Settings"
(P.565).
1 Select [Programming].
111
4 Machine Status
Store/Delete Programming
For ESC/P-K and HP-GL/2 emulations, you can register settings in memory.
You can register up to 20 print modes for ESC/P-K and HP-GL/2 emulations.
Delete
Deletes a number selected. Select [Delete], and then select a number to delete.
Important • Deleted numbers cannot be restored.
3 Select the memory number to store or to delete.
Default Programming
You can start the machine using the settings stored in memory as default settings.
112
Machine Information
Factory Defaults
You can use the factory default settings.
Custom Settings
Displays the numbers stored in memory.
Password
For PDF Direct Print, if a password is set for files, set the password here in advance.
PDF files can be printed only when the passwords assigned and entered are the same.
You can use up to 32 characters for the password.
Machine Status
1 Press [Password].
2 Enter a password of up to 32 single-byte characters with the keyboard displayed, and
select [Save].
Manual Receive
The machine manually receives faxes from a remote machine. This mode is convenient
to confirm the sender or use an external telephone before receiving faxes.
Auto Receive
The machine automatically receives faxes.
3 Select [Save].
113
4 Machine Status
Faults
This section describes how to check the information on errors that occurred on the
machine.
The error history report shows the list of the latest 50 errors. The items printed include
the date and time, error code, and error category.
The following describes how to print the error history report.
114
Supplies
Supplies
You can check the status of consumables on the [Supplies] screen. The status of
consumables is shown as "OK", "Replace Soon (Order Now)", or "Replace Now".
The following describes the procedure to check the status of consumables.
For information on replacing consumables, refer to "Maintenance" (P.53).
Machine Status
3 Select [Toner] from the drop-down list box,
and then select [Other Consumables] and
confirm the status of the consumables.
4
z
Black Toner [K] z
Drum Cartridge [R2]
z
Cyan Toner [C] z
Drum Cartridge [R3]
z Magenta Toner [M] z Drum Cartridge [R4]
z Yellow Toner [Y] z Waste Toner Container
z Drum Cartridge [R1] z Staple Cartridge
Important • If you replace a toner cartridge with a partially used toner cartridge (such as a toner cartridge
removed from another ApeosPort-IV C4430 or DocuCentre-IV C4430, the status displayed
may differ from the actual remaining amount. When replacing toner cartridges, we
recommend that you use new ones.
Note • The items displayed vary depending on the options installed.
• Select [ ] to display the previous screen or [ ] to display the next screen.
115
4 Machine Status
Billing Information
On the [Billing Information] screen, you can check the number of pages printed per
meter or user.
The following shows the reference section for each item:
Billing Information ...................................................................................................................116
User Account Billing Information ............................................................................................117
Billing Information
4 You can check the total number of copies and pages printed by individual meters.
Serial Number
Displays the serial number of the machine.
Color Impressions
Displays the total number of pages copied and printed in full color.
Black Impressions
Displays the total number of pages copied and printed in black and white,
and pages faxed*1.
Total Impressions
Displays the total number of Color Impressions and Black Impressions.
Note • When print data resulting from color conversion using an ICC profile, for example, on the
application is printed at Auto (Color/B/W), even documents that appear in black-and-white
on the monitor are printed in color. In this case, meter 3 (color printing) is used for counting
the number of prints.
• *1 is applied on models equipped with the Fax features. Only B/W and not color is supported
for Faxes.
116
Billing Information
Machine Status
When a password is required, select
[Next] and enter the user's passcode, and
select [Enter].
117
4 Machine Status
118
5 Tools
Each feature of the machine is set to the factory default (initial) settings, but you
can customize these settings in accordance with your environment. To change
or customize these settings, enter the System Administration mode and make
changes in the [Tools] screen.
This chapter describes the features that can be changed and the procedures to
change the settings.
z
System Settings Procedure ......................................................................120
z Tools Menu List ........................................................................................124
z Common Service Settings ........................................................................138
z Copy Service Settings ..............................................................................162
z Connectivity & Network Setup ..................................................................172
z
Print Service Settings ...............................................................................192
z Scan Service Settings...............................................................................199
z
Fax Service Settings.................................................................................206
z E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings ........................................................217
z Folder Service Settings.............................................................................220
z
Job Flow Service Settings (ApeosPort Series Models Only) ....................221
z Media Print Service Settings.....................................................................222
z
Stored File Settings ..................................................................................223
z Web Applications Service Setup (ApeosPort Series Models Only) ..........225
z
Web Browser Setup (ApeosPort Series Models Only) .............................228
z Setup ........................................................................................................230
z Accounting ................................................................................................248
z
Authentication / Security Settings .............................................................257
5 Tools
To change or customize the system settings, enter the System Administration mode.
This section describes the basic procedures for system settings. The following shows
the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Entering System Administration Mode .........................................................................120
Step 2 Entering the System Administrator User ID and Passcode ...........................................120
Step 3 Selecting [Tools]............................................................................................................121
Step 4 Selecting a Setting Item on the [Tools] Screen..............................................................121
Step 5 Setting a Feature ............................................................................................................123
Step 6 Exiting System Administration Mode ...........................................................................123
5
<Log In/Out> button
120
System Settings Procedure
Tools
5
System Settings
You can set or change the default values of each service.
121
5 Tools
Setup
You can create and change folders, job flow sheets, and the Address Book (speed dial
numbers).
For more information, refer to "Setup" (P.230).
Accounting
You can register users and configure the settings for account administration.
For more information, refer to "Accounting" (P.248).
122
System Settings Procedure
Tools
selecting [Logout].
• The <Log In/Out> button is unlit when the machine exits from the System Administration
mode.
5
123
5 Tools
The following tables list the items that can be set on the [Tools] screen. Note that some
items may not appear depending on the configuration of the machine.
System Settings
z
Control Panel Alert Tone (P.141)
z
Base Tone (P.141)
z
Machine Ready Tone (P.141)
z Job Complete Tone 1, 2 (P.141)
z
Fault Tone (P.141)
z
Auto Clear Alert Tone (P.141)
z
Alert Tone (P.142)
z
Out of Paper Warning Tone (P.142)
z Low Toner Alert Tone (P.142)
z
Stored Programming Tone (P.142)
z
Stored Programming Complete Tone (P.142)
z
Line Monitor Volume (P.142)
z Ringing Volume (P.142)
Screen/Button Settings (P.142) z
Screen Default (P.142)
z Screen After Auto Clear (P.142)
z Auto Display of Login Screen (P.142)
z Custom Buttons 1 to 3 (P.143)
z Services Home (P.143)
z Services Home - Additional Features (P.143)
z Job Type on Job Status screen (P.143)
z Default Language (P.143)
z
Screen Brightness (P.143)
z
Reconfirm E-mail Recipient (P.143)
z Reconfirm Fax / Internet Fax Recipient (P.144)
124
Tools Menu List
Tools
z 2 Sided Report (P.149)
z Activity Report - Recipient (P.149)
z Job Flow Error Report (P.149)
Maintenance (P.149) z
z
EP Diagnostic Request/Repair Request (P.149)
Check EP Connection (P.150)
5
z Initialize Hard Disk (P.150)
z Delete All Data (P.150)
z
Software Options (P.150)
z Software Upgrade (P.150)
z Power on Self Test (P.150)
z Adjust Color Registration (P.150)
z Adjust Paper Registration (P.151)
z
Delete All Certificates/Initialize Settings (P.151)
Watermark (P.151) z Date Format (P.151)
z
Default Watermark Effect (P.151)
z Default Watermark (P.151)
z Font Size (P.152)
z Background Pattern (P.152)
z Font Color (P.152)
z
Density (P.152)
z Watermark/Background Contrast (P.152)
z Force Watermark - Copy (P.152)
z Force Watermark - Client Print (P.152)
z
Force Watermark - Print Stored File (P.152)
z Force Watermark - Media Print (P.152)
z Custom Watermark 1 to 3 (P.153)
Force Annotation (P.153) z Apply Layout Template on Copy/Prints Jobs
(P.153)
z Delete Layout Template (P.154)
z
Create Text String (P.154)
Print Universal Unique ID (ApeosPort z
Print Universal Unique ID (P.154)
Series Models Only) (P.154) z Print Position (P.154)
z Print Position Adjustment (P.154)
z
Print Position (Side 2) (P.155)
125
5 Tools
126
Tools Menu List
Tools
z Edge Erase - Bottom Edge (P.165)
z Edge Erase - Left Edge (P.165)
z Edge Erase - Right Edge (P.166)
Center Erase/Binding Edge Erase (P.166)
5
z
127
5 Tools
128
Tools Menu List
Tools
Series Models Only) (P.179) z Proxy Server Setup (P.179)
z Addresses to Bypass Proxy Server (P.179)
z HTTP Proxy Server Name (P.179)
HTTP Proxy Server Port Number (P.180)
5
z
129
5 Tools
130
Tools Menu List
Tools
z E-mail Encryption (P.201)
z Searchable Text (P.201)
z Language of the Original (P.202)
Searchable - Text Compression (P.202)
5
z
131
5 Tools
z Sender ID (P.209)
z Save Undelivered Faxes (P.209)
z
Save Deleted Faxes (P.209)
5 z
z
Saved Faxes - Auto Delete (P.209)
Transmission Interval (P.209)
z Batch Send (P.209)
z Manual Send/Receive Default (P.210)
z
Fax Receiving Mode (P.210)
z Border Limit (P.210)
z Auto Reduce On Receipt (P.210)
z Receiving Paper Size (P.210)
z 2 Pages Up On Receipt (P.210)
z
2 Sided Printing (P.210)
z Edge Erase - Top & Bottom Edges (P.211)
z Edge Erase - Left & Right Edges (P.211)
z Reduce 8.5 x 11" Original to A4 (P.211)
z Pseudo-Photo Gradation Mode (P.211)
z
Folder Selector Setup (P.211)
z Memory Full Procedure (P.211)
z Maximum Stored Pages (P.211)
z Mixed Size Originals Scan Mode (P.211)
z Fax Data in Folder Priority 1 to 3 (P.211)
z Direct Fax (P.212)
z Block Inbound Faxes (P.212)
z Block Unknown Fax Numbers (P.212)
Fax Received Options (P.212) z Folder Selector Setup (P.212)
Reduce / Enlarge Presets (P.213) -
Original Size Defaults (P.213) -
Local Terminal Information (P.213) z
Local Name (P.213)
z
Company Logo (P.213)
z Machine Password (P.213)
z Line 1 - Company Logo (P.214)
z
G3 Line 1 - Fax ID (P.214)
z G3 Line 1 - Dial Type (P.214)
z G3 Line 1 - Line Type (P.214)
132
Tools Menu List
Tools
z Allow Casual Users to Edit From Field (P.218)
z Allow Guest Users to Edit From Field (P.218)
z Allow to Edit From if Search Found (P.219)
z
z
Allow to Edit From if Search Failed (P.219)
E-mail Sending When Search Failed (P.219) 5
z Add Me to "To" Field (P.219)
z Add Me to "Cc" Field (P.219)
z Edit E-mail Recipients (P.219)
133
5 Tools
Stored File Settings (P.223) z Expiration Date for Files in Folder (P.223)
z Stored Job Expiration Date (P.223)
z
Print Job Confirmation Screen (P.223)
z
Minimum Passcode Length for Stored Jobs
(P.224)
z Print Order for All Selected Files (P.224)
Setup
Create Folder (P.230) z Folder Name (P.231)
z Check Folder Passcode (P.231)
z Delete Files After Retrieval (P.231)
z Delete Expired Files (P.231)
z
Link Job Flow Sheet to Folder (P.232)
z When the [Delete Folder] Button is Selected
(P.232)
Stored Programming (P.232) -
134
Tools Menu List
Create Job Flow Sheet (P.232) z Restrictions on Using Job Flow (P.233)
z
Create New Job Flow Sheet (P.235)
z
Name (P.235)
z Description (P.235)
z Keyword (P.235)
z Send as Fax (P.235)
z
Send as Internet Fax (P.236)
z
Send as E-mail (ApeosPort Series Models Only)
(P.236)
z Transfer via FTP (1), Transfer via FTP (2)
(ApeosPort Series Models Only) (P.237)
z Transfer via SMB (1), Transfer via SMB (2)
(ApeosPort Series Models Only) (P.238)
z Print (P.238)
z
E-mail Notification (P.239)
z
Edit/Delete (P.239)
Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword (P.240) -
Add Address Book Entry (P.240) z
Address Type (P.242)
z E-mail Address (P.242)
z Name (P.242)
z Surname (P.242)
Tools
z Given Name (P.242)
z Telephone Number (P.242)
z Office (P.242)
Department (P.242)
5
z
135
5 Tools
Accounting
Create / View User Accounts (P.248) z User ID (P.249)
z User Name (P.249)
z Passcode (P.249)
z E-mail Address (P.249)
z Account Limit (P.249)
z User Role (P.250)
z Reset Account (P.250)
z Reset Total Impressions (P.251)
View Account (P.251) -
Reset User Accounts (P.251) -
System Administrator's Meter (Copy -
Jobs) (P.252)
Accounting Type (P.252) z
Accounting Disabled (P.252)
z Local Accounting (P.252)
z Network Accounting (P.252)
z Xerox Standard Accounting (P.252)
z Auditron Mode (P.253)
z
Verify User Details (P.253)
z Customize User Prompts (P.253)
Tools
z
Alternative Name for Account ID (P.254)
Mask Account ID (***) (P.254)
z Store User Details (P.254)
Fax Billing Data (P.254) -
Accounting / Billing Device Settings z Connect with Accounting / Billing Device (P.255)
(P.255) z Accounting / Billing Device (P.255)
z Track Print Jobs (P.255)
z Track Scan/Fax Jobs (P.255)
z Interrupt Mode (P.255)
z Job with Insufficient Credit (P.255)
z Charge Print Jobs (P.256)
z Track with Cumulative Device (P.256)
z Scan Ahead for Copy Job (P.256)
136
Tools Menu List
Tools
5
137
5 Tools
In [Common Service Settings], you can make settings relating to the machine's
common features. The following shows the reference section for each item.
Machine Clock/Timers..............................................................................................................138
Audio Tones..............................................................................................................................141
Screen/Button Settings..............................................................................................................142
Paper Tray Settings ...................................................................................................................144
Image Quality Adjustment ........................................................................................................147
Reports ......................................................................................................................................148
Maintenance ..............................................................................................................................149
Watermark.................................................................................................................................151
Force Annotation.......................................................................................................................153
Print Universal Unique ID (ApeosPort Series Models Only) ...................................................154
Notify Job Completion by E-mail.............................................................................................155
Other Settings............................................................................................................................155
For information on how to display the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.120).
Machine Clock/Timers
You can set the machine clock or the time intervals of the machine to enter the Energy
Saver mode or to reset settings.
Date
Set the date in the system clock of the machine. The date set here will be printed on all lists
and reports.
Time
Set the time in the system clock of the machine, using 12-hour or 24-hour format.
The time set here will be printed on all lists and reports.
138
Common Service Settings
Connection Interval
Specify how often the machine connects to the time server.
You can select from 1 to 500 hours in 1 hour increments.
Tools
Set the server name or IP address of the time server.
Note • For IPv4, enter the IP address in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx format, where "xxx" is a value between 0
and 255.
• For IPv6, enter the IP address in xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx format, where
5
"xxxx" is a hexadecimal number.
Auto Clear
Specify the time lapsed without any operation until the machine resets the settings
automatically.
When you select [On], specify a value between 10 and 900 seconds in 1 second increments.
When you select [Off], the settings are not reset automatically.
Note • When [Off] is selected, the machine will cancel the standby status and begin processing a
document after one minute has elapsed in anticipation of a job command.
Auto Print
Set the time period to start the next print job after the operation of the control panel (except
for the <Start> and <Clear All> buttons).
When you select [On], specify a value between 1 and 240 seconds in 1 second increments.
When you select [Off], printing starts immediately after the machine is ready.
Printer Lockout
You can set the machine to disable printing during the specified time period or to temporarily
disable printing.
Selecting [On] allows you to set [Set Lockout Duration] and/or [Allow User to Lock Out].
When [Allow User to Lock Out] is selected, the [Lock Out Printer] button needs to be
displayed on the right side of the [Services Home] screen.
139
5 Tools
For information on how to display the [Lock Out Printer] button on the [Services Home] screen, refer to
"Customizing the Button Layout" (P.26).
Time Zone
Set the time difference from GMT between -12 and +12 hours.
Note • GMT stands for Greenwich Mean Time.
Daylight Savings
You can set daylight saving time. During daylight saving time period, the machine moves the
clock forward by one hour.
Select from [Adjust Off], [Adjust by Month, Day & Time], and [Adjust by Month, Week, Day of
Week & Time].
140
Common Service Settings
If you select [Adjust by Month, Day & Time], specify the month, day, and time for [Start Date]
and [End Date].
If you select [Adjust by Month, Week, Day of Week & Time], specify the month, week, day of
week, and time for [Start Date] and [End Date].
Audio Tones
Select whether to sound an alarm when a job ends or a fault occurs.
Tools
Set the volume to be sounded when a button on the control panel is correctly selected.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].
Base Tone
Set the volume for the base tone of the toggle button, which changes setting each time it is
pressed. The machine plays this sound when it exits the Interrupt mode.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].
Fault Tone
Set the volume to be sounded when a job fails.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].
You can select the target jobs to play the sound.
141
5 Tools
Alert Tone
Set the volume to be sounded when a fault such as a paper jam occurs, and the job remains
in failure state.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].
completed.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].
Ringing Volume
Set the volume to be sounded when the machine receives a fax.
You can select from [Soft], [Normal], and [Loud]. To disable the sound, select [Off].
Screen/Button Settings
Set screens and buttons.
Screen Default
Set the screen displayed after powering on the machine or canceling the Energy Saver mode.
For more information on the setting procedure, refer to "Customizing the Control Panel" (P.24).
142
Common Service Settings
Custom Buttons 1 to 3
You can assign services such as Copy and Send from Folder to the custom buttons on the
control panel: Custom Button 1 to Custom Button 3.
To leave a feature unassigned, select [(Not Set)].
Note • Copy service is assigned to [Custom Button 1] and Review is assigned to [Custom Button 3]
by factory default.
For more information, refer to "Assigning Services to Custom Buttons" (P.30).
Services Home
Set the layout of service buttons that appear on the [Services Home] screen.
For more information on how to set the buttons, refer to "Customizing the Button Layout" (P.26).
Tools
Select the default job types to be shown on the [Completed Jobs] screen under the [Job
Status] screen that is displayed when the <Job Status> button on the control panel is
pressed.
Select from [All Jobs], [Printer & Print from Folder Jobs], [Scan, Fax, & Internet Fax Jobs],
5
and [Job Flow & File Transfer Jobs].
Default Language
Select the language displayed on the machine.
There are two ways of selecting the language: set in the System Administration mode and set
by local users.
z
Setting in the System Administration mode
The language set here is the standard language that is retained even when the machine is
powered off and on.
z
Setting by local users
The language setting in [Language] in the [Services Home] screen is lost when the machine
is powered off.
Important • When [English] is selected, only ASCII characters can be used.
• When you set [Language] to [English] on the [Services Home] screen and an address book
entry or contents of [Details] of Job Flow Sheets is entered in double-byte characters, the
characters may not be displayed properly.
• When you use CentreWare Internet Services to import a CSV file* including double-byte
characters other than a selected language, the characters in the file may be garbled or the
import may fail.
*: CSV (Comma Separated Values) is a file format that is often used for saving data by
spreadsheets and database programs.
Screen Brightness
You can adjust the screen brightness of the control panel between -16 and +16.
143
5 Tools
You can set the size and type of paper loaded in trays.
For more information, refer to "Changing the Paper Settings" (P.49).
5 Change Settings
Select this button, if you change the paper size for the tray or the setting of auto paper
selection.
When you load non-standard size paper in a tray, select [Custom Size], and specify the width
and length. When you load standard size paper in a tray, select [Auto Detect].
Important • Align the paper guides against the paper to prevent paper jams or errors. If the machine
cannot detect a tray, use Tray 5.
z
Paper Type
Select the type of paper to load in the trays.
For information about paper types available on the machine, refer to "Loadable Quantity and Weight for
Supported Paper" (P.34).
z Paper Size
When using Trays 1 to 4, you can load both standard size paper and non-standard size
paper. When you load non-standard size paper, select [Custom Size], and then set the size
in the X (width) between 190 - 356 mm and the Y (length) between 98 - 216 mm in 1 mm
increments. When loading standard size paper, select [Auto Size Detect].
z
Paper Color
Set the color of paper. The paper color selected here is displayed as the paper color on the
[Paper Supply] screen.
z Auto Paper Select
Set the condition for Auto Paper selection. When the color mode selected is used, Auto Paper
selection is enabled. Select from [All Colors], [Color], and [Black & White].
Automatic tray selection means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is automatically
selected by the machine for copying or printing.
Disabled
Does not display the items specified in [Paper Size].
144
Common Service Settings
Size Detection
Displays the setting in [Paper Size].
Tools
selected by the machine for copying or printing.
This setting applies to Trays 1 and 2 to 4 (optional). You cannot apply this setting to Tray 5.
Note • When a logical printer is used and if you specify the paper tray with the print driver, this
setting will be ignored. 5
Paper Type Priority
Set the priority of the trays to use when paper of the same size and the same orientation is
set in the multiple trays for automatic tray selection.
Auto Paper selection means that a tray containing the appropriate paper is automatically
selected by the machine for copying or printing.
You can set Plain paper, Bond paper, Recycled paper, Plain Reload, and Custom paper 1 to
5. The paper type setting is prioritized over the paper tray priority settings.
If, however, different paper types appear in the same priority sequence, the paper is
determined by paper tray priority sequence. The tray containing paper type set to [Auto Paper
Off] is not selected by automatic tray selection.
For more information about the tray priority sequence, refer to "Paper Tray Priority" (P.145).
Inch Size
You can select a paper size from inch series sizes.
Others
You can select a paper size from other sizes.
145
5 Tools
Custom Size
You can enter any size. Set the X width between 127 and 356 mm, and the Y length between
76 and 216 mm in 1 mm increments.
Note • For open flap envelopes, enter the size with the flap size included.
146
Common Service Settings
Image Quality
You can select the image quality processing method when the machine scans a document.
Tools
Photo Reproduction Level
When copying with [Original Type] in the [Image Quality] screen set to [Photo & Text], you
can adjust the color reproduction level in the areas determined by the machine as photos.
Selecting [More Text] yields a bold copy effect, emphasizing the dense parts of an image.
Selecting [More Photo] soften the image gradation of the photo aspects of an image,
5
enhancing the reproductivity of subtle colors.
Image Enhancement
Allows you to select whether to carry out image enhancement. If you select [On], the machine
gives the image a smoother appearance when printed.
147
5 Tools
Calibration
When color gradation of a printed image shifts, you can calibrate the color of the image to
maintain the image quality of the machine at a certain level.
For more information, refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.87).
Note • If you cannot calibrate the machine to adjust for a shift in color gradation despite the periodic
calibration, contact our Customer Support Center.
Screen Type
Select from [Copy Job], [Print Job 1], and [Print Job 2].
For more information about screen type, refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.87).
Paper Supply
Select a tray.
Target
Select from [Copy & Print Jobs], [Copy Jobs Only], [Print Jobs Only], and [None].
Reports
You can configure settings related to printing reports.
Tools
5 History Report] under the [Faults] screen displayed by pressing the <Machine Status> button.
If you select [Disabled], the [Print Reports] button under [Machine Status] > [Machine
Information] and the [Error History Report] button under [Faults] are displayed only in the
System Administration mode.
For information on Print Reports, refer to "Print Reports" (P.101).
For information on Error History Reports, refer to "Faults" (P.114).
Activity Report
Select whether or not to automatically print an Activity Report when a total of 100
communication results have been accumulated.
For information on an Activity Report, refer to "Job Status/Activity Report" (P.101).
For information on how to print a Activity Report manually, refer to "Job Status/Activity Report"
(P.101).
Folder Report
Select whether or not to automatically print a Folder Report.
148
Common Service Settings
Broadcast/Multi-Poll Report
Select whether or not to automatically print a Broadcast Report and a Multi-Poll Report.
Off
Does not print a report regardless of the data transmission result.
On
Automatically prints a Transmission Report when data is sent successfully and a
Transmission Report - Job Undelivered when data transmission failed.
Tools
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Off
Does not print a report regardless of whether data transmission is successfully completed or
not. 5
On
Automatically prints a Transmission Report for a successful transmission and a Transmission
Report (undelivered) for a transmission failure.
2 Sided Report
Select whether or not to print a report on one side of the paper or both sides when printing a
report/list.
Maintenance
You can initialize or delete data from the hard disk of the machine.
149
5 Tools
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
For information on EP system, refer to "EP System" (P.616).
Check EP Connection
This feature is used to check whether the communications between the machine and our
Customer Support Center function normally when EP system via the Internet is used.
Note • EP system may not be available in some regions. For more information, contact our
Customer Support Center.
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
For information on EP system, refer to "EP System" (P.616).
when the machine is returned to Fuji Xerox. By executing [Start], all data registered on the
machine is deleted.
Do not use this feature normally.
5
Software Options
When EP system via the Internet is used, this feature is used to upgrade the software for EP
system in the case the version up is required.
Software Upgrade
This feature is for service representative use. For more information, contact our Customer
Support Center.
Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
For information on EP system, refer to "EP System" (P.616).
1) Press [Software Upgrade].
2) Press [Start Upgrade].
3) When [Yes] is selected, the machine starts downloading the software.
Note • After the downloading is finished, the machine automatically restarts and upgrades the
software. After the machine restarts again and the [Services Home] screen is displayed, the
software upgrade is completed.
150
Common Service Settings
Tools
machine because of an abnormality of certificate file even when the certificate is set to
enabled for [SSL / TLS Settings] under [Connectivity & Network Setup] > [Security Settings].
5
Watermark
Watermark is the function to print text or background pattern on the whole page to
inhibit the replication of documents.
You can configure Watermark settings such as date or text, background pattern, and
watermark to embed.
Date Format
Set the format for printing dates. This setting is common to Annotation, Watermark, and
Force Annotation.
Three date formats are available: YYYY/MM/DD, MM/DD/YYYY, and DD/MM/YYYY.
Default Watermark
Set watermark text.
You can select text from [Copy Prohibited], [Copy], [Duplicate], and the strings assigned to
Custom Watermark 1 to 3.
For more information about custom text, refer to "Custom Watermark 1 to 3" (P.153).
151
5 Tools
Font Size
Set the size of the text to be printed as the Watermark.
You can set the font size from 24 to 80 points in 1 point increments.
Background Pattern
Set the background pattern to embed the text for the Watermark effect.
You can select from eight patterns: [Wave], [Circle], [Stripe], [Chain], [Beam], [Rhombic],
[Sunflower], and [Fan].
Font Color
Specify a hidden text color used for the Watermark feature.
You can select from [Black], [Magenta], and [Cyan].
Note • The hidden text color in fax transmission is black, regardless of the font color.
Density
Select the text density of the Watermark.
You can select from [Lighten], [Normal], and [Darken].
Watermark/Background Contrast
Tools
Set a contrast level for text and background for the Watermark.
You can select a level from 1 to 9. Select a contrast level, referring to the printed samples by
selecting [Print this Sample List].
5 Force Watermark - Copy
Set whether or not to forcibly use the Watermark feature when copying a document. When
you select [On], the setting of [Watermark] in the [Output Format] screen is fixed to [On] and
you cannot change the setting.
The user ID, machine ID, and date and time are printed.
Note • You can authorize a user to temporarily cancel force watermark printing. For more
information, refer to "User Roles and Authorization Groups" (P.355).
152
Common Service Settings
Custom Watermark 1 to 3
Register text to be printed as the Watermark. You can enter up to 32 single-byte characters.
The registered text is displayed at [Default Watermark].
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.32).
Force Annotation
Annotation is forcibly printed out according to the layout template associated with each
job type.
Note • When a watermark and/or a print universal unique ID is specified to a document, force
annotation is overlapped.
The layout templates, Preset 1 to Preset 4, are provided with the machine. The printed
items with the templates as follows:
z
Preset 1 and Preset 2
The string registered on [Create Text String 1] is printed as watermark at an angle in
the center of paper.
The following items are printed at the bottom right for Preset 1 or bottom left for
Preset 2 of paper.
Tools
- first line: file name and the IP address of the computer that send a print job
- second line: user name, user ID, card ID, and date and time
z Preset 3 and Preset 4 5
The string registered on [Create Text String 1] is printed as watermark at an angle in
the center of paper.
The following items are printed at the bottom right for Preset 3 or bottom left for
Preset 4 of paper.
- user ID and date and time
DocName-192.168.1.1 DocName-192.168.1.1
UserName-CardID-UserID-2008/09/01 13:08 UserName-CardID-UserID-2008/09/01 13:08 UserID-2008/09/01 13:08 UserID-2008/09/01 13:08
Note • Some items may not be printed depending on the job type and performance conditions.
• Force annotation is not printed on a blank paper generated by the machine.
• A time printed as a watermark using the Force Annotation feature may differ from the time
the print job is submitted depending on the status and settings of the machine and the
contents of the print job. In this case, the print job start time is printed as a watermark.
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.32).
153
5 Tools
Print Position
Select a print position from six positions: [Top Left], [Bottom Left], [Top Center], [Bottom
Center], [Top Right], or [Bottom Right].
154
Common Service Settings
Targeted Jobs
Select the service whose job result you want to receive by an e-mail notification. When
the target job is already selected, [Selected] is displayed.
You can select more than one target job from [Copy], [Fax], [Scan], [Print], or [Report].
Select the notification timing from [Notify at the End of Job] or [Notify when Error Only].
E-mail Addresses 1 to 5
Specify the e-mail addresses to notify the result of the jobs.
Note • When you select [Save] to exit this screen without specifying an e-mail address, the setting
of [Targeted Jobs] or [E-mail Message] is deleted.
Tools
E-mail Message
Enter a comment attached to the e-mail.
5
Other Settings
You can configure other settings related to the machine.
Fax Service
Switches between the Fax feature and the Server Fax feature.
Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• The Fax and Server Fax features cannot be enabled at the same time.
Scan to Fax
Allows you to use the Fax feature on the machine.
155
5 Tools
You can specify the size of paper to be automatically detected when you use standard sizes
of a document or the machine is set to detect sizes of a document.
5 You can select from the following tables: [A/B Series (8 × 13")], [A/B Series], [A/B Series (8K/
16K)], [A/B Series (8 × 13/8 × 14")], and [Inch Series].
Refer to the following tables for a combination of sizes that can be detected automatically.
Loading
position
Document feeder
Document feeder
Document feeder
Document feeder
Document glass
Document glass
Document glass
Document glass
Trays 1 to 4
Trays 1 to 4
Trays 1 to 4
Trays 1 to 4
Size/
Orientation
A6 O X X O X X O X X O X X
A6 X X X X X X X X X X X X
A5 O O O O O O O O O O O O
A5 O X X O O X O O X O X X
A4 O O O O O O O O O O O O
B6 O X X O X X O X X O X X
B6 X X X O X X O X X X X X
B5 X X O O O O O O O O X O
5.5 × 8.5" X X X X X X X X X X X X
5.5 × 8.5" X X X X X X X X X O X X
7.25 × 10.5" X X O X X O X X O X X O
8 × 10" X X X X X X X X X X X X
8.5 × 11" X O O X O O X O O O O O
8.5 × 13" O O O X X O X X O O O O
156
Common Service Settings
Loading
position
Document feeder
Document feeder
Document feeder
Document feeder
Document glass
Document glass
Document glass
Document glass
Trays 1 to 4
Trays 1 to 4
Trays 1 to 4
Trays 1 to 4
Size/
Orientation
8.5 × 14" X X O X O O X O O X X O
Postcard (5 × 7") X X X X X X X X X X X X
Postcard (5 × 7") X X X X X X X X X X X X
Postcard (3.5 × 5") X X X X X X X X X X X X
Postcard (3.5 × 5") X X X X X X X X X X X X
Postcard (6 × 9") X X X X X X X X X X X X
Postcard (4 × 6") X X X X X X X X X X X X
Postcard (4 × 6") X X X X X X X X X X X X
Tools
Postcard (3.5 × 5.5") X X X X X X X X X X X X
100 × 148" X X X X X X X X X X X X
100 × 148"
215 × 315"
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5
16 K X X X X X X O X X X X X
O: Available
X: Not available
Millimeters/Inches
Allows you to select unit of measurement displayed on the screen from [Millimeters] or
[Inches].
Off
Does not display the consumables status screen.
157
5 Tools
Data Encryption
Allows you to select whether or not to encrypt data recorded on the hard disk of the machine.
When you enable data encryption, the machine encrypts automatically copy, scan, or print
data written to the hard disk. You cannot select whether or not to encrypt by feature. This
prevents unauthorized access to the stored data. To activate this feature, set an encryption
key.
Note • An optional component is required to use this feature. For more information, contact our
Customer Support Center.
3 Select [Re-enter Encryption Key], enter the same encryption key, and then select
[Save].
5 4 Select [Save].
Data Restoration
The encrypted data cannot be restored in the following cases:
z When a problem occurs with the hard disk.
z
When you have forgotten the encryption key.
z When you have forgotten the system administrator's user ID and a passcode when [On] is
selected in [Service Rep. Restricted Operation].
158
Common Service Settings
4. Press the <Machine Status> button, and confirm that [Standby] in [Overwrite Hard Disk] is
displayed.
5. Enter the System Administration mode, and change the data encryption settings.
For information on how to enter the System Administration mode, refer to "System Settings
Procedure" (P.120).
• Our service representative cannot restore the encryption key.
• When our service representative replaces the electrical circuit board, the encryption key is
initialized. Do not lose the encrypted information.
1 Select [Encryption Key for Confidential Data], and then [Change Settings].
2 Select [New Encryption Key], and enter an encryption key, and then select [Save].
3
Tools
Select [Re-enter Encryption Key], enter the same encryption key, and then select
[Save].
4 Select [Save] to display a confirmation screen. Select [Yes] on the screen to save the
setting. 5
Service Rep. Restricted Operation
Allows you to select whether or not to restrict the operation by our service representative to
protect the security settings from being altered by someone impersonating our service
representative.
Off
The operation by our service representative is not restricted.
On
Our service representative cannot change the following settings:
z "Delete All Data" (P.150)
z
"Print Universal Unique ID (ApeosPort Series Models Only)" (P.154)
z
"Data Encryption" (P.158)
z
"Encryption Key for Confidential Data" (P.159)
z "Service Rep. Restricted Operation" (P.159)
z "SSL / TLS Settings" (P.187)
z
"S/MIME Settings (ApeosPort Series Models Only)" (P.188)
z
"IPSec Settings" (P.189)
z
"System Administrator Settings" (P.257)
z "Maximum Login Attempts by System Administrator" (P.262)r
z "Overwrite Hard Disk" (P.265)
z
Creating/Changing Users with System Administrator Rights
z
Changing SNMP v3 Setting
159
5 Tools
When [On] is set, you can set a maintenance passcode of 4 to 12 digits in the [Maintenance
Passcode] screen.
Entering the passcode is required when our service representative performs maintenance.
Important • When [On] is set, be sure the followings:
- If you lose the system administrator's user ID and passcode, the items restricted to the
service representative cannot be changed.
- If you lose the passcode, our service representative cannot perform maintenance in the
case when an error occurs in the machine.
To change the restricted items or perform maintenance, the electric circuit board of the
machine must be replaced.
You will be charged for the electrical circuit board and handling cost.
Be sure not to lose the system administrator's user ID and passcode.
Note • An optional component is required to use this feature. For more information, contact our
Customer Support Center.
For information on the system administrator permissions, refer to "User Roles" (P.355).
Software Download
You can select whether or not to permit software downloading. This feature is for service
representative use. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Specifies the operation when [Auto Detect] is selected for [Output Color]. Select either [On] or
[Off].
Country / Region
Allows you to select a country or region to install the device.
Data Indicator
Allows you to set the lighting pattern of the <Data> indicator.
Pattern 1
Lights up when a document is stored in the hard disk (optional) of the machine.
160
Common Service Settings
Pattern 2
Lights up when a fax document is in a print queue or a fax received with the Store Fax
- Local Folder feature is stored in the folder.
Pattern 3
Lights up for 30 seconds after a job in the print queue is printed.
Tools
5
161
5 Tools
In [Copy Service Settings], you can configure settings related to the Copy feature. The
following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Copy Tab - Features Allocation ................................................................................................162
Preset Buttons ...........................................................................................................................163
Copy Defaults ...........................................................................................................................163
Copy Control.............................................................................................................................168
Original Size Defaults...............................................................................................................170
Reduce / Enlarge Presets...........................................................................................................170
Custom Colors...........................................................................................................................170
Annotations - Create Comments ...............................................................................................171
5 Features
The following five features are shown on the screen: [Output Color], [Reduce / Enlarge],
[Paper Supply], [2 Sided Copying], and [Copy Output]. Features and positions displayed
cannot be changed.
7 Features
Allows you to set features appearing in the fourth column from the left of the [Copy] screen.
Note • [Output Color], [Reduce / Enlarge], and [Paper Supply] cannot be specified.
10 Features
Allows you to set features appearing in the third and fourth columns from the left of the [Copy]
screen.
Note • [Reduce / Enlarge] and [Paper Supply] cannot be specified.
2 From [Frequently Used Features] on the right of the screen, select a button and the
position of the button where you want to allocate a feature.
Note • The position of each button on the right side corresponds to the position on the [Copy]
screen.
162
Copy Service Settings
Preset Buttons
Tools
Set the default value of the tray displayed in [Paper Supply] when an option that printed on
Front Cover is selected for [Front Cover] under [Output Format] > [Covers].
Copy Defaults
You can set the default settings of the Copy feature. When the machine is turned on,
or the machine exits the Energy Saver mode, or when the <Clear All> button is
pressed, the machine resets to the default values set here. Setting frequently used
features and values as the defaults can avoid extra operations required during the use
of the machine.
For more information on each setting item, refer to "3 Copy" in the User Guide.
Paper Supply
Set the default value for [Paper Supply] in the [Copy] screen.
When the default value of [Reduce / Enlarge] is set to [Auto %], [Auto Select] cannot be
selected for [Paper Supply].
Reduce / Enlarge
Set the default value for [Reduce / Enlarge] in the [Copy] screen.
Select the ratio from [100%], [Auto %], and the buttons registered as R/E Preset buttons.
163
5 Tools
When the default value of [Paper Supply] is set to [Auto Select], [Auto %] cannot be selected
for [Reduce / Enlarge].
For information on R/E Preset buttons, refer to "Reduce / Enlarge Presets" (P.170).
Output Color
Set the default value for [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen.
When [No Default] is selected, select the output color in the [Copy] screen before making
copies.
Single Color
Set the default value for [Single Color] in [More...] of [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen. You
can select a color from six preset colors and six custom colors.
For information about custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.170).
Set the default value for [Target Area Color] that appears when [Dual Color] is selected for
[More...] of [Output Color] in the [Copy] screen. You can select a color from seven preset
colors and six custom colors.
5 For information about custom colors, refer to "Custom Colors" (P.170).
Original Type
Set the default value for [Original Type] on the [Image Quality] screen.
Lighten/Darken
Set the default value for [Lighten/Darken] of [Image Options] in the [Image Quality] screen.
Contrast
Set the default value for [Contrast] of [Image Enhancement] in the [Image Quality] screen.
Sharpness
Set the default value for [Sharpness] of [Image Options] in the [Image Quality] screen.
164
Copy Service Settings
Saturation
Set the default value for [Saturation] of [Image Options] in the [Image Quality] screen.
Background Suppression
Set the default value for [Suppress Background] of [Image Enhancement] in the [Image
Quality] screen.
[Background Suppression] is valid when [Original Type] is set to [Photo & Text], [Text], or
[Maps].
Color Balance - Yellow / Color Balance - Magenta / Color Balance - Cyan / Color Balance -
Black
Set the default density levels for the [Color Balance] in the [Image Quality] screen.
You can set density levels of each color for each of the [Highlights], [Midtones], and
[Shadows].
Note • Depending on the density level settings, [Color Balance] in the [Image Quality] screen is set
as follows:
- When the density levels of all colors are set to [0,0,0], [Color Balance] in the [Image
Quality] screen is set to [Normal].
- When the same value is set to all levels for each color (for example: [0,0,0] or [1,1,1]),
[Color Balance] in the [Image Quality] screen is set to [Basic Color].
Tools
- When the settings other than the ones described above are applied, [Color Balance] in the
[Image Quality] screen is set to [Advanced Color].
Color Shift
5
Set the default value for [Color Shift] in the [Image Quality] screen.
2 Sided Copying
Set the default value for [2 Sided Copying] in the [Copy] screen, [Layout Adjustment], and
[Output Format] screens.
165
5 Tools
Original Orientation
Set the default value for [Original Orientation] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Copy Output
Set the default value for [Copy Output] in the [Copy] and [Output Format] screens.
Sample Job
Set the default value for [Sample Job] in the [Job Assembly] screen.
166
Copy Service Settings
Tools
Set the default value for [Position] displayed when [Date Stamp] is selected for [Annotations]
in the [Output Format] screen.
167
5 Tools
Copy Control
You can configure settings related to copy operation control.
Set the process you want the machine to perform for the partially stored data after a certain
time has elapsed in the confirmation screen.
5 You can set the time until the memory full procedure is carried out. For more information, refer to "Auto
Job Release" (P.139).
Delete Job
Deletes the data partially stored.
Run Job
Treats the read-in data as valid, and start copying the document partially stored.
Copy to Side 2
Side 2 is copied on the reverse side of side 1 without changing paper size.
Fine-tune 100%
You can fine-tune magnification when copying at 100% (actual size). The set value is applied
to [100%] in the [Copy] screen is set to 100%.
Set the value in the X/Y direction between 98 and 102% in 0.1% increments.
168
Copy Service Settings
Important • This feature is applied only when a copy is made using the document glass. This setting is
not reflected in the magnification (100%) under [Independent X-Y%] or [Calculator %].
Note • A magnification displays [100%] even if [Fine-tune 100%] is selected.
Tools
Photo & Text /Printed Original
Set the type of document when [Printed Original] of [Photo & Text] is selected for [Original
Type] in the [Image Quality] screen.
Normal
5
Copies with standard image quality.
Inkjet Originals
Select [Inkjet Originals] when copying a document printed with an inkjet printer. This
improves the recognition of inkjet colors.
Highlighted Originals
Select [Highlighted Originals] when copying an original marked with a highlight pen. This
improves the recognition of the colors of highlight pen.
Comment Position - Top Left, - Top Center, - Top Right, - Left Center, - Center, - Right
Center, - Bottom Left, - Bottom Center, and - Bottom Right
You can adjust the position to print a comment finely.
Date Position - Top Left, - Top Center, - Top Right, - Bottom Left, - Bottom Center, and -
Bottom Right
You can adjust the position to print a date stamp finely.
169
5 Tools
Page Number Position - Top Left, - Top Center, - Top Right, - Bottom Left, - Bottom Center,
and - Bottom Right
You can adjust the position to print a page number finely.
Bates Stamp - Top Left, - Top Center, - Top Right, - Bottom Left, - Bottom Center, and -
Bottom Right
You can adjust the position to print a bates stamp finely.
Quantity Display
You can select how you want to display the counter in the Copy service.
Select from [Quantity], [Quantity and Memory], and [Quantity and Original Count].
You can assign original sizes to the buttons other than [Auto Detect].
If you frequently make copies of non-standard size document, setting non-standard
5 size as the default can avoid extra operations required during the use of the machine.
A/B Series Size
You can select a size from A and B series sizes.
Inch Size
You can select a size from inch series sizes.
Others
You can select a size from other sizes.
Custom Size
You can enter any size. Set the width (X) from 15 to 432 mm, and the height (Y) from 15 to
297 mm in 1 mm increments.
Custom Colors
Set the custom colors used for [Single Color] and [Dual Color] in the [Output Color]
screen.
You can assign custom colors with yellow (0 to 100%), magenta (0 to 100%), and cyan
(0 to 100%) to each custom color buttons 1 to 6.
Note • Adjust so that the total of yellow, magenta, and cyan does not exceed 240%.
170
Copy Service Settings
Tools
5
171
5 Tools
In [Connectivity & Network Setup], you can configure settings related to the
Connectivity & Network feature.
For information on Connectivity and Network Settings, refer to "Printer Environment Settings" (P.275)
or "E-mail Environment Settings" (P.293).
If you use CentreWare Internet Services, more detailed settings are possible. For more information, refer
to "CentreWare Internet Services Settings" (P.267).
Other Settings............................................................................................................................191
Port Settings
Set the interface of the machine connected to a client. In [Port Settings], you can
configure the following settings.
Important • For LDP, Port9100, and HTTP-SSL / TLS, do not use a number that is the same as a port
number of another port.
For a port that uses HTTP (IPP, Internet Services (HTTP), UPnP Discovery, SOAP,
WebDAV, and Web Services on Devices (WSD)), do not use a number that is the same as a
port number of LPD, Port9100, and HTTP-SSL / TLS.
Furthermore, if any of the above are set to one of the port numbers indicated below,
operation may no longer be performed properly depending on the setting conditions of the
port: 25, 139, 427, 445, 631, 15000
For information on HTTP-SSL / TLS port, refer to "HTTP - SSL / TLS Port Number" (P.187).
USB
Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use a USB interface.
Print Mode
Select the printer language use on the machine. Selecting [Auto] enables the machine to
automatically determine and use the most suitable language to print data received from the
host device.
PJL
PJL (Printer Job Language) is a job control language and a PJL command is data prepended
to the top of the print jobs. Usually select [Enabled].
172
Connectivity & Network Setup
Tools
Eject Time] or select [Enabled] if you want to use the timeout period of PostScript.
LPD
Port Status 5
Select [Enabled] to use LPD.
Port Number
Enter a port number for LPD from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 515.
Important • Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.
NetWare
Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use NetWare.
SMB
Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use SMB when you use the Scan to PC (SMB) service or share the
machine on the network.
IPP
Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use IPP.
Set this when you want to use IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) to print via the Internet.
Added Port Number
Select [Disabled] when you want to set the machine does not accept IPP from other than the
standard port number, or select [Enabled] when accepts all port numbers.
Enter a port number for IPP other than the standard port number from 1 to 65535.
To disable this option, enter "0".
The default value is 80.
173
5 Tools
Important • If the default port number is used, it may conflict with other ports. Make sure to set up the
port number that is not in use.
Note • [Added Port Number] cannot be configured if [Port Status] is set to [Disabled].
To configure [Added Port Number], enable port status and reboot the machine, and then
configure [Added Port Number].
EtherTalk
Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use EtherTalk.
Note • The Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) is required.
Bonjour
Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use Bonjour.
Note • The Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) is required to use the port. However, for Mac OS X
10.4.11 or later, you can use the port without the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional).
• To print from a printer detected by [Bonjour], the LPD port must be activated in advance.
Port 9100
Port Status
Tools
SNMP
Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use SNMP, when you use any web applications manufactured by Fuji
Xerox to control the machine on the network.
FTP Client
Port Status
Select [Enabled] when you use the Scan to PC service with FTP transmission.
Note • Select a communication mode to send data scanned via FTP from [Passive mode] and
[Active mode]. [Passive mode] is selected by default. You can change the setting from
CentreWare Internet Services.
Receive E-mail
Port Status
Select [Enabled] when you receive e-mails and Internet faxes.
Send E-mail
Port Status
Select [Enabled] when you send e-mails and Internet faxes.
174
Connectivity & Network Setup
Note • [Consumables Status], [Parts Status], [Paper Tray Status], [Output Tray Status],
[Jam Status], [Interlock Status], and [Fault Notice] are notified as the machine
status.
• You can configure the E-mail Notification Service in CentreWare Internet Services. For more
information, refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
WSD
WSD Print - Port Status
Select [Enabled] to use UPnP.
Set this when you search a device on a network from Windows Vista and Windows 7.
Port Number
Enter a port number from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 80.
Important • If the default port number is used, it may conflict with other ports. Make sure to set up the
port number that is not in use.
Note • WSD stands for Web Services on Devices.
Tools
For more information about CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services
Settings" (P.267).
Port Number
Enter a port number for the Internet Services from 1 to 65535.
5
The default value is 80.
Important • If the default port number is used, it may conflict with other ports. Make sure to set up the
port number that is not in use.
Note • You cannot select [Port Number], if HTTP port is disabled.
To configure [Port Number], enable port status and reboot the machine, and then configure
[Port Number].
SOAP
Port Status
Select [Enabled] when you use an application program such as EasyOperator.
Port Number
Enter a port number for SOAP from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 80.
Important • If the default port number is used, it may conflict with other ports. Make sure to set up the
port number that is not in use.
WebDAV
Port Status
Select [Enabled] when you use an application program such as EasyOperator and Network
Scanner Utility 3 to access folders in the machine.
Note • You cannot select [Port Number] and [Operation Time-Out], if WebDAV port is disabled.
To configure [Port Number] and [Operation Time-Out], enable port status and reboot the
machine, and then configure [Port Number] and [Operation Time-Out].
Port Number
Enter a port number for WebDAV from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 80.
Important • If the default port number is used, it may conflict with other ports. Make sure to set up the
port number that is not in use.
175
5 Tools
Operation Time-Out
You can enter a operation time-out period between 1 and 65535 seconds in 1 second
increments.
ThinPrint
Port Status
You can use the machine for print in the ThinPrint.print environment. The machine
decompresses and prints the compressed print data sent from the print server.
Select [Enabled] when you use ThinPrint.
Port Number
Enter a port number for ThinPrint from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 4000.
Important • Do not use any numbers assigned to the other ports.
Note • ThinPrint is available when the communication protocol uses IPv4.
• The maximum of three connections are possible at a time.
Protocol Settings
Set the parameters required for communications. In [Protocol Settings], you can set the
Tools
following items.
TCP/IP - IP Mode
Allows you to select the TCP/IP operation mode.
IPv4 Mode
Select this option for IPv4.
IPv6 Mode
Select this option for IPv6.
Dual Stack
Select this option for an environment using both IPv4 and IPv6.
176
Connectivity & Network Setup
DHCP
The address, subnet mask, and gateway address will automatically be set via DHCP.
BOOTP
The address, subnet mask, and gateway address will automatically be set via BOOTP.
RARP
The address, subnet mask, and gateway address will automatically be set via RARP.
DHCP/Autonet
The address, subnet mask, and gateway address will automatically be set via DHCP/Autonet.
If the machine fails to communicate with the DHCP server, the AutoIP function is
automatically enabled and the machine is assigned an IP address (169.254.xxx.xxx). When
communication between the machine and the DHCP server recovers, the machine is re-
assigned an IP address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address by the DHCP server.
STATIC
Allows you to manually specify an IP address, a subnet mask, and a gateway address.
Note • To configure a subnet mask and a gateway address, an IP Address must be set first.
IPv4 - IP Address
Enter the IP address using the keyboard displayed or the numeric keypad when selecting
[STATIC] at [IPv4 - IP Address Resolution].
Tools
Note • Enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value from 0 to
255.
• Specify an IP address using numbers (0 to 9) and periods (.). If you mistyped a character on
the screen, select [Backspace] to delete the character. 5
IPv4 - Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask using the keyboard displayed or the numeric keypad when selecting
[STATIC] at [IPv4 - IP Address Resolution].
Note • Enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value from 0 to
255.
• Specify a subnet mask using numbers (0 to 9) and periods (.). If you mistyped a character on
the screen, select [Backspace] to delete the character.
IPv4 - IP Filter
Select whether or not to limit IPv4 addresses that can access the machine.
177
5 Tools
Note • [IPv4 - IP Filter] applies to all features using TCP/IP, such as the Print, Store to Folder, Web
Applications services (ApeosPort series models only), and CentreWare Internet Services.
• To set the IPv4 IP addresses that the machine accepts connection from, use [IP Filtering] in
CentreWare Internet Services. For more information, refer to the help of CentreWare
Internet Services or refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Settings" (P.267).
IPv6 - IP Filter
Select whether or not to limit IPv6 addresses that can access the machine.
Note • [IPv6 - IP Filter] applies to all features using TCP/IP, such as the Print, Store to Folder, Web
Applications services (ApeosPort series models only), and CentreWare Internet Services.
• To set the IPv6 addresses that the machine accepts connection from, use [IP Filtering] in
CentreWare Internet Services. For more information, refer to the help of CentreWare
Internet Services or refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Settings" (P.267).
178
Connectivity & Network Setup
E-mail Address
Enter the E-mail address of the machine with up to 128 single-byte characters.
When receiving E-mail via SMTP
You can set any name for the account (on the left side of @). Set the address section (on the
right side of @), with the combination of the host name and domain name. An alias cannot be
set.
For Example: mymail@myhost.example.com
z
Account name: mymail
z
Host name: myhost
z
Domain Name: example.com
When receiving E-mails via POP3
Enter the POP user name (on the left side of @) and incoming POP3 mail server name in the
address section (on the right side of @). You can set an alias, such as
mymail@example.com.
For Example: mymail@myhost.example.com
Tools
z Account name: mymail
Machine Name
Enter the machine name with up to 32 single-byte characters. 5
Host Name
Enter the host name with up to 16 single-byte characters.
Domain Name
Enter the domain name with up to 64 single-byte characters.
179
5 Tools
180
Connectivity & Network Setup
Tools
Set the HTTP proxy server port number from 1 to 65535.
The default value is 8080.
Important • Do not use the numbers assigned to the other ports.
5
HTTP Proxy Server Authentication
Select [Enabled] when authentication is required to connect to the HTTP proxy server.
181
5 Tools
Polling Interval
Set the interval for checking the e-mail on the POP3 server from 1 to 120 minutes in 1 minute
increments.
Login Name
Enter the name to login to the POP3 server with up to 64 characters.
Password
Enter a password for the POP3 server with up to 64 characters.
Enter the same password in [New Password] and [Retype Password] using the numeric
keypad displayed by selecting [Keyboard]. If you do not set the password, leave the text
boxes blank and select [Save].
POP Password Encryption
Select [On (APOP)] to encrypt the password.
182
Connectivity & Network Setup
Search Time-Out
Set the user information search time-out between 1 and 120 seconds in 1 second increments.
Tools
Configure the Kerberos Servers 1 to 5.
The settings in [Kerberos Server 1 (Default)] will be the default settings for authentication.
Primary Server Name/Address
Enter the primary server name or IP address.
5
Note • For IPv4, enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value
from 0 to 255.
• For IPv6, enter the address in the format "xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx", where
"xxxx" is a hexadecimal value.
Domain Name
When you use Active Directory of Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003, or Windows
Server 2008 as server, specify the domain name of Active Directory in [Domain Name]. Up to
64 characters are allowed.
Important • Enter a realm name in uppercase characters. Otherwise, an authentication error occurs.
183
5 Tools
Authentication Method
Select a method to perform LDAP authentication from [Direct Authentication] and
5 [Authentication of User Attributes].
z
Direct Authentication
User ID and password entered by a user are used for LDAP authentication.
z Authentication of User Attributes
The user ID entered is used as an attribute specified in [Attribute of Typed User Name] to
perform a search on the LDAP server. [Attribute of Login User Name] of a user found through
the search is used as the user ID or a job and the owner of a job flow sheet and a folder.
Attribute of Typed User Name
When [Authentication of User Attributes] is used for LDAP authentication, set the attribute of
the user ID entered. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
Set the attribute of the User Attribute information registered on the LDAP server that
corresponds to the value to be entered as the user name from the control panel. For example,
when you want a user to enter the mail address, set "mail."
Attribute of Login User Name
Enter an attribute to be used for LDAP authentication using User Attribute information
registered on the LDAP server. Up to 32 characters are allowed.
Use Added Text String
Select whether or not to automatically add text strings in [Text String Added to User Name]
when you enter the authentication information from the control panel.
Text String Added to User Name
Enter text strings for [Text String Added to User Name] when you use additional text strings.
Up to 64 characters are allowed.
When [Use Added Text String] is set to [Enabled], enter the corresponding fixed text string.
For Example:
When "mail" is set for [Attribute of Typed User Name] and the information registered for the
target user is "mail@myhost.example.com," you will need to enter
"mail@myhost.example.com".
However, if [Use Added Text String] is set to [Enabled] and "@myhost.example.com" is
specified for [Text String Added to User Name], you will only need to enter "mail" from the
control panel because the machine adds "@myhost.example.com" to the end of the string.
184
Connectivity & Network Setup
Tools
authentication is required for the search for the directory service. Up to 255 characters are
allowed.
Password
Set a login password for the user specified in [Login Name]. Up to 32 characters are allowed. 5
Search Directory Root
Enter a search root character string with up to 255 characters.
Scope of Search from Root Entry
Select the search range from the root entry.
z Root entry only
- Searches the root level only.
z
One level below root entry only
- Searches from the root level to one level below the root level.
z
All levels below root entry
- Searches from the root level to all lower levels below the root level.
Object Class of Search Target
Enter the object class to search with up to 32 characters.
LDAP Referrals
Specify whether or not to re-establish connection to another LDAP server if a currently
connected LDAP server requests to do so.
LDAP Referral Hop Limit
When using the Referral feature, specify how many times that a user is allowed to hop
servers within 1 to 5 times.
LDAP Server
Select the software used by the directory server from [Microsoft Active Directory], [Microsoft
Exchange], [Novell NetWare], [IBM Lotus Domino 6.*], and [Other Applications].
185
5 Tools
Search Time-Out
Select whether or not to set a search time-out. Set the value from 5 to 120 seconds in 1
second increments.
186
Connectivity & Network Setup
z The IP address or Internet address of the directory server (primary) must be set.
z The port numbers used for LDAP communication must be set on the directory server and the
machine.
Domain Name
Enter the domain name of the server. Up to 64 characters are allowed.
This setting is mandatory regardless of the SMB server specification method selected for
[SMB Server Setup].
Important • Use the NetBIOS or Active Directory domain name for the domain name.
Tools
Important • Use the NetBIOS computer name or full computer name with DNS suffix for the server
name.
• For IPv4, enter the address in the format "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx", where "xxx" is a numeric value
from 0 to 255. 5
Security Settings
Set the security settings.
187
5 Tools
S/MIME Communication
Select whether or not to enable S/MIME communications.
188
Connectivity & Network Setup
Device Certificate
Select a certificate to use for the signature.
For more information on the certificate, refer to "Encryption and Digital Signature Settings" (P.335).
PDF Signature
Select the setting for PDF Signature from [Do not add signature], [Always add visible
signature], [Always add invisible signature], or [Select during send].
Tools
DocuWorks Signature
Select the setting for DocuWorks Signature from [Do not add signature], [Always add
signature], or [Select during send].
XPS Signature 5
Select the setting for XPS Signature from [Do not add signature], [Always add invisible
signature], or [Select during send].
Signing Certificate
Select the certificate to use for attaching a signature to e-mails.
IPSec Settings
Configure the IPSec settings.
Note • For [IKE Authentication Method], [Preshared Key], [DH Group], and [PFS Settings], consult
your network administrator.
Preshared Key
Enter a preshared key.
This setting is valid when [IKE Authentication Method] is set to [Authenticate by Preshared
Key].
Device Certificate
Select a certificate for IPSec communications.
Set a certificate when [IKE Authentication Method] is set to [Authenticate by Digital
Signature]. A self-signed certificate created by CentreWare Internet Services cannot be used.
For more information on a certificate, refer to "Types of Certificate" (P.336).
IPSec Communication
Select whether or not to enable IPSec communications.
189
5 Tools
DH Group
Set DH group. Select from [G1] and [G2].
PFS Settings
Select whether or not to enable PFS.
5 IEEE 802.1x
Set whether or not to use IEEE 802.1x authentication.
Authentication Method
Select from [EAP-MD5], [EAP-MS-CHAPv2], [PEAP / MS-CHAPv2], and [EAP-TLS].
Login Password
Enter the login password with up to 128 characters.
190
Connectivity & Network Setup
Other Settings
You can set the following network related items:
Tools
Add Domain Name to User Name
Select whether or not to add domain names to user names.
Domain Filtering
5
Set the domain filtering settings for the E-mail and Internet Fax features.
Domain Filtering
When [Allow Domains] is selected, you can specify domains to permit transmissions. When
[Block Domains] is selected, you can specify domains to prohibit transmissions.
Domains 1 to 50
When [Domain Filtering] is set to [Allow Domains] or [Block Domains], you can specify up to
50 domains to allow or block transmissions.
Selecting [Change Settings] allows you to enter the domain name using a keyboard displayed
with up to 64 characters.
191
5 Tools
In [Print Service Settings], you can configure settings related to the Print feature.
Using CentreWare Internet Services, you can make more detailed settings.
For more information, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Settings" (P.267).
Allocate Memory
Tools
For each interface, set the memory capacity of the receiving buffer (temporary storage
5 for data sent from the client).
You can change the receiving buffer capacity according to its use and purpose.
Increasing the receiving buffer capacity may allow a client to be released sooner from
an interface.
Important • If you change the capacity memory, the memory is reset, thus all data stored in memory
area is erased.
• You cannot allocate more memory beyond its memory capacity. When you turn the machine
on, and the size set exceeds the total memory size, the system automatically adjust the
memory size.
Note • When a port is set to [Disabled], the corresponding items to the port do not appear.
• Depending on the amount of data sent from the client, increasing the memory capacity may
not change the time taken to release the client.
PostScript Memory
Specify a value for the PostScript memory capacity from 70.00 to 128.00 MB in 0.25 MB
increments.
Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• The maximum amount of memory you can allocate varies according to the amount of free
space available in memory.
192
Print Service Settings
Note • The maximum amount of memory you can allocate varies according to the amount of free
space available in memory.
No Spooling
Does not use spooling. While LPD printing is performed for one client, data cannot be
received over the same interface from another client.
Specify a value for the dedicated LPD receiving buffer memory capacity from 1024 to 2048
KB in 32 KB increments.
Spool to Memory
Carries out spooling. The receiving buffer for spooling uses memory. When this setting is
selected, specify the memory capacity of a receiving buffer for spooling from 0.50 MB to
32.00 MB in 0.25 MB increments.
Tools
Note that print data exceeding the memory capacity set is not accepted. In such cases, select
[Spool to Hard Disk] or [No Spooling].
Spool to Memory
Carries out spooling. The receiving buffer for spooling uses memory. When this setting is
selected, specify the memory capacity of a receiving buffer for spooling from 0.50 MB to
32.00 MB in 0.25 MB increments.
Note that print data exceeding the memory capacity set is not accepted. In such cases, select
[Spool to Hard Disk] or [No Spooling].
193
5 Tools
Delete Form
You can delete registered ESC/P-K forms.
ESC/P
Deletes ESC/P-K emulation forms.
5 Form Number
When you select an item to delete, you can enter the form number.
Form Name
After you enter the form number and select [Confirm], the form name matching the form
number entered appears.
3 Enter the form number with the numeric keypad, and select [Confirm].
4 Check the form name, and then select [Delete Data].
Other Settings
You can configure other settings related to the paper used in the printer.
Print Area
Set whether or not to expand the print area.
For more information about the printable area, refer to "Printable Area" (P.532).
For more information on the extended printable area, refer to "Extended Printable Area" (P.532).
Substitute Tray
When there is no tray containing the paper size selected by the Auto Paper selection, select
whether or not to print with paper loaded in another paper tray. In the event of using a
substitute tray, select the paper size from [Use Larger Size], [Use Closest Size], or [Select
Tray 5].
Note • When documents are printed using emulation such as ESC/P-K and HP-GL/2, the substitute
tray setting is not valid and a message prompting you to load paper displayed on the screen.
Display Message
Does not use a substitute tray, but displays a paper loading message.
194
Print Service Settings
Select Tray 5
Prints using the paper loaded in Tray 5.
Print
Prints using the paper loaded in the tray.
Tools
and prints the job in accordance with the [Paper Tray Priority], [Paper Size], or [Substitute
Tray setting.
For more information, refer to "Automatic Tray Selection" (P.41).
Unregistered Forms
Set whether or not to print a job if a form specified for printing in a form data file (overlay
printing) is not registered on the machine. If you specify [Print], only the data is printed
because the specified form is not present.
Resume by User
Displays a confirmation screen before canceling the print job. After the confirmation, the
machine cancels the print job to print the subsequent jobs.
195
5 Tools
Delete Job
The machine cancels printing and removes the print job.
Note • For print files stored in a folder such as Charge Print, Private Charge Print, Secure Print, and
Sample Print, the machine resumes printing after the paper jam is cleared.
Print User ID
When printing using a print driver, specify whether or not to print user ID set in the print driver
on paper. The first 64 letters of the user ID are printed.
Select a position to print from [Top Left], [Top Right], [Bottom Left], and [Bottom Right].
Note • To use the Print User ID feature, the user ID must be set in the print driver
beforehand. For more information, refer to the help of the print driver.
• When user ID set in the print driver is not available, "Unknown User" is printed.
Banner Sheet
You can output a banner sheet to separate different jobs by users not to be mixed the
outputs. The machine outputs the banner sheet before or after the job.
A date, time, user name, and file name are printed on the banner sheet.
Tools
5 banner sheet.
• When printed, banner sheets are counted by meter.
Off
Does not print banner sheets.
Start Sheet
Prints a banner sheet before a print job.
End Sheet
Prints a banner sheet after a print job.
196
Print Service Settings
Cancel Printing
Cancels printing.
Tools
Prints using a substitute font. Courier is used as the substitute font.
Off
Does not process print tickets.
Standard Mode
Uses the standard mode to process print tickets.
Compatible Mode
Uses the Microsoft-compliant mode to process print tickets.
197
5 Tools
198
Scan Service Settings
In [Scan Service Settings], you can configure settings related to the Scan services.
Note • To use the Store & Send Link feature, an optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• When [Scan to Fax Server] is selected in the System Settings, [Scan Service Settings] is
replaced with [Scan/Fax Service Settings].
For information on scanner environment settings, refer to "Scanner Environment Settings" (P.301).
Tools
1 On the [Tools] screen, select [Scan Service Settings].
For the method of displaying the [Tools] screen, refer to "System Settings Procedure" (P.120).
First Tab
The First Tab means the screen displayed when you select the following tabs in the [E-
mail], [Store to Folder], [Network Scanning], [Scan to PC], [Store & Send Link], and
[Store to USB] screens.
z
The [E-mail] tab of the E-mail service
z The [Store to Folder] tab of the Store to Folder service
z The [Network Scanning] tab of the Network Scanning service
z The [Scan to PC] tab of the Scan to PC service
z
The [Store & Send Link] tab of the Store & Send Link service
z
The [Store to USB] tab of the Store to USB service
Note • To use the Store & Send Link feature, an optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
199
5 Tools
Scan Defaults
You can set the default settings of the Scan services. When the machine is turned on,
or the machine exits the Energy Saver mode, or when the <Clear All> button is
pressed, the machine resets to the default values set here. Setting frequently used
features and values as the defaults can avoid extra operations required during the use
of the machine.
The values set here become valid after the machine turned off and then on.
For more information on each setting item, refer to "5 Scan" in the User Guide.
Color Scanning
Set the default value for [Color Scanning] in the First Tab.
Original Type
Set the default value for [Original Type] in the First Tab.
File Format
Set the default value for [File Format] in the First Tab.
Set the default value for [Optimize For Quick Web View] of [File Format] in the First Tab.
Thumbnail - Scan to PC
For the Scan to PC feature, set the default value for [Add Thumbnail] when [DocuWorks] or
[XPS] in selected for [File Format] in the First Tab.
Lighten/Darken
Set the default value for [Lighten/Darken] of [Image Options] in the [Advanced Settings]
screen.
Contrast
Set the default value for [Contrast] of [Image Enhancement] in the [Advanced Settings]
screen. The contrast setting is valid when [Color Scanning] is set to [Color] or [Grayscale].
Sharpness
Set the default value for [Sharpness] of [Image Options] in the [Advanced Settings] screen.
Background Suppression
Set the default value for [Background Suppression] of [Image Enhancement] in the
[Advanced Settings] screen.
Shadow Suppression
Set the default value for [Shadow Suppression] in the [Advanced Settings] screen.
Color Space
Set the default value for [Color Space] in the [Advanced Settings] screen.
Note • When [Device Color Space] is selected as default and [Color Space] is set to [Disabled],
[Auto Detect] of [Color Scanning] in the First Tab does not appear.
200
Scan Service Settings
Original Orientation
Set the default value for [Original Orientation] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Resolution
Set the default value for [Resolution] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
You can select from [200 dpi], [300 dpi], [400 dpi], and [600 dpi].
Edge Erase
Set the default value for [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen. You can select from
[All Edges] and [Parallel Edges].
Tools
Set the default value for [Left & Right] in [Edge Erase] in the [Layout Adjustment] screen.
Specify a value from 0 to 50 mm in 1 mm increments.
Quality/File Size
Set the default value for [Quality/File Size] in the [Filling Options] screen.
Select from [Quality: Normal/File Size: Small], [Quality: Higher +1/File Size: Larger +1],
[Quality: Higher +2/File Size: Larger +2], [Quality: Higher +3/File Size: Larger +3], and
[Quality: Maximum/File Size: Largest].
E-mail Subject
Set the default value for the e-mail subject. Up to 128 characters can be entered for the
subject.
E-mail Encryption
Set the default value for [Encryption] in the [E-mail Options] in the [E-mail] screen.
Note • This feature appears only when the root certificate for a remote server for remote
authentication (except for Authentication Agent) is set.
Searchable Text
Set the default value for [Searchable Text] in the [File Format] screen under the First Tab.
201
5 Tools
Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Scan to PC Defaults
Transfer Protocol
Set the default value for the transfer protocol used for transfer from [FTP], [SMB], or [SMB
(UNC Format)].
Tools
None
Does not use the remotely authenticated user.
Inch Size
You can select a size from Inch series sizes such as 8.5 x 11".
202
Scan Service Settings
Others
You can select a size from sizes of other than the above series such as photo and postcard
sizes.
Custom Size
You can enter any size. Set the width (X) from 15 to 432 mm, and the height (Y) from 15 to
297 mm in 1 mm increments.
Inch Size
You can select a size from Inch series sizes such as 8.5 x 11".
Others
Tools
You can select a size from other sizes such as photo and postcard.
Variable %
You can specify a magnification from 25 to 400% in 1% increments.
Other Settings
You can configure other settings related to the Scan services specifications.
Delete Job
Deletes the data partially stored.
Run Job
Treats the read-in data as valid, and start scanning the document partially stored.
203
5 Tools
Saturation
Set the saturation when scanning a full color document. When a document is scanned,
saturation is automatically adjusted according to the value set here.
Color Space
Set whether or not to display the Color Space feature.
When you select [Enabled], the [Color Space] button is displayed on the [Advanced Settings]
screen for the [E-mail], [Store to Folder], [Scan to PC], and [Job Template].
Note • When [Disabled] is selected as default and Color Space is set to [Device Color Space], [Auto
Detect] of [Color Scanning] in the First Tab ([E-mail]/[Store to Folder]/[Network Scanning]/
[Scan to PC]) does not appear. For more information on Color Space, refer to "Color Space"
Tools
(P.200).
TIFF Format
5 Set the TIFF format for scanned data. You can select either [TIFF V6] or [TTN2].
Disabled
Does not display a scan completion message.
204
Scan Service Settings
Note • To use the Store & Send Link feature, an optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Tools
Print Login Name on PDF Files
If scanning a document in PDF format when local machine authentication or remote
authentication is enabled, you can set whether or not to add an authentication user name as
the Author in the document properties of the PDF document.
5
Note • To use the Store & Send Link feature, an optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
205
5 Tools
In [Fax Service Settings], you can configure settings related to the Fax service.
Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. The
items displayed on the screen vary depending on the optional components installed. For
more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• You can register new address book entries in [Add Address Book Entry] under [Setup]. For
more information, refer to "Add Address Book Entry" (P.240).
Screen Defaults
You can set items displayed on the [Fax / Internet Fax] screen.
Transmission Screen
Set whether or not to display transmission status during transmission.
206
Fax Service Settings
Fax Defaults
You can set the default settings of the Fax services. When the machine is turned on,
or the machine exits from the Energy Saver mode, or when the <Clear All> button is
pressed, the machine resets to the default values specified under this menu. By setting
frequently used features and values as the defaults, you can simplify operations.
For more information on each setting item, refer to "4 Fax" in the User Guide.
Resolution
Set the default value for [Resolution] in the [Fax / Internet Fax] screen.
Original Type
Set the default value for [Original Type] in the [Fax / Internet Fax] screen.
Lighten/Darken
Set the default value for [Lighten/Darken] in the [Fax / Internet Fax] screen.
Tools
Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Starting Rate
Set the default value for [Starting Rate] in the [Fax / Internet Fax Options] screen.
5
Delay Start - Specific Time
Set the default value for [Specific Time] of [Priority Send/Delay Start] in the [Fax / Internet Fax
Options] screen when [Specific Time] is selected for [Delay Start].
Confirmation Options
Set the default value for [Confirmation Options] of [Acknowledgement Report] in the [Fax /
Internet Fax Options] screen.
Note • You can select Delivery Receipts or Read Receipts in [Delivery Confirmation Method]. For
more information on the delivery confirmation method, refer to "Delivery Confirmation
Method" (P.215).
207
5 Tools
Fax Control
You can configure the settings related to fax control.
Re-enter Recipients
Set whether to re-enter the recipient after once specifying the recipient, to reduce the risk of
sending a fax or an Internet fax to the wrong address. When Re-enter Recipients is set to
[Enter Twice], if you specify the recipient by entering the phone number, or by selecting from
the Address Book, the screen prompting you to re-enter the recipient appears. If the same
recipient has been entered, the transmission process will start.
z
Enter Once Only
Allows the Broadcast Send. No need to re-enter the recipient.
5 Enter Twice
z
208
Fax Service Settings
Rotate 90 degrees
Set whether or not to automatically rotate a document if its image must be reduced in size
unless it is rotated.
Note • If an arbitrary magnification is specified in [Reduce / Enlarge], the Rotate 90 Degrees feature
Tools
does not function.
Sender ID
For G3 communications, you can select whether to notify G3-ID to recipients. 5
Save Undelivered Faxes
Set whether or not to save a fax document if a fax transmission fails. When [Yes] is selected,
the [Undelivered Faxes] button appears on the [Secure Print Jobs & More] tab of the [Job
Status] screen. Select this button to send the fax document again.
For details on Undelivered Faxes, refer to "11 Job Status" > "Printing and Deleting Stored Jobs" >
"Undelivered Faxes" in the User Guide.
Transmission Interval
Specify a value for the interval between the end of one transmission and the beginning of the
next, from 3 to 255 seconds in 1 second increments.
A longer transmission interval increases the total time to send a broadcast transmission, but
allows calls to be received during the standby time.
Batch Send
When the machine stores multiple faxes addressed to a destination, enabling the Batch Send
feature allows you to send them all at the same time in a single fax transmission. By using
this feature, you can reduce your communication costs.
Select whether or not to enable the Batch Send feature.
Note that a batch send is not available for manual transmissions, broadcasts, relay
broadcasts, remote folder, and delayed start transmission with a specified time before the
209
5 Tools
specified time. When a redial, resend, delayed start transmission job, or the Authentication
feature is used and different users send to the same address, a batch send is not possible.
Border Limit
Set the length to make a page break that will be applied when the length of a received fax
document is longer than the paper length. You can specify a value from 0 to 127 mm in 1 mm
increments.
This setting can conveniently be used together with the following Auto Reduce on Receipt
feature.
When the length of a received fax document exceeds the paper length but is within the page
break threshold value, select whether or not to automatically reduce the image to fit the page.
This setting can conveniently be used together with the Border Limit feature. If you select
5 [No], the part of the image beyond the paper length is ignored.
Tray Mode
Specify the paper tray for printing the received fax document. Only the specified paper tray
will be used for printing the received document. Multiple paper trays can be specified except
for Tray 5. If the fax document cannot be printed on the paper loaded on the specified paper
trays, the machine displays a message stating that it will be printed on the paper loaded in
Tray 5. Load paper in Tray 5 and press the <Start> button to print the document. To cancel
printing, press the <Clear All> button.
User Mode
Specify the paper sizes to use for printing received fax documents. Regardless of whether the
paper is loaded in the trays, only the specified size paper is used for printing. When you
select [User Mode], select paper sizes from [A4 ], [8.5×11" ], [A5 ], and [Select All]. You
can select one or more paper sizes.
2 Pages Up On Receipt
Set whether or not to print two pages of a fax document on one side of a sheet. This is
convenient for saving paper.
For example, when two A5 pages are received, they are printed on a single A4 sheet.
However, if paper of the same paper size as the received document is specified in [Receiving
Paper Size], it is printed on the specified size of paper. Depending on the sizes of the
received document, two pages of the document may not be printed on one sheet of paper.
2 Sided Printing
Set whether or not to print received fax documents (including the Internet fax received
documents) as 2 sided. This is convenient for saving paper.
Note • Even if you select [On], depending on the data, 2 sided printing may not always be possible.
210
Fax Service Settings
Tools
Select whether or not to use the Folder Selector Setup feature.
The Folder Selector Setup feature allows you to classify received faxes by line type and store
them in folders specified.
5
Memory Full Procedure
If there is insufficient hard disk memory while scanning a document, a screen appears asking
you how you want to handle the partially stored data.
Set the process you want the machine to perform for the partially stored data after a certain
time has elapsed in the confirmation screen.
You can set the time until the memory full procedure is carried out. For more information, refer to "Auto
Job Release" (P.139).
Delete Job
Deletes the data partially stored.
Run Job
Treats the read-in data as valid, and start scanning the document partially stored.
211
5 Tools
There are priority levels from 1 to 3. All priority can be set, however, if you want to display
only one priority level, make the settings of all priority levels the same.
Note • This feature is not available for some models. An optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Direct Fax
Set whether or not to receive a fax, which is instructed using a fax driver from a computer.
When you select [Disabled], the Direct Fax feature becomes unavailable.
3 Select [On].
4 Enter the folder number (three digits) where you want to store the faxes with the
numeric keypad.
5 Select [Save].
212
Fax Service Settings
Variable %
You can specify a magnification from 50 to 400% in 1% increments.
Tools
You can select a size from A and B series sizes such as A4 and B5.
Inch Size
You can select a size from Inch series sizes such as 8.5 x 11".
Others
5
You can select a size from other sizes such as photo and postcard.
Local Name
Register the name of the local terminal as the local name.
The local name is shown in the recipient's touch screen or Activity Report. Depending on the
recipient's device, however, it may not be displayed.
Specify a local name with up to 20 single-byte characters using the keyboard displayed or the
numeric keypad.
Company Logo
Register the sender name (company logo). The company logo is printed in the Transmission
Header Text or Cover Page. Specify a company log with up to 60 single-byte characters
using the keyboard displayed or the numeric keypad.
Note • If [Line 1 - Company Logo] is not registered, the company log is used.
Machine Password
Set the machine password when you want to limit the other parties that can send faxes.
When the machine password is set, only a party that sends the correct machine password by
F code is allowed to send or poll. Note that this means that faxes cannot be accepted from a
fax without the F Code feature.
213
5 Tools
G3 Line 1 - Fax ID
When using G3 communications, register the G3 ID. The G3 ID is normally set to the local
terminal fax number.
Specify a G3 ID with up to 20 digits using the keyboard displayed or the numeric keypad.
Note • A G3 ID (fax number) can consist of not more than 20 digits, including 0 to 9, +, and space.
Tone
Tone dialing line.
10pps
Pulse dialing line.
PSTN
5 Subscriber telephone line.
PBX
Private branch exchange.
Direct (P2P)
Directly sends to the machine with the Internet Fax feature, without going through an SMTP
server.
You can specify the following two types of e-mail address for the Internet Fax feature:
z Specifying a host name
@ must be followed by FQDN.
Example: local-part@device.domain.jp
z Specifying an IP address
@ must be followed by an IP address with brackets.
Example: local-part@[129.249.123.1]
214
Fax Service Settings
Important • The supported TIFF-file profiles vary depending on the destination Internet Fax-enabled
machine. Before specifying a profile, check the profile that the destination machine supports.
TIFF-S
The Internet fax standard profile. For documents larger than A4, the size is automatically
reduced to A4 when transmission.
TIFF-F
Select this profile when you specify [Superfine] for [Resolution].
TIFF-J
Select this profile for sending documents in JBIG.
Tools
Delivery Receipts
You can confirm whether the Internet fax you sent is delivered to the recipient's folder
successfully.
Read Receipts
5
You can confirm whether the Internet fax including attachments you sent is processed
properly at the recipient.
Off
Permits forwarding.
On
Checks whether the forwarding fax number is listed in the Address Book, and if not, rejects
receiving the e-mail and deletes it.
215
5 Tools
No Limit
No limit on data size.
Limit Size
Specify a value from 1 to 65535 KB in 1 KB increments. If a data size exceeds the specified
value, the data is deleted.
Tools
216
E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings
In [E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings], you can configure settings related to the e-
mail and the Internet Fax service.
Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
E-mail Control
You can configure the settings for e-mail and Internet fax transmissions.
Tools
The number of addresses is the total number of To:/Cc:/Bcc:.
You can set the maximum number of addresses from 1 to 100. If the maximum number of
addresses exceeds, the e-mail transmission is aborted.
Important • This option is not applicable to the Internet Fax service. 5
Incoming E-mail Print Options
When an e-mail sent to the e-mail address of the machine is received, you can select the
print operation.
Off
Does not respond.
On
Automatically notifies the sender that the e-mail has been processed.
217
5 Tools
Read Receipts
When an e-mail is sent from the machine, select whether or not to use the Read Receipts
feature.
Off
The Read Receipts feature is disabled.
On
Uses the Read Receipts feature.
Note • For the Internet fax read receipts setting, select either [Delivery Receipts] or [Read Receipts]
in [Delivery Confirmation Method] under [Tools] > [Fax Service Settings] > [Internet Fax
Control].
Off
Does not print transmission result e-mails.
On
Transmission result e-mails are automatically printed regardless of success or failure of the
transmission.
Tools
218
E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings
Tools
Set whether or not to permit to edit e-mail recipients (To, CC, BCC). Selecting [No] prevents
e-mails from being sent to unintended destinations.
Important • If you set [Edit E-mail Recipients] to [No], set [Add Me to "To" Field] to [Yes].
5
219
5 Tools
In [Folder Service Settings], you can configure settings to handle files stored in folders.
Force Delete
Ignores the settings for individual folder, and when a file is retrieved by a client, the retrieved
file is forcibly deleted.
Tools
220
Job Flow Service Settings (ApeosPort Series Models Only)
In [Job Flow Service Settings], you can configure the settings related to the Job Flow.
The Job Flow is a function to perform a series of jobs registered.
Also, in [Job Flow Service Settings], you can configure a pool server. As for [Pool
Server], [Pool Server Login Method], and [Job Flow Sheet List Default], however, leave
the default settings unchanged because a pool server is not available for the machine.
You can select a resolution in [Fax Transfer Resolution] when you transfer a scanned
document as a fax.
Pool Server
Leave the default setting unchanged.
Tools
Fax Transfer Resolution
Select the resolution setting when you send a color document as a fax using the Job Flow
feature. 5
Same Resolution (High Quality)
Converts color images to black and white images on a document with the same resolution
when the document is transferred as a fax. Conversion of high resolution color images will
take longer.
221
5 Tools
In [Media Print Service Settings], you can select the paper trays displayed for [Paper
Supply] in the [Media Print Text] and [Media Print Photos] screens.
When the USB Media Print Kit (optional) is installed in the machine, you can import and
print image data (DCF1.0 (Exif 2.0 - 2.2 compliant JPEG/TIFF files)) from a digital
camera and document files (PDF, TIFF, XML Paper Specification (XPS), XDW, XBD,
or JPEG (JFIF)). This feature is called the Media Print feature.
Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
222
Stored File Settings
In [Stored File Settings], you can select whether to automatically delete files stored on
the folder or the machine. Set the expiration date and the time of deletion.
You can also set whether or not to delete the stored file by file type.
Off
Does not automatically delete the print files stored in the machine.
On
Tools
Allows you to set the file retention period and the expiration date. The stored files will be
deleted after the time specified in [Files deleted at] passed.
Options
Set the retention period for stored jobs.
Select from [Off], [On], and [Same Date as Files in Folder]. When [On] is selected, set the
value for [Files kept for] from 1 to 23 hours in 1 hour increments. If the time elapses, print files
stored in the machine are deleted. When [Same Date as Files in Folder] is selected, print files
stored in the machine are deleted in accordance with the setting in [Expiration Date for Files
in Folder].
223
5 Tools
224
Web Applications Service Setup (ApeosPort Series Models Only)
In [Web Applications Service Setup], you can specify the remote access destination.
Remote access allows you to view web application services, which are compatible with
the machine, directly on the touch screen, to upload a document that has been scanned
on the machine to the web applications, and to directly select and print a document that
is stored in the remote server. It also allows you to directly upload and print a file without
going through another computer.
Note • To use this feature, the External Access Kit (optional) and any Fuji Xerox manufactured web
applications (purchased separately) are required. For more information, contact our
Customer Support Center.
Tools
Server Setup
This section describes how to register a server on access web applications.
Note • If there are one or more servers to register, it is helpful to assign the servers to the buttons 5
displayed on the [Services Home] screen. For information on changing the buttons on the
[Services Home] screen, refer to "Customizing the Control Panel" (P.24).
Use the version of a web application that is set [Web Applications Version] in "Web Browser
Setup (ApeosPort Series Models Only)" (P.228).
For example:
z http://www.example.com
z http://192.168.1.1 (IPv4)
z
http:// [2001:DB8::1234] (IPv6)
z
https://www.example.com
z
https://192.168.1.1 (IPv4)
z https:// [2001:DB8::1234] (IPv6)
z When specified with V2 (old version)
- http-v2://www.example.com
- http-v2://192.168.1.1 (IPv4)
- http-v2://[2001:DB8::1234] (IPv6)
225
5 Tools
z No
- When [Login Type] is set to [Login to Remote Accounts]:
The machine accesses the remote service using the user information authenticated on the
5 machine.
- When [Login Type] is set to [No Login Required] or [Login to Local Accounts]:
The machine prompts the user to input User ID and password to access Web applications.
z
Yes
Allows you to enter a user ID and password into [User ID] and [Password] respectively, which
are used when the machine accesses the remote service.
User ID
Enter the User ID to access the remote service with up to 128 characters.
Important • Depending on the settings on the remote service, the entry for [User ID] may be invalid.
Check the settings on the remote service.
Note • Along with [User ID], set also [Password]. [User ID] will be invalid unless [Password] is set.
• All the specified settings are ignored if the remote service to be connected requires other
than a user ID and its password for authentication.
Password
Enter the password for the User ID with up to 128 characters.
Machine/Authentication Notification
Set whether or not to notify the remote server of machine information and user authentication
information every time the machine connects to the remote service.
Note • The remote service determines whether to use the information. No need to configure
settings on the control panel.
226
Web Applications Service Setup (ApeosPort Series Models Only)
Other Settings
Tools
5
227
5 Tools
In [Web Browser Setup], you can configure the settings for the Web browser to be used
when the machine accesses a web application using the Web Applications feature.
Remote access allows you to view web application services, which are compatible with
the machine, directly on the touch screen, to upload a document that has been scanned
on the machine to the web applications, and to directly select and print a document that
is stored in the remote server. It also allows you to directly upload and print a file without
going through another computer.
Important • Configure [Web Applications Version] as required when a service which works in ApeosPort
is used.
Note • To use this feature, the External Access Kit (optional) and any Fuji Xerox manufactured web
applications (purchased separately) are required. For more information, contact our
Customer Support Center.
5 Select a version of the Web applications service from [V2 (Old Version)] and [V4 (New
Version)].
Important • If [V2 (Old Version)] is selected, the following settings become invalid: [Delete Persistent
Cookie Upon Closing], [Clear Cache Upon Closing], [Use Cache], [Accept Cookies], [Use
TLS1.0], [Use SSL3.0], [When SSL Certificate Verification Fails], and [Enable File Printing].
Note • When you use V3 of the web application version, select [V4 (New Version)].
Use Cache
Set whether or not to use cache.
Accept Cookies
Set whether or not to accept cookies.
Select from [No], [Yes], and [Warn user when cookie is offered].
When you select [Warn user when cookie is offered], the machine behaves as when you
select [Yes].
Use TLS1.0
Set whether or not to use TLS 1.0.
Use SSL3.0
Set whether or not to use SSL 3.0.
228
Web Browser Setup (ApeosPort Series Models Only)
Tools
5
229
5 Tools
Setup
In [Setup], you can create or update folders, job flows, and the Address Book.
Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
The following shows the reference section for each setting.
Create Folder.............................................................................................................................230
Stored Programming .................................................................................................................232
Create Job Flow Sheet...............................................................................................................232
Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword...............................................................................................240
Add Address Book Entry ..........................................................................................................240
Create Fax Group Recipients ....................................................................................................246
Add Fax Comment ....................................................................................................................247
Paper Tray Attributes ................................................................................................................247
5 Create Folder
Using the Folder function enables you to store scanned documents using the machine,
fax received documents, or print documents sent from a computer in the machine.
You also can send a file stored in a folder via e-mail or retrieve a file stored in a
computer on a network.
You can create a private folder and a public folder in the machine and use them
separately depending on your purpose.
You can create up to 200 folders.
You can check the current folders in a Folder List. For more information, refer to "Folder List" (P.107).
230
Setup
Folder Name
Set the folder name. Enter up to 20 single-byte characters using the keyboard displayed or
the numeric keypad.
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.32).
Folder Passcode
To use the Check Folder Passcode feature, enter a passcode. You can enter a passcode of
up to 20 numeric digits (0 to 9).
Tools
Target Operation
Set the operations to be restricted.
z Always (All Operations) 5
A passcode entry is required when a folder is selected or a file in a folder is printed or deleted.
z Save (Write)
A passcode entry is required when a folder is selected.
z
Print / Delete (Read)
A passcode entry is required when printing or deleting the file in the folder.
No
The file is left stored.
Yes
After the file is printed, or is retrieved by an external source, it is automatically deleted.
Note • If you select [Yes], a file is not deleted when retrieved from CentreWare Internet Services.
No
Even when the retention period has elapsed, files are not deleted.
Yes
Deletes expired files at the specified time. If, however, the expiration date has not been
specified, files are not deleted even when [Yes] is selected.
Note • When the machine is off at the deletion time of an expired file, the file is deleted next time
the deletion time comes after the machine is turned on.
For information on setting the file retention period, refer to "Expiration Date for Files in Folder" (P.223).
231
5 Tools
Cut Link
Cancels the link between a folder and a linked job flow sheet.
Auto Start
If you select the [Auto Start] check box, when a file is stored in a folder, the procedures
registered on the job flow linked automatically starts.
5
Stored Programming
The Stored Programming feature enables you to register frequently used settings and record a
series of operations.
For more information on operation, refer to "8 Stored Programming" > "Registering/Deleting/Renaming
Stored Programs" in the User Guide.
232
Setup
Depending on the method of storing in the folder, there are restrictions on the combination of
features.
DocuCentre Series Models
Output Internet
Print Fax Mail FTP SMB
Input Fax *1
Fax Documents
O O O X X X
for Secure Polling
Scanning O O O X X X
Fax to Folder O*2 O O X X X
Internet Fax
O O U X X X
Received
Print Stored X X X X X X
O : Available
X : Not available
U: Available depending on the System
Administration mode settings
ApeosPort Series Models
Output Internet
Tools
Print Fax Mail FTP SMB
Input Fax *1
Fax Documents
for Secure Polling
O O O O O O
5
Scanning O O O O O O
*2
Fax to Folder O O O O O O
Internet Fax
O O U U O O
Received
Print Stored X X X X X X
O : Available
X : Not available
U: Available depending on the System
Administration mode settings
*1 Load an A4 document in landscape orientation when TIFF-S has been selected for the Internet fax forwarding
profile. Loading the document in portrait orientation will reduce the size of the Internet fax image.
*2 If the fax USB cable is disconnected while a received fax file in a folder is being printed, the file is not deleted after
printing, even if the delete after printing setting is enabled in the folder settings.
Important • For Fax Documents for Secure Polling and Fax to Folder in the above tables, when sending
or transferring a monochrome document via e-mail, FTP, or SMB, the transferred document
cannot be opened on the destination machine if [JPEG] is set for [File Format] for the job
flow.
233
5 Tools
Sheet Filtering
You can filter the job flow sheets to display.
Select the filtering conditions, and then select
[Save].
Note • The screen displayed varies depending
on the Login Type selected.
z Owner
Filters job flow sheets by owner type.
z
Target (ApeosPort series models only)
Filters job flow sheets by target, such as scan jobs and folders.
Tools
Create
Displays the [Create New Job Flow Sheet] screen.
5 Refer to "Create New Job Flow Sheet" (P.235).
Edit/Delete
Displays the [Details] screen.
Refer to "Edit/Delete" (P.239).
Search by Name
Searches for job flows that partially match the entry. The machine searches through job flow
names that were registered upon each job flow creation. You can enter up to 128 single-byte
characters.
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.32).
Search by Keyword
Searches for job flows that fully match the entry. The machine searches through keywords
that were registered upon each job flow creation.
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.32).
Select Keyword
Displays the [Select Keyword] screen. Select a keyword registered in the System Settings to
search for job flows. Job flows that fully match the entry are searched. The machine searches
through keywords that were registered upon each job flow creation.
For information on the keyword registry, refer to "Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword" (P.240).
234
Setup
Delete
Deletes all setting values of the selected item.
Edit
Confirm or change the settings of the selected item.
Close Menu
Deselect the selected item.
Name
Tools
Set the name for the job flow sheet with up to 128 single-byte characters.
Description
Set the description of the job flow sheet with up to 256 single-byte characters. 5
Keyword
Enter a keyword with up to 12 single-byte characters for job flow search. You can also use
the keywords that are registered for [Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword].
For information on the job flow keyword search, refer to "Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword" (P.240).
Send as Fax
Specify destinations for fax transmission. You can specify a total of 100 destinations, either
by selecting from the Address Book or by direct input.
Important • You cannot use wildcards or group dial numbers.
Note • This item is not displayed when the Server Fax feature is enabled.
Speed Dial
Specify an address with a speed dial. Enter the speed dial with the numeric keypad, and
select [Save]. The address specified appears in [Name/Fax Number] in the [Send Fax]
screen.
New Recipient
Specify a new address. The address specified appears in [Name/Fax Number] in the [Send
Fax] screen.
Name/Fax Number
Displays the recipient name or fax number specified.
Delete Recipient
Deletes all information for the selected recipient.
Edit
Displays the [Edit Recipient] screen, which allows you to check or change the recipient
selected.
For more information on the [Edit Recipient] screen, refer to "5 Scan" in the User Guide.
235
5 Tools
Cancel
Deselect the selected item.
Speed Dial
Specify an address with a speed dial. Enter the speed dial with the numeric keypad, and
select [Save]. The address specified appears in [Name/E-mail Address] in the [Send Internet
Fax] screen.
New Recipient
Specify a new address. The address specified appears in [Name/E-mail Address] in the
[Send Internet Fax] screen.
Name/E-mail Address
Displays the recipient name or address specified.
Delete Recipient
Deletes all information for the selected recipient.
Tools
Edit
Displays the [Edit Recipient] screen, which allows you to check or change the recipient
5 selected.
For more information on the [Edit Recipient] screen, refer to "5 Scan" in the User Guide.
Close Menu
Deselect the selected item.
Message
Enter body message of an Internet fax with the keyboard displayed.
Resend Attempts
Set whether or not to try sending again if a transmission fails. If you select [On], set the
number of resend attempts and interval.
z
Resend Attempts
Set the transmission retry count from 1 to 5.
z Resend Interval
Set the transmission retry interval from 30 to 300 seconds.
Address Book
You can specify the recipients from the Address Book. The address specified appears in
[Name/E-mail] in the [Send E-mail] screen.
236
Setup
New Recipient
Specify a new address. The address specified appears in [Name/E-mail] in the [Send E-mail]
screen.
Name/E-mail Address
Displays the recipient name or e-mail address specified.
Subject
Enter a subject using the keyboard displayed.
Delete Recipient
Deletes all information for the selected recipient information.
Edit
Displays the [Edit Recipient] screen, which allows you to check or change the recipient
selected.
For more information on the [Edit Recipient] screen, refer to "5 Scan" in the User Guide.
File Format
Select an output file format.
For more information on the [File Format] screen, refer to "5 Scan" in the User Guide.
Resend Attempts
Set whether or not to try sending again if a transmission fails. If you select [On], set the
Tools
number of resend attempts and interval.
z
Resend Attempts
Set the transmission retry count from 1 to 5.
z
Resend Interval
5
Set the transmission retry interval from 30 to 300 seconds.
Encryption
Set whether or not to encrypt the e-mail transmission.
Note • To encrypt e-mail transmission, the configuration of S/MIME is required.
• To encrypt e-mail transmission, a certificate is required.
• To enable encryption, select [On] before specifying an address. [On] will be disabled after an
address is specified.
Digital Signature
Select whether or not to add digital signature.
Note • To add digital signature, the configuration of S/MIME is required.
• To add digital signature, a certificate is required.
Transfer via FTP (1), Transfer via FTP (2) (ApeosPort Series Models Only)
Specify where FTP forwarding is to be stored.
[Transfer via FTP (2)] will be displayed when [Transfer via FTP (1)] is configured.
Address Book
When the server address is registered on the Address Book, you can specify the address
from the Address Book. The specified address appears in the [Transfer via FTP (1)] or
[Transfer via FTP (2)] screen.
For more information on the Address Book, refer to "Add Address Book Entry" (P.240).
File Format
Specify an output file format.
For more information on the [File Format] screen, refer to "5 Scan" in the User Guide.
Resend Attempts
Set whether or not to try sending again if a transmission fails. If you select [On], set the
number of resend attempts and interval.
237
5 Tools
z Resend Attempts
Set the transmission retry count from 1 to 5.
z Resend Interval
Set the transmission retry interval from 30 to 300 seconds.
Transfer via SMB (1), Transfer via SMB (2) (ApeosPort Series Models Only)
Specify where SMB forwarding is to be stored.
[Transfer via SMB (2)] will be displayed when [Transfer via SMB (1)] is configured.
Address Book
When the server address is registered on the Address Book, you can specify the address
Tools
from the Address Book. The specified address appears in the [Transfer via SMB (1)] or
[Transfer via SMB (2)] screen.
For more information on the Address Book, refer to "Add Address Book Entry" (P.240).
5 File Format
Specify an output file format.
For more information on the [File Format] screen, refer to "5 Scan" in the User Guide.
Resend Attempts
Set whether or not to try sending again if a transmission fails. If you select [On], set the
number of resend attempts and interval.
z Resend Attempts
Set the transmission retry count from 1 to 5.
z
Resend Interval
Set the transmission retry interval from 30 to 300 seconds.
Name, Server, Shared Name, Save in, User Name, and Password
Select [Name], [Server], [Shared Name], [Save in], [User Name], or [Password] to display an
input screen.
The numbers of characters you can input are as follows:
z Name: Up to 36 single-byte characters
z Server: Up to 64 single-byte characters
z
Shared Name: Up to 64 single-byte characters
z Save in: Up to 128 single-byte characters
z
User Name:
For domain users: up to 97 characters with the format of “user name@domain name” or
“domain name\user name”
(user name and domain name must be up to 32 and 64 single-byte characters)
For local users: up to 32 single-byte characters
z Password: Up to 32 single-byte characters
Print
Configure print settings. When [On] is selected, you can configure the settings for the Print
feature.
238
Setup
Print Quantity
Set the number of copy sets from 1 to 999 in 1 set increments.
Paper Supply
Select a paper tray for printing. When [Auto Select] is selected, the same paper size as the
document size is used.
z
Auto Select
A suitable paper tray is automatically selected.
z Trays 1 and 2 to 4 (optional)
Select paper from four trays.
z
Bypass
Prints on paper loaded in Tray 5.
2 Sided Printing
Set the 2 sided printing option.
Staple
Configure the stapling.
z Off
Set the output destination.
z
1 Staple
Set the stapling position to top left.
Tools
z
1 Staple
Set the stapling position to bottom right.
E-mail Notification
5
You can receive an e-mail notification when a file is saved in a folder or a job flow ends.
Name/E-mail Address
Set the recipient of the e-mail notification.
Message
Enter a message that is displayed in the e-mail message body.
When to Notify
Select the e-mail notification timing from [When file is stored] and [At the end of Job Flow].
Delete
Deletes all information for the selected recipient.
Edit
Allows you to check or change the recipient selected.
For more information on the [Edit Recipient] screen, refer to "5 Scan" in the User Guide.
Close Menu
Deselects the selected item.
Edit/Delete
You can check the content of a job flow sheet, and edit, copy, or delete it.
Note • Some operations may be restricted according to types of job flow owners, authentication
settings, and user types. For more information, refer to "Authentication for Job Flow Sheets
and Folders" (P.365).
Delete
Deletes the selected job flow sheet.
Copy
Creates a duplicate of the selected job flow sheet. You can create a new job flow sheet based
on the duplicate.
239
5 Tools
The procedure of creation is the same as creation of a new job flow sheet. For more information, refer to
"Create New Job Flow Sheet" (P.235).
Edit
You can edit the selected job flow sheet.
The procedure of change is the same as creation of a new job flow sheet. For more information, refer to
"Create New Job Flow Sheet" (P.235).
When an address is registered, you can search for it with [Address Book] on the [Fax],
[Internet Fax], and [E-mail] screens.
5 You can store a total of 2000 addresses for Fax, Internet Fax, E-mail, and Server (FTP/
SMB).
Important • The following address types can be selected when you add an address to Address Book:
Fax, Internet Fax, E-mail, and Server (FTP/SMB)
When you register an address on the Address Book, select an address type in accordance
with the service. The address book entry registered with the wrong address type cannot be
selected from the original service.
Note • To specify an e-mail address or a server address for the Scan services, use the Address
Book. The speed dial with the numeric keypad, and the group address created using the
Group Recipients feature cannot be used to specify such addresses.
• You can register, edit, delete, or view the Address Book from CentreWare Internet Services.
For more information, refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
240
Setup
Tools
5
6 When the settings are completed, select [Save].
241
5 Tools
Address Type
Allows you to change an address type.
Tools
E-mail Address
Enter an e-mail address with up to 128 single-byte characters.
5 For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.32).
Name
Enter a recipient name with up to 18 single-byte characters.
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.32).
Surname
Enter a recipient surname with up to 32 single-byte characters.
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.32).
Given Name
Enter a recipient given name with up to 32 single-byte characters.
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.32).
Telephone Number
Enter a recipient telephone number with up to 32 single-byte characters.
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.32).
Office
Enter a recipient office with up to 32 single-byte characters.
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.32).
Department
Enter a recipient department with up to 32 single-byte characters.
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.32).
242
Setup
Transfer Protocol
Set the transfer protocol. You can select either [FTP] or [SMB].
Tools
Important • If the “/” mark is used at the top of a shared name, a job flow cannot read the shared name
correctly. Do not use the “/” mark at the top of a shared name.
Save in
5
Enter the directory for storing files. When SMB is selected, use a UNC format.
z Transferring via FTP
For example: aaa/bbb
When you save files in the bbb directory under the aaa directory in the root directory.
z Transferring via SMB
For example: aaa\bbb
When you save files in the bbb directory under the aaa directory in a specified volume.
User Name
Set the user name when a user name is required to be input by the forwarding destination
server.
When [FTP] is selected for [Transfer Protocol], up to 97 characters are allowed.
When [SMB] is selected for [Transfer Protocol], use one of the following formats:
z For Active Directory:
User name@Domain name (User name: up to 32 characters / Domain name: up to 64
characters)
For example: fuji@example.com ("fuji" is a user name and "example.com" is a domain name)
z For Windows NT domains:
Domain name\User name (Domain name: up to 64 characters / User name: up to 32
characters)
For example: example\fuji ("example" is a domain name and "fuji" is a user name)
z For workgroups:
Local user (up to 32 characters)
For example: Fuji-Taro
Password
Set a password when the forwarding destination server prompts a password entry. You can
enter up to 32 single-byte characters for a password.
243
5 Tools
Port Number
Set the forwarding destination port number. Specify a number from 1 to 65535.
Fax Number
Enter a fax number with up to 128 digits.
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.32).
Index
You can register a single alphanumeric index character for use as a keyword to search with
the Address Book.
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.32).
Starting Rate
Set a communications mode. You can select either [G3 Auto] or [Forced 4800 bps].
When the destination is specified by a speed dial number with the communications mode set,
you cannot change the communications mode in the [Fax / Internet Fax] screen.
Resolution
Set image quality for transmission.
Tools
Select from [Panel] (image quality selected on the control panel), [Standard (200x100 dpi)],
[Fine (200 dpi)], [Superfine (400 dpi)], and [Superfine (600 dpi)].
5 Cover Page
Select whether or not to send a fax or an Internet fax with a cover note attached. If attached,
specify comments on the sender and a recipient to be printed in the cover pages.
Comments must be registered in advance.
For information on comment registration, refer to "Add Fax Comment" (P.247).
244
Setup
Delay Start
Set whether or not to use a delayed start transmission.
If the machine's system clock is set to the 24-hour display, [AM] and [PM] do not appear. For
information on the system clock, refer to "Time" (P.138).
Remote Folder
Select whether or not to send a fax or an Internet fax to a recipient's folder. To use folder
communications, you must obtain the recipient's folder number and passcode in advance.
1 Select [On].
2 Enter a recipient's folder number with the
numeric keypad.
3 If a passcode is set, enter the passcode with
the numeric keypad.
Note • If no passcode is set, leave the text boxes
blank and select [Save].
F Code
Select whether or not to use F code communications.
Tools
F Code is the transmission procedure set by the Communications and Information Network
Association of Japan and is the T.30 (communication protocol) method for using sub-
addresses that are standardized by the ITU-T.
For F code (sub address) and password, you can use up to 20 digits 0 to 9, ∗, and #. 5
1 Select [On].
2 Enter the F code with the numeric keypad.
Note • The F code consists of “0” + folder
number. For example, if the folder
number is 123, the F code will be “0123”.
3 Enter the password as required with the
numeric keypad, and then select [Save].
Note • You can enter up to 20 digits for the
password.
Relay Broadcast
Set the instruction given to a relay station, which is used when the machine is a base station
and the registered speed dial is a relay station for relay broadcast.
When selecting [On], set [Relay Station ID], [Print at Relay Station], and [Broadcast
Recipients].
1 Select [On].
2 Enter a 2-digit relay station ID with the
numeric keypad.
Note • The relay station ID is the address
number for the base station (the machine)
already registered on the relay station.
3 Select [Speed Dial 001<->099].
4 Enter a speed dial number of broadcast
destination (001 to 099) or group number (#01 to #09) registered on the relay station
with the numeric keypad, and then select [Add].
Note • If there are more than one broadcast destinations, repeat step 4.
245
5 Tools
5 To print a document also at the relay station, under select [On] for [Print at Relay
Station].
6 Select [Save].
1 Select one of [Billing - Day Time], [Billing - Night Time], and [Billing - Midnight].
2 Select [Billing].
3 Enter the time for one unit charge from 0.1 to
255.9 seconds in 0.1 second increments
Tools
TIFF-S
The Internet fax standard profile. For documents larger than A4, the size is automatically
reduced to A4 when transmission.
TIFF-F
Select this profile when you specify [Superfine] for [Resolution].
TIFF-J
Select this profile for sending documents in JBIG.
246
Setup
• You can use wildcards for specifying the numbers in the last one or two digits as shown in
the following example:
- 001∗: Specifies the 10 addresses with address numbers 0010 to 0019.
- ∗∗∗∗ : Specifies all address numbers.
Tools
4 Enter a speed dial number (four digits) to
register with the numeric keypad, and then
select [Add to this Group].
5
247
5 Tools
Accounting
In [Accounting], you can register the users that will use the machine, and set the
operation settings of the Accounting feature.
For more information about this feature, refer to "Authentication and Accounting Features" (P.351).
The following shows the reference section for each setting.
Create / View User Accounts....................................................................................................248
View Account ...........................................................................................................................251
Reset User Accounts .................................................................................................................251
System Administrator's Meter (Copy Jobs) ..............................................................................252
Accounting Type.......................................................................................................................252
Accounting Login Screen Settings............................................................................................253
Fax Billing Data ........................................................................................................................254
Accounting / Billing Device Settings........................................................................................255
248
Accounting
User ID
Enter a user ID to use the machine. Up to 32 single-byte characters are allowed.
User Name
Set a user name. Up to 32 single-byte characters are allowed.
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.32).
Passcode
Set a passcode. Setting a passcode is strongly recommended for security. Set a passcode
from 4 to 12 digits.
Note • When [Passcode Entry from Control Panel] is set to [On], a passcode entry is required upon
user authentication.
Tools
For information on how to change your passcode later, refer to "Changing Passcode" (P.386).
E-mail Address
Enter an e-mail address with up to 128 characters. The address set here will be set as [From]
5
under [E-mail].
For information about how to enter characters, refer to "Entering Text" (P.32).
Account Limit
You can place restrictions on the use and the maximum number of allowed pages for each of
the Copy, Fax, Scan, and Print features.
3 To set account limits, select [Change Account Limit], and then enter the maximum
number of pages with the numeric keypad.
Feature Access
Set access restrictions on features.
z Free Access
The feature is not restricted.
z
No Access to Copy/Fax/Scan/Print Service
Allows you to restrict the use of the Copy, Fax, Scan, or Print service.
249
5 Tools
z The following limits can be placed on the Copy service for each user:
Permission to use: [Free Access], [Black & White Only], [Color Only], or [No Access to Copy
Service]
Maximum number of color pages allowed: 1 to 9,999,999
Maximum number of black-and-white pages allowed: 1 to 9,999,999
z The following limits can be placed on the Fax service for each user:
Permission to use: [Free Access] or [No Access to Fax Service]
z The following limits can be placed on the Scan service for each user:
Permission to use: [Free Access], [Black & White Only], [Color Only], or [No Access to Scan
Service]
Maximum number of color pages allowed: 1 to 9,999,999
Maximum number of black-and-white pages allowed: 1 to 9,999,999
z
The following limits can be placed on the Print service for each user:
Permission to use: [Free Access], [Black & White Only], or [No Access to Print Service]
Maximum number of color pages allowed: 1 to 9,999,999
Maximum number of black-and-white pages allowed: 1 to 9,999,999
z The following limits can be placed on the Fax service for each user:
Permission to use: [Free Access] or [No Access to Fax Service]
z The following limits can be placed on the Scan service for each user:
Permission to use: [Free Access], [Black & White Only], [Color Only], or [No Access to Scan
Service]
Tools
User Role
User Role
Allows you to select a user role for a user.
z User
No special authority is given to this user role.
z System Administrator
The same authority as a system administrator is given except for the following operation:
- Operate folders
- Operate job flow sheets
- Change the passcode of the system administrator
z Account Administrator
The following authorities are given:
- Create, delete, change (except for passcode), and view (unavailable depending on some
settings) user information
- Create, delete, change, and view accounting
- Change an Alternative Name for Account ID or Mask Account ID
- Print an Auditron Report for each user
Reset Account
Deletes all registered information for a selected user.
Reset
Deletes the registered user data. Once deleted, the data cannot be restored.
Important • All job flow sheets, folders, and files within folders belonging to the user are deleted. If the
user is owner of a large amount of material (when a large quantity of files is left remaining
within a folder for example), the deletion will take a considerable time.
250
Accounting
Cancel
Cancels the deletion of the user data.
Reset
Resets the current cumulative number of pages for users. Once reset, the previous count
cannot be restored.
Cancel
Cancels resetting the cumulative number of pages.
View Account
Selecting [Xerox Standard Accounting] on the [Accounting Type] screen allows you to
check the following for each registered user or group: (1) the maximum number of times
that the account can be used for each service, and (2) how many times the account has
been used for each service.
Note • You can register users and groups on CentreWare Internet Services. For more information,
refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
Tools
• This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
1) Click [View Accounts].
2) Select [User Account] or [Group Account]. If you select [User Account], select also 5
the User ID to check.
Click [Account Details].
Total Impressions
Resets all accounting data for all users including the system administrator. The number of
pages is also reset to 0.
251
5 Tools
Reset
Deletes or resets the data for the selected item.
You can check or reset the total impression copied using the System Administration
mode on the screen.
The total impressions are counted up to 9,999,999 pages.
5 Note • This item does not appear when [Network Accounting] is selected in [Accounting Type].
Accounting Type
You can select whether or not to use the Accounting feature.
Accounting Disabled
Does not perform accounting.
Local Accounting
Performs accounting.
Network Accounting
Performs accounting based on the user information managed on a remote service. User
information is registered on the remote service.
Note • When [Network Accounting] is selected, users are prompted to enter their Account ID on the
[Login] screen that is displayed when attempting to use services required for accounting.
For more information on Network Accounting, refer to "Types of Account Administration" (P.357).
252
Accounting
Auditron Mode
Allows you to set whether or not to enable the Auditron feature for the following services:
z Copy z Fax / Internet Fax z Store to Folder
z
E-mail z
Network Scanning z
Scan to PC
z
Store to USB z
Store & Send Link z
Media Print - Text
z Media Print - Photos z Print
Note • The services displayed on the screen vary depending on the machine configuration.
• When [Enable Accounting] is selected for a service, [ ] is displayed on the button of the
applicable service on the [Services Home] screen. Also, [ : Requires Login] is displayed at
the lower left of the [Services Home] screen. [ ] and [ : Requires Login] are not displayed
after authentication.
• Print jobs may be canceled depending on the settings in "Receive Control" (P.262).
Tools
Allows you to set the type of user information used for authentication.
Note • Account ID is used for accounting.
z
Display User ID & Account ID Prompts 5
Prompts users to enter both their user ID and Account ID.
z Display User ID Prompt Only
Prompts users to enter their user ID only.
z Display Account ID Prompt Only
Prompts users to enter their Account ID only.
z Display No Prompts
Does not prompt users to enter their user ID or Account ID.
Show
As you enter the user ID, the characters are echoed on the screen in the normal way.
Hide
As you enter the user ID, the character string is hidden as a row of asterisks (∗∗∗∗∗).
253
5 Tools
Show
As you enter the Account ID, the characters are echoed on the screen in the normal way.
Hide
As you enter the Account ID, the character string is hidden as a row of asterisks (∗∗∗∗∗).
Note • This item is displayed when [Network Accounting] is selected in [Accounting Type].
• NVM stands for nonvolatile memory and the data on it is stable after the machine is turned
5 off.
254
Accounting
Tools
[None] or [Connected].
Note • While a device for maintenance is connected, you cannot change the setting.
Interrupt Mode
The feature is effective for the Copy service.
Select whether or not to enable the Interrupt mode. Select from [Disabled] and [Enabled].
This feature is available for accounting / billing devices other than Card Activated -
Cumulative and Smart Card Reader.
255
5 Tools
256
Authentication / Security Settings
Tools
In [System Administrator Settings], you can set the system administrator ID and
passcode.
We recommend setting the system administrator ID and passcode to prevent 5
unauthorized setting changes and ensure security.
257
5 Tools
Authentication
In [Authentication], you can set the following items.
The following shows the reference section for each setting.
Tools
Login Type................................................................................................................................258
Access Control ..........................................................................................................................258
Create / View User Accounts....................................................................................................260
5 Reset User Accounts .................................................................................................................260
Create Authorization Groups ....................................................................................................260
User Details Setup.....................................................................................................................260
Maximum Login Attempts by System Administrator...............................................................262
Passcode Policy.........................................................................................................................262
Charge/Private Print Settings ....................................................................................................262
Login Type
Allows you to select a type of authentication.
No Login Required
Does not use the Authentication feature.
Access Control
Allows you to restrict access to the machine or each service. Once the access control
is enabled, user authentication is required to use the machine or the services.
Important • When a user is authenticated by a remote authentication server (except ApeosWare
Authentication Management or ApeosWare Authentication Agent), the authenticated user
can access the services through the control panel based on the permission information
obtained from the remote server.
258
Authentication / Security Settings
• When a guest user is permitted to use the machine, access restriction for each service
cannot be specified for the guest user. If you want to restrict a guest user to use the
machine, refer to "Guest User" (P.261).
Device Access
Allows you to restrict buttons operation on the control panel of the machine.
Select [Unlocked] or [Locked].
Service Access
Allows you to restrict access to each of the following services.
Note • When [Locked (Show Icon)] is selected for a service, [ ] is displayed on the button of the
applicable service on the [Services Home] screen. Also, [ : Requires Login] is displayed at
the lower left of the [Services Home] screen. [ ] and [ : Requires Login] are not displayed
after authentication.
• When [Locked (Hide Icon)] is selected for a service, the applicable service is not displayed
on the [Services Home] screen. The services is displayed after authentication.
For more information on how to set the login type, refer to "Login Type" (P.258).
z Copy
Restricts access to the Copy service on the machine.
If a stored programming contains steps to use the Copy service, the use of the store
programming is also restricted.
z Fax / Internet Fax
Tools
Restricts access to the Fax / Internet Fax/Direct Fax service on the machine.
If a stored programming contains steps to use the Fax / Internet Fax service, the use of the
store programming is also restricted.
z
Scan
Restricts access to the E-mail, Store to Folder, Scan to PC, Store to USB, Store & Send Link,
5
and Network Scanning services and features on the machine.
If a stored programming contains steps to use the Scan services, the use of the store
programming is also restricted.
Note • To use the Store & Send Link feature, an optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
z Media Print - Text
Restricts access to the Media Print - Text service on the machine.
z Media Print - Photos
Restricts access to the Media Print - Photos service on the machine.
z
Send from Folder
Restricts access to the Send from Folder service on the machine.
z
Stored Programming
Restricts access to the Stored Programming service on the machine.
z Job Flow Sheets
Restricts access to the Job Flow Sheets service on the machine.
z Web Applications (ApeosPort Series Models Only)
Restricts access to the Web Applications service on the machine.
z Custom Services
Restricts access to custom services on the machine.
Note • This feature is for service representative use. For more information, contact our Customer
Support Center.
z Print
Restricts users to print jobs stored on the machine, such as the Secure Print and Sample Set
jobs.
This feature also restricts the submission of print jobs from a computer via a network.
To use the Authentication feature, authentication information such as a user ID and passcode
needs to be entered in a print driver.
If authentication fails, the print data sent to the machine is saved in the machine or deleted
according to the Charge Print settings.
259
5 Tools
Feature Access
Set [Color Copying], [Print Files from Folder], and [Retrieve Files from Folder].
System administrators can give login users authority to use some features that are
restricted for login users. The login users can be divided into different authorization
groups.
5 Note • Up to 20 groups can be registered.
Group Name
Enter a group name with up to 32 single-byte characters.
260
Authentication / Security Settings
Tools
authentication is performed with case ignored even if the User ID has both upper and lower
cases.
Important • Do not change the setting while a file is stored for the Private Charge Print. Otherwise, you
may encounter problems, such as being unable to print. Change the setting after the 5
machine prints all the files stored.
Guest User
Set whether or not to permit a guest user when [Login to Remote Accounts] is selected. Set
the guest user passcode from 4 to 12 digits.
261
5 Tools
Passcode Policy
Passcode Entry from Control Panel
You can set whether a passcode is required when the system administrator or a user uses
the machine. Selecting [On] enables [System Administrator's Passcode] setting and
[Passcode] setting for [Create / View User Accounts].
Selecting [Off] does not require the passcode, even if a passcode is set in the above settings.
Tools
Important • The setting of [Passcode Entry from Control Panel] is used for authentication on the
machine. A passcode must always be entered when accessing from remote devices using
5 CentreWare Internet Services or the like, regardless of the use of passcode setting.
Depending on authentication procedures, a passcode may be required for other processes
as well.
Note • The system administrator's passcode is also required when you change settings from
CentreWare Internet Services.
Receive Control
You can set how received print jobs should be handled.
For information about printing from a print driver, refer to "12 Computer Operations" in the User Guide.
262
Authentication / Security Settings
For information about printing or deleting the print job saved, refer to "11 Job Status" > "Printing and
Deleting Stored Jobs" > "Private Charge Print" in the User Guide, and about deleting a Private Charge
Print job with an invalid User ID, refer to "Deleting a Private Charge Print Job with an Invalid User ID"
(P.94).
Tools
Access] is set to [Unlocked], the settings specified in the print driver are applied.
When [According to Print Auditron] is selected, [Job Login Success], [Job Login Failure], and
[Job without User ID] are displayed.
5
z
Job Login Success
Set the processing to apply to successfully authenticated jobs.
- To print jobs, select [Print Job].
- To save jobs as Private Charge Print, select [Save as Private Charge Print Job].
Note • When [Save as Private Charge Print Job] is selected, the Secure Print, Sample Set, Store in
Remote Folder, and Delayed Print settings specified in the print driver will be ignored.
z Job Login Failure
Set the processing to apply to jobs authentication failed (whose information such as the user
ID and passcode has been incorrectly registered on the print driver).
- To save jobs as Private Charge Print, select [Save as Charge Print Job].
- To delete jobs, select [Delete Job].
z Job without User ID
Set the processing to apply to jobs with no authentication user ID attached (such as print jobs
sent from CentreWare Internet Services or e-mail print).
- To print jobs, select [Print Job].
- To save jobs as Charge Print, select [Save as Charge Print Job].
- To delete jobs, select [Delete Job].
Note • [Job without User ID] is automatically changed to [Print Job] on the machine when you select
as follows on CentreWare Internet Services: [Properties] > [Security] > [Authentication
Configuration] > [Non-Account Print]. When [Job without User ID] is set to [Save as Charge
Print Job] or [Delete Job], the [Non-account Print] check box on CentreWare Internet
Services is deselected automatically.
263
5 Tools
details on how to specify an expiration date, refer to "Stored File Settings" (P.223). For
details on how to delete the print jobs manually, refer to "Deleting a Private Charge Print Job
with an Invalid User ID" (P.94).
Note • When [Save as Private Charge Print Job] is selected, the Secure Print, Sample Set, Store in
Remote Folder, and Delayed Print settings specified in the print driver will be ignored.
When [Save as Private Charge Print Job] is selected, [Job without User ID] is displayed.
z Job without User ID
Set how to process the e-mail print jobs with no user ID attached.
- To print jobs, select [Print Job].
- To save jobs as Charge Print, select [Save as Charge Print Job].
- To delete jobs, select [Delete Job].
Note • [Job without User ID] is automatically changed to [Print Job] on the machine when you select
as follows on CentreWare Internet Services: [Properties] > [Security] > [Authentication
Configuration] > [Non-Account Print]. When [Job without User ID] is set to [Save as Charge
Print Job] or [Delete Job], the [Non-account Print] check box on CentreWare Internet
Services is deselected automatically.
not being successfully authenticated. To minimize the unnecessary print jobs, specify an
expiration date, so that they can be automatically deleted after a specified period of time. Or
the system administrator can manually delete them. For details on how to specify an
5 expiration date, refer to "Stored File Settings" (P.223). For details on how to delete the print
jobs manually, refer to "11 Job Status" > "Printing and Deleting Stored Jobs" > "Charge
Print" in the User Guide.
Note • When [Save as Charge Print Job] is selected, the Secure Print, Sample Set, Store in
Remote Folder, and Delayed Print settings specified in the print driver will be ignored.
264
Authentication / Security Settings
Tools
Overwrite Hard Disk
5
Select whether or not to conduct hard disk overwriting.
When copy, fax, scan, or print processing is completed, the data is deleted from the hard disk
and the area on which the deleted data was stored is automatically overwritten with blank
data. This feature prevents unauthorized retrieval or restoration of the data recorded on the
hard disk. It also applies to copy document and other information stored temporarily by the
system.
The following option can be configured.
Note • To perform the Overwrite Hard Disk feature, an optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Number of Overwrites
You can select the number of overwrites either once or three times.
Important • If the machine is turned off during the overwriting, unfinished files may remain on the hard
disk. The overwriting will resume if you turn the machine on again with the unfinished files
remaining on the hard disk.
• Overwriting once erases the data, but overwriting three times makes it even more definite
that the data cannot be restored. It does, however, take longer.
• During overwriting, normal operations may be slowed down.
Note • An optional component is required to use this feature. For more information, contact our
Customer Support Center.
For more information on how to check the status during overwriting, refer to "Overwrite Hard Disk"
(P.110).
265
5 Tools
z Change the system administrator's factory default passcode (x-admin). Register a new
passcode of 7 characters or more (maximum 12 characters). Be careful not to register a
passcode that can be easily assumed and not to store the registered passcode on a location
that is easily accessible to other persons.
Important • If the system administrator's user ID and passcode are forgotten, the machine configuration
will not be able to recover in case of malfunction.
z Set [Passcode Entry from Control Panel] to [On].
z Set [Maximum Login Attempts by System Administrator] to 5 times.
z Note that the hard disk security will not be warranted if you do not correctly follow the above
setting instructions.
For more information on how to set data encryption, refer to "Data Encryption" (P.158).
For more information on how to set service representative restricted operation, refer to "Service Rep.
Restricted Operation" (P.159).
For more information on how to set passcode entry from control panel, refer to "Passcode Policy"
(P.262).
For more information on how to set the system administrator's user ID, refer to "System Administrator's
Login ID" (P.257).
The manager (of the organization that this machine is used for) must follow the instructions
below:
Tools
z Assign an appropriate person as a system administrator and manage and train the person
properly.
5 When turning off the machine, make sure no operation is running. Train the users to turn off
z
266
6 CentreWare Internet
Services Settings
CentreWare Internet Services provides services such as displaying the status of the
machine and jobs, and altering configurations using a web browser in a TCP/IP
environment.
Preparations
Prepare a computer supporting the TCP/IP protocol to use CentreWare Internet
CentreWare Internet Services Settings
Services.
CentreWare Internet Services supports the following browsers:
For Windows 7
z Microsoft Internet Explorer 8.0
For Windows XP
z Mozilla Firefox 3.0
z Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 Service Pack 2
268
Installation of CentreWare Internet Services
2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's
passcode, and then select [Enter].
Note • The default user ID is "11111".
• The default passcode is "x-admin".
6 After the machine reboots, you can print out a configuration report to confirm that the
port for CentreWare Internet Services is enabled and TCP/IP is set up correctly.
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.101).
7 Start CentreWare Internet Services to confirm whether the service is available or not.
For information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Starting CentreWare Internet
Services" (P.270).
269
6 CentreWare Internet Services Settings
z
Example of the Internet address entry (when the machine's Internet address is
myhost.example.com)
http://myhost.example.com/
6
Note • If your network uses DNS (Domain Name System) and the machine's host name is
registered on the domain name server, you can access the machine using the Internet
address combining the host name and the domain name. For example, if the host name is
"myhost", and the domain name is "example.com" then the Internet address is
"myhost.example.com".
• When specifying a port number, add ":" and the port number after the Internet address.
• If using the Authentication feature on the machine, enter a user ID and passcode in the
[User Name] and [Password] fields. If you are not sure about the user ID and passcode,
consult your system administrator.
The features you can operate vary depending on the system administrator's authority that
was given to a user.
• If communications are encrypted; when the [Enabled] check box is selected under [Security]
> [SSL / TLS Settings] > [HTTP-SSL / TLS Communication] on the [Properties] tab, you
must specify an address that starts with "https" instead of "http" to access CentreWare
Internet Services.
Example of the IP address entry
https://192.168.1.1/ (IPv4)
http://[2001:DB8::1234] (IPv6)
Example of the Internet address entry
https://myhost.example.com/
If CentreWare Internet Services is not displayed, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Problems"
(P.424).
270
Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services
CentreWare Internet Services enables you to change various settings on the machine
from a computer.
Note • Confirm that the port in use is enabled in [Properties] tab > [Connectivity] > [Port Settings] of
CentreWare Internet Services when an item that you want to set is not displayed.
• If you change a setting from CentreWare Internet Services while the control panel is being
used, the change does not take effect until you manually reboot the machine. If [Auto Clear]
271
6 CentreWare Internet Services Settings
272
Configuring Machine Settings Using CentreWare Internet Services
273
6 CentreWare Internet Services Settings
6 Certificate Revocation
delete, and export of the certificate.
Refer to "Certificate Revocation Retrieval
Retrieval Settings Settings" (P.190).
IEEE 802.1x Refer to "IEEE 802.1x Settings" (P.190).
SSL / TLS Settings Refer to "SSL / TLS Settings" (P.187).
S/MIME Settings Refer to "S/MIME Settings (ApeosPort
Series Models Only)" (P.188).
PDF / DocuWorks / Select from [Properties] Refer to "PDF / DocuWorks / XPS
XPS Security Settings tab > [Security] Signature Settings (ApeosPort Series
Models Only)" (P.189).
Watermark Refer to "Watermark" (P.151).
Force Annotation Refer to "Force Annotation" (P.153).
Job Status Default Allows you to configure the display/hide
settings for completed and active jobs.
Service Representative Allows you to restrict the operation of
Restricted Operation service representatives. Prevents the
machine from being altered by someone
impersonating our service
representative.
System Administrator Refer to "System Administrator Settings"
Settings (P.257).
IC Card Settings Allows you to configure the smart card
settings and backup the settings.
274
7 Printer Environment Settings
This chapter describes the settings to use the Print feature on the machine.
z Print Overview ..........................................................................................276
z Installation When Using USB Port ............................................................279
z Installation When Using TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100) ....................................281
z Installation When Using NetWare.............................................................284
z
Installation When Using Microsoft Network (SMB) ...................................287
z Installation When Using Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) ..........................289
z
Installation When Using EtherTalk............................................................291
7 Printer Environment Settings
Print Overview
This machine can be set up as a local printer by directly connecting the machine to a
computer using a USB interface cable. Similarly, it can be set up as a network printer
by connecting the machine to a network.
Enable the necessary port using the control panel or CentreWare Internet Services.
Via Internet
IPP Local connection
USB
Network connection
LPD/ SMB/ Port9100/ EtherTalk
Printer Environment Settings
Network connection
Netware/ Windows shared printer
Note • The print drivers are contained in the Driver CD Kit. For information on the driver installation
procedures, refer to the manual contained in the Driver CD Kit.
• You can download the latest print driver from our web site.
LPD
Use LPD when direct communication between the machine and a computer via TCP/
IP is available.
For more information on how to set up the machine using LPD, refer to "Installation When Using TCP/
IP (LPD/Port 9100)" (P.281).
NetWare
The machine supports the PServer mode using Netware directory service and bindery
service. The PServer mode enables the machine to function as a printer server, and to
retrieve print jobs in the print queue to output. The printer created for the machine
consumes one user license of the file server.
Note • The machine does not support Remote Printer (RPrinter) mode.
• You can use the machine as a printer in a NDPS environment by using a Novell NDPS
Gateway. To use the machine as a printer in a NDPS environment, you need to have the
machine operating in a NetWare print environment beforehand, or enable LPD in advance
and set it as a gateway destination in a Novell NDPS Gateway setup. Attributes, however,
that can be set or obtained by NDPS are not supported.
276
Print Overview
z Supported interfaces
- 1000BASE-T
- 100BASE-TX
- 10BASE-T
z
Supported frame types
- Ethernet II specification
- IEEE802.3 specification
- IEEE802.3 / IEEE802.2 specification
- IEEE802.3 / IEEE802.2 / SNAP specification
Note • The machine sends out packets of each frame type on the network, and will initialize for the
same frame type as that of the first reply packet received. The frame type can also be fixed.
If, however, there are multiple protocols running on the same network, use Ethernet II
specification.
• Some network equipment, such as hubs, may not be compatible with the automatic frame
type detection. If a data link indicator corresponding to the port of the network equipment
SMB
Use SMB to print using Microsoft Network.
For more information on how to set up the machine using SMB, refer to "Installation When Using
Microsoft Network (SMB)" (P.287).
IPP
Use IPP to print via the Internet. 7
For more information on how to set up the machine using IPP, refer to "Installation When Using Internet
Printing Protocol (IPP)" (P.289).
Port 9100
Use Port9100 when the machine uses Port9100.
For more information on how to set up the machine using Port 9100, refer to "Installation When Using
TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100)" (P.281).
EtherTalk
Use EtherTalk when you print from a Macintosh computer. The Adobe PostScript 3 Kit
(optional) is required.
Note • The Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) is required.
For more information on how to set up the machine using EtherTalk, refer to "Installation When Using
EtherTalk" (P.291).
277
7 Printer Environment Settings
Port Ether
Port USB LPD NetWare SMB IPP Bonjour
9100 Talk
O Windows 2000 O O O O O O O O
S Windows XP O O O O O O O
Windows
O O O O O O O
Server 2003
Windows
O O O O O O O
Server 2008
Printer Environment Settings
Windows Vista O O O O O O O
Windows 7 O O O O O O O
UNIX O*1
Macintosh O*2,3 O*2,3 O O*5 O*4,5
*1: The Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) and a Unix filter are required to print
PostScript data.
*2: The Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) is required to use these ports. However, for
Mac OS X 10.5/10.6 English, you can use these ports without the Adobe
PostScript 3 Kit (optional) if you install the print driver for Mac OS X contained in
the Driver CD Kit.
7 *3: Supports Mac OS 9.2.2, and Mac OS X 10.3.9/10.4.10/10.5.
*4: The Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) is required to use the port. However, for Mac
OS X 10.4.11 or later, you can use the port without the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit
(optional).
*5: The Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) is required.
For information on network environments, refer to the manual contained in the Driver CD Kit.
278
Installation When Using USB Port
This section describes how to install the machine using a USB interface.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Preparations................................................................................................................... 279
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine ...................................................................................... 279
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer .................................................................................... 280
CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items ............................................................................ 280
Step 1 Preparations
The following items are required to connect the machine to a computer via a USB
interface.
279
7 Printer Environment Settings
To print from the machine, you need to install a print driver on your computer.
For information on the supported operating systems, refer to "Supported Operating Systems" (P.278).
For information on the driver installation procedures, refer to the manual contained in the Driver CD
Kit.
You can print via USB from a Macintosh computer for Mac OS X 10.5/10.6.
For information on the installation procedures of the print driver for Mac OS X, refer to the manual
contained in the CD-ROM provided with the driver.
For information on the installation procedures of Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional), refer to the manual
contained in the CD-ROM provided with the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional).
280
Installation When Using TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100)
Step 1 Preparations
The following items are required to use the machine via TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100).
z TCP/IP network environment
281
7 Printer Environment Settings
4 If the operating system on the client is Mac OS X 10.3.9 or later, enable the Bonjour
port, and the Discovery feature that automatically detects printers on the IP network
can be enabled.
Note • The Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) is required to use the port. However, for Mac OS X
Printer Environment Settings
10.4.11 or later, you can use the port without the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional).
• To print from a printer detected by Bonjour, the LPD port must be enabled in advance.
7 6 Select [Close].
Note • Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message
displayed on the screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
7 Print a configuration report to confirm that the LPD port is enabled and that TCP/IP is
set up correctly.
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.101).
282
Installation When Using TCP/IP (LPD/Port 9100)
283
7 Printer Environment Settings
Step 1 Preparations
The following items are required to set up the machine to use NetWare.
z NetWare server
Printer Environment Settings
Using IPX/SPX
284
Installation When Using NetWare
4 Select [Close].
Note • Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message
displayed on the screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
5 Print a configuration report to confirm that the NetWare port is enabled, and confirm
the NetWare device name and the network address.
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.101).
285
7 Printer Environment Settings
286
Installation When Using Microsoft Network (SMB)
This section describes how to install the machine using Microsoft Network (SMB).
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Preparations................................................................................................................... 287
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine ...................................................................................... 287
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer .................................................................................... 288
CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items ............................................................................ 288
Step 1 Preparations
The following items are required to set up the machine to use Microsoft Network (SMB).
z NetWare server
3) Select [Tools].
2 Enable the SMB port.
1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
2) Select [Port Settings].
3) Select [SMB], and then select [Change Settings].
4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].
5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].
6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
3 Set an IP address and the other addresses.
Skip this step if an IP address is already set.
If DHCP or BOOTP is available in your environment, configure the method for
287
7 Printer Environment Settings
For information on the SMB settings, refer to "CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items" (P.288).
288
Installation When Using Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)
This section describes how to install the machine using Internet Printing Protocol (IPP).
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Preparations................................................................................................................... 289
Step 2 Configuration on the Machine ...................................................................................... 289
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer .................................................................................... 290
CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items ............................................................................ 290
Note • If the size of print data sent via IPP is larger than the value set in the proxy server, the
machine cannot receive the data. In this case, set a larger value in the proxy server or
change your browser setting not to use the proxy server.
Step 1 Preparations
289
7 Printer Environment Settings
7
CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items
You can configure the following setting items using CentreWare Internet Services:
For details on the setting items, click [Help] at the upper right corner of the CentreWare Internet
Services screen to see help.
For information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Starting CentreWare Internet
Services" (P.270).
z
Spool Destination for Jobs
([Properties] > [General Setup] > [Memory Settings] > [IPP])
z
Port Settings
z Add Port Number
z TBCP Filter
Note • The TBCP filter can be configured when the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) is installed.
z
Administrator Mode
z
DNS
z Connection Time-Out
290
Installation When Using EtherTalk
Step 1 Preparations
The following items are required to set up the machine to use the EtherTalk interface.
z EtherTalk network environment
291
7 Printer Environment Settings
You can configure the following setting items using CentreWare Internet Services:
For details on the setting items, click [Help] at the upper right corner of the CentreWare Internet
Services screen to see help.
For information on how to start CentreWare Internet Services, refer to "Starting CentreWare Internet
Services" (P.270).
z Receiving buffer size for the AppleTalk interface
([Properties] > [General Setup] > [Memory Settings] > [EtherTalk])
z
Port Settings
z Printer Name
Zone Name
7
z
292
8 E-mail Environment Settings
This chapter describes the settings to use various services via e-mail on the
machine.
Note • This feature does not appear for some models. For such models, an optional
component is required. For more information, contact our Customer Support
Center.
z E-mail Overview........................................................................................294
z Preparations .............................................................................................296
z
Installation Procedures .............................................................................298
8 E-mail Environment Settings
E-mail Overview
E-mail
E-mail Environment Settings
Scanned documents can be converted into electronic form and transmitted via e-mail.
Print E-mail
You can send and transfer e-mails with files attached from computers. File formats that
can be attached to the e-mails are TIFF, PDF, JPEG (JFIF), XDW (DocuWorks
documents), XBD (DocuWorks binders), and XPS.
The message body of e-mail is processed according to the settings in [Incoming E-mail
Print Options] of CentreWare Internet Services.
294
E-mail Overview
295
8 E-mail Environment Settings
Preparations
Print E-mail
Store & Job
E-mail
Item Description E-mail Send Completion
via via Notification
Link Notice
SMTP POP3
Gateway
networks are connected by U U U U U U
address
gateways.
Machine e- Set the E-mail address of
mail address the machine.
O O O O O O
Required when the
addresses for a POP3
server and a SMTP server
DNS server are set with a domain name
U U U U U U
address format instead of their IP
addresses.
You can also acquire this
from DHCP.
8 SMTP server
The machine uses a SMTP
server to send e-mails. The
O O O U O O
address SMTP server can also be
used for receiving e-mails.
If an SMTP server requires
SMTP AUTH authentication, specify an
login name authentication user name. U U U U U U
and password Also specify a password as
required.
Set the POP3 server
POP3 server
address.
U U - O U U
296
Preparations
Print E-mail
Store & Job
E-mail
Item Description E-mail Send Completion
via via Notification
Link Notice
SMTP POP3
297
8 E-mail Environment Settings
Installation Procedures
This section describes how to configure the machine to use the E-mail service.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP ............................................................................298
Step 2 Configuring E-mail Environment ..................................................................................299
CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items .............................................................................300
298
Installation Procedures
5 Select [Close].
Note • Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message
displayed on the screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
6 Print a configuration report to confirm that the ports are enabled and that TCP/IP is set
up correctly.
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.101).
299
8 E-mail Environment Settings
300
9 Scanner Environment Settings
This chapter describes the settings to use the Scan services on the machine.
Note • To use the Store & Send Link feature, an optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
z
Scan Service Overview.............................................................................302
z Configuration of Store to Folder................................................................304
z
Configuration of Scan to PC .....................................................................306
z Configuration of Store to USB ..................................................................309
z Configuration of Network Scanning (Job Template Scanning) .................310
z Configuration of Scan to Home (ApeosPort Series Models Only) ............313
z Configuration of Job Flow Sheets.............................................................318
z
Configuration of Store & Send Link ..........................................................320
9 Scanner Environment Settings
E-mail
Scanned documents can be converted into electronic data and sent via e-mail.
Scanner Environment Settings
For information on e-mail environment settings, refer to "E-mail Environment Settings" (P.293).
Store to Folder
You can scan a document you want to retrieve as electronic data, and store it in a
folder. The document can be accessed later from any computers on the network.
For information on the Store to Folder service, refer to "Configuration of Store to Folder" (P.304).
Scan to PC
When the machine is connected to a network, you can store the scanned data on
network computers using the FTP or SMB protocol.
You can scan a document you want to retrieve as electronic data, and store it on a
9 computer connected to a network.
For information on the Scan to PC service, refer to "Configuration of Scan to PC" (P.306).
Store to USB
You can store the scanned data to a USB memory device when you insert the USB 2.0
memory device into the USB memory slot of the control panel of the machine. You can
also select data stored in the USB memory device and print the data directly.
For information on the Store to USB service settings, refer to "Configuration of Store to USB" (P.309).
302
Scan Service Overview
Scan to Home
When you select [Login to Remote Accounts] for [Login Type] and select [Enabled] for
[Scan to Home] using CentreWare Internet Services, you can forward scanned
documents to different recipients that corresponds to the login user.
For more information on configuration procedures, refer to "Configuration of Scan to Home (ApeosPort
Series Models Only)" (P.313).
303
9 Scanner Environment Settings
This section describes configuration procedures to use the Store to Folder service on
the machine.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP ............................................................................304
Step 2 Registering a Folder.......................................................................................................305
Step 3 Configuring a Computer ................................................................................................305
304
Configuration of Store to Folder
305
9 Scanner Environment Settings
Configuration of Scan to PC
This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Scan to PC service.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Preparations....................................................................................................................306
Step 2 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP ............................................................................307
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer .....................................................................................308
Step 1 Preparations
The following items are required to use the Scan to PC feature.
Using FTP
To transfer data via FTP, one of the following FTP servers and an account to the FTP
server (login name and password) are required.
z
Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Microsoft Windows Server 2008, Microsoft
Windows Server 2008 R2, Microsoft Windows Vista, or Microsoft Windows 7
Scanner Environment Settings
Using SMB
To transfer data via SMB, your computer must run on one of the following operating
systems that includes folder sharing.
For Mac OS X, a shared user account is required on the Mac OS X.
z Microsoft Windows 2000
z Microsoft Windows Server 2003
z
Microsoft Windows Server 2008
z
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
z
Microsoft Windows XP
z Microsoft Windows Vista
z Microsoft Windows 7
z Mac OS X 10.2.x/10.3.x/10.4.x/10.5/10.6
306
Configuration of Scan to PC
Using SMB
Enable the SMB port.
1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
2) Select [Port Settings].
3) Select [SMB], and then select [Change Settings].
4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].
5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].
6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
Using FTP 9
Enable the FTP port.
1) Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
2) Select [Port Settings].
3) Select [FTP Client], and then select [Change Settings].
4) Select [Port Status], and then select [Change Settings].
5) Select [Enabled], and then select [Save].
6) Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
3 Set the IP address of the machine and the other addresses.
Skip this step if an IP address is already set.
If DHCP or BOOTP is available in your environment, configure the method for
obtaining the address. If an IP address cannot be obtained automatically or manual
configuration is preferred, confirm the settings of an IP address, a subnet mask, and a
gateway address.
For information on how to set an IP address, refer to "Protocol Settings" (P.176).
307
9 Scanner Environment Settings
Note • Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message
displayed on the screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
6 Print a configuration report to confirm that the SMB port or FTP client is enabled and
that TCP/IP is set up correctly.
For information on how to print a configuration report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.101).
308
Configuration of Store to USB
This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Store to USB service.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Available USB Memory Devices.................................................................................. 309
CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items ............................................................................ 309
309
9 Scanner Environment Settings
This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Network Scanning
service.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Preparations....................................................................................................................310
Step 2 Enabling Ports and Setting up TCP/IP...........................................................................310
Step 3 Configuring the SNMP Port...........................................................................................311
Step 4 Configuration on the Computer .....................................................................................312
Step 1 Preparations
The following environment is required to use the Network Scanning feature on the
machine.
z To use SMB forwarding, your computer must run on one of the following operating
systems that supports folder sharing.
- Microsoft Windows NT 4.0
Scanner Environment Settings
310
Configuration of Network Scanning (Job Template Scanning)
7) The right frame of the web browser changes to the machine reboot display.
8) Click [Reboot Machine]. The machine reboots and the settings are enabled.
311
9 Scanner Environment Settings
312
Configuration of Scan to Home (ApeosPort Series Models Only)
This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Scan to Home service.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Preparations................................................................................................................... 313
Step 2 Enabling SMB Port and Setting up TCP/IP .................................................................. 313
Step 3 Configuring Remote Authentication ............................................................................. 314
Step 4 Configuring Scan to Home............................................................................................ 315
Step 5 Configuration on the Computer .................................................................................... 317
Step 1 Preparations
The Scan to Home service allows you to forward scanned files to recipients which vary
depending on a login user when [Login to Remote Accounts] is selected for [Login
Type].
The following items are required to use the Scan to Home feature.
Destination Computer
The following operation system must be installed on a destination computer.
For Mac OS X, a sharing user account is required on the Mac OS X.
z
Microsoft Windows 2000
z
Microsoft Windows Server 2003
z
Microsoft Windows Server 2008
z Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2
9
z
Microsoft Windows XP
z
Microsoft Windows Vista
z
Microsoft Windows 7
z
Mac OS X 10.2.x/10.3.x/10.4.x/10.5/10.6
313
9 Scanner Environment Settings
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's
passcode, and select [Enter].
Note • The default user ID is "11111".
• The default passcode is "x-admin".
314
Configuration of Scan to Home (ApeosPort Series Models Only)
315
9 Scanner Environment Settings
2) Click [Services].
3) Click [Scan to Home].
4) Click [General].
5) Select the [Enabled] check box under [Status].
6) Click [Friendly Name] and enter the description of the job template with up to 127
single-byte characters as necessary, and the click [Apply].
7) Click [Template Name] and set the job template name with up to 24 single-byte
characters as necessary, and then click [Apply].
The name specified here is displayed in the list of the job templates for the Scan to
Home service. When a job template name is not specified, the template name is
displayed as "@S2HOME".
3 Specify the storage location (directory).
316
Configuration of Scan to Home (ApeosPort Series Models Only)
317
9 Scanner Environment Settings
This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Job Flow Sheets
service.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Enabling Ports and Setting up TCP/IP...........................................................................318
Step 2 Configuring the SNMP Port...........................................................................................319
Step 3 Configuration on the Computer .....................................................................................319
318
Configuration of Job Flow Sheets
319
9 Scanner Environment Settings
This section describes how to configure the machine to use the Store & Send Link
service.
Important • When a user is notified by e-mail of a URL location to retrieve scanned data, the e-mail
message is not encrypted, which enables the user to retrieve the data without password
authentication. Thus, in case the URL information is leaked on the e-mail transmission path
due to any attempts, other parties to whom the information is leaked cannot be tracked. To
prevent others from viewing scanned data, select [PDF] or [DocuWorks] in [File Format] and
set a password in [PDF Security] or [DocuWorks Security] before scanning a document.
Note • To use the Store & Send Link feature, an optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• To use the Store & Send Link service, the configuration for authentication is required.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Configuring E-mail ........................................................................................................320
Step 2 Enabling Authentication ................................................................................................320
Step 3 Other Settings.................................................................................................................320
CentreWare Internet Services Setting Items .............................................................................321
Scanner Environment Settings
9
(P.376).
320
Configuration of Store & Send Link
321
10 Using the Internet Fax
Service
This chapter describes the settings to use services via the Internet Fax on the
machine.
Note • This feature does not appear for some models. For such models, an optional
component is required to use this feature. For more information, contact our
Customer Support Center.
z Internet Fax Overview...............................................................................324
z
Preparations .............................................................................................324
z Installation Procedures .............................................................................326
10 Using the Internet Fax Service
When the Fax feature is available and the machine is equipped with the Internet Fax
Kit (optional), the machine can transmit scanned data as an e-mail attachment using a
corporate intranet or the Internet, unlike conventional fax machines which use public
phone lines. Also, the machine can receive e-mails transmitted from the Internet Fax-
enabled machines.
For details of the Internet Fax, refer to "4 Fax" > "About Internet Fax" in the User Guide.
Preparations
This section describes the prerequisites to use the Internet Fax on the machine.
E-Mail Environment
To use the Internet Fax feature, configure the following settings for your e-mail
environment.
324
Preparations
325
10 Using the Internet Fax Service
Installation Procedures
This section describes the configuration procedures to use the Internet Fax feature on
the machine.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Enabling Port and Setting up TCP/IP ............................................................................326
Step 2 Configuring E-mail Environment ..................................................................................327
Step 3 Testing the Internet Fax .................................................................................................328
2) Enter the system administrator's user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard
displayed on the screen, and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's
passcode, and select [Enter].
Note • The default user ID is "11111".
• The default passcode is "x-admin".
326
Installation Procedures
5 Select [Close].
Note • Rebooting the machine may be required depending on the settings. When a message
displayed on the screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
6 Print a configuration report to confirm that the ports are enabled and that TCP/IP is set
up correctly.
For information on how to print a Configuration Report, refer to "Print Reports" (P.101).
327
10 Using the Internet Fax Service
3) Select [Close].
6 Configure the domain filtering for sending and receiving e-mails as necessary.
For information on how to configure the domain filtering, refer to "Domain Filtering" (P.191).
1 Select [Fax / Internet Fax] on the [Services Home] screen to display the [Fax / Internet
Fax] screen.
2 Select [Internet Fax] from the drop-down menu.
3 Enter a destination address.
4 Press the <Start> button to transmit.
5 Check whether the computer received the e-mail.
If the computer cannot receive the e-mail, refer to "Problem Solving" (P.387).
328
11 Using the Server Fax Service
This chapter describes how to use the Server Fax service on the machine.
z Server Fax Overview ................................................................................330
z Preparations .............................................................................................330
z Installation Procedure ...............................................................................331
Note • This feature does not appear for some models. For such models, an optional
component is required. For more information, contact our Customer Support
Center.
11 Using the Server Fax Service
If your machine supports the Scan feature, installing the Server Fax Kit (optional)
allows you to use the Fax feature of a Server Fax server.
With the Server Fax feature, you can transfer image data received by the machine to
the Server Fax server, and can transfer image data received by the Server Fax server
to the machine via a network based on the settings you made.
Important • While the Fax Server feature is enabled, the Fax feature is detected as "not installed" even if
the Fax Kit is installed on the machine. During that time, therefore, fax transmission and
reception are disabled and printed reports show that the machine does not support the Fax
feature.
Note • The Server Fax service cannot be used together with the Fax service or the Internet Fax
service.
Preparations
The following describes the conditions necessary to use Server Fax on the machine.
11
330
Installation Procedure
Installation Procedure
Installation Overview
This section describes the configuration procedure to use the Server Fax feature on the
machine.
The following shows the reference section for the configuration procedures.
Step 1 Fax Settings ................................................................................................................... 331
Step 2 Setting the Server Fax Feature ...................................................................................... 332
331
11 Using the Server Fax Service
z
Example of the Internet address entry
http://myhost.example.com/
Note • When specifying a port number, add “:” and the port number to the end of the Internet
address.
332
Installation Procedure
333
12 Encryption and Digital
Signature Settings
This chapter describes the settings to use the Encryption feature and the Digital
Signature feature on the machine.
z Encryption and Digital Signature Overview ..............................................336
z
Configuration of HTTP Communications Encryption ................................338
z Configuration of Encryption using IPSec ..................................................340
z
Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature................................343
z Configuration of PDF / DocuWorks / XPS Signature (ApeosPort Series
Models Only).............................................................................................348
12 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings
Types of Certificate
To use the Encryption feature and the Signature feature on the machine, a certificate
is required.
The following two types of device certificate can be used on the machine:
z A self-signed certificate created by CentreWare Internet Services (the expiration
date can be specified between 1 to 9999 days)
z
A certificate issued by another CA
When you use a certificate issued by another CA, import the certificate using
CentreWare Internet Services.
For more information on how to import a certificate, refer to the help of CentreWare Internet Services.
Types of Certificate
Certificate
Self-Signed
Issued by
Certificate
Another CA
Types of Encryption
Encryption and Digital Signature Settings
12
Encryption Features for Communication
The data sent between the machine and computers on a network can be encrypted.
336
Encryption and Digital Signature Overview
337
12 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings
Installation Overview
To encrypt HTTP communications, configure the machine and your computer as
follows:
- Enable HTTPS, and then import a certificate issued by another CA to the machine.
338
Configuration of HTTP Communications Encryption
2 Create a certificate.
1) Click the [Properties] tab.
2) Click [Security] to display the items in the folder.
3) Click [Machine Digital Certificate Management].
4) Click the [Create New Self Signed Certificate] button.
5) Set [Public Key Size] as necessary.
6) Set [Issuer] as necessary.
7) Set [Days of Validity] as necessary.
8) Click [Apply].
9) Refresh the web browser.
3 Set up the SSL / TLS information.
1) Click [Security] to display the items in the folder.
2) Click [SSL / TLS Settings].
3) Select the [Enabled] check box for [HTTP - SSL / TLS Communication].
4) Set up [HTTP - SSL / TLS Communication Port Number].
Note • Do not use the numbers of any other ports.
339
12 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings
Installation Overview
To encrypt communications using IPSec, configure the machine and your computer as
follows:
340
Configuration of Encryption using IPSec
2 Import a certificate.
Important • You cannot import a certificate that has been already registered in [Local Device] or
[Others]. Delete the registered certificate before importing.
• If the certificate to be imported contains the V3 extension "keyUsage", "digitalSignature"
must be asserted.
341
12 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings
8 Select [Close].
12
342
Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature
This section describes how to encrypt e-mails and how to attach a digital signature to
e-mails.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step1 Configuration on the Machine ....................................................................................... 343
Step2 Configuration on Sender and Recipient ......................................................................... 345
Installation Overview
To encrypt e-mails and attach a digital signature, configure the machine and your
computer as follows:
Note • To encrypt e-mails and attach a digital signature to e-mails between the machine and a
computer, a personal or device certificate for S/MIME of a recipient and the device certificate
of the machine must be set on the computer. Configure the following settings to the
certificates:
- "e-mail address"
- If the certificate contains V3 extension "keyUsage", "digitalSignature" and
"keyEncipherment" must be asserted.
- If the certificate contains V3 extension "extendedKeyUsage", "emailProtection" must be
343
12 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings
2 Import a certificate.
Important • You cannot import a certificate that has been already registered in [Local Device] or
[Others]. Delete the registered certificate before importing.
344
Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature
345
12 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings
For information on how to import and export a certificate using CentreWare Internet Services, refer to
"Importing/exporting a certificate using CentreWare Internet Services" (P.346) or the help of
CentreWare Internet Services.
For information on how to register a certificate to the certificate store of an e-mail application, refer to
the manual of your e-mail software.
346
Configuration of E-mail Encryption/Digital Signature
For information on how to import and export a certificate, refer to the help of CentreWare Internet
Services.
347
12 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings
This section describes the settings to send scanned documents in PDF, DocuWorks,
or XPS format with a digital signature (PDF, DocuWorks, or XPS) attached.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step1 Configuration on the Machine ........................................................................................348
Step2 Configuration on the Computer ......................................................................................350
Installation Overview
To attach a signature (PDF signature/DocuWorks signature/XPS signature) to a
scanned document to send as a PDF, DocuWorks, or XPS document, configure the
machine and your computer as follows:
z
Configuring certificates by CentreWare Internet Services
- Set up HTTPS communications encryption settings, and then configure a
certificate on the machine.
348
Configuration of PDF / DocuWorks / XPS Signature (ApeosPort Series Models Only)
2 Import a certificate.
Important • You cannot import a certificate that has been already registered in [Local Device] or
[Others]. Delete the registered certificate before importing.
1) Click the [Properties] tab.
2) Click [Security] to display the items in the folder.
3) Click [Machine Digital Certificate Management].
4) Click [Upload Signed Certificate].
5) Enter [Password].
6) Enter [Retype Password]
7) Enter a file name you want to import or select a file to import from a dialog box
displayed by clicking the [Browse] button, and then select [Save].
8) Click the [Import] button.
9) Refresh the web browser.
3 Configure the certificate.
349
12 Encryption and Digital Signature Settings
12
350
13 Authentication and
Accounting Features
This section overviews the Authentication feature and the Accounting feature.
The following shows the reference section for each feature.
Overview of Authentication Feature.........................................................................................352
Overview of Accounting Feature..............................................................................................353
Types of Users
The users include the System Administrator, Login User, Unregistered User, and Local
User.
For more information about the feature, refer to "User Types Managed by Authentication Feature"
(P.354).
Types of Authentication
The machine supports two authentication types: [Login to Local Accounts] that
authenticates users based on the user information registered on the machine, and
[Login to Remote Accounts] that authenticates users based on the user information
registered on a remote server.
For more information about the feature, refer to "Types of Authentication" (P.356).
Note • The available remote servers are LDAP, Kerberos, SMB, and ApeosWare Authentication
Management or ApeosWare Authentication Agent servers.
Access Control
Allows you to prohibit the operation of the control panel buttons.
For more information, refer to "Device Access" (P.259).
Allows you to configure whether to restrict the availability per service such as Copy,
Fax, and Scan.
For more information about the feature, refer to "Service Access" (P.259).
13 Allows you to restrict users from making color copies, or from printing or retrieving files
stored in folders per user.
For more information about the feature, refer to "Feature Access" (P.260).
352
Overview of Authentication and Accounting Feature
Accounting Type
The machine supports three types of account administration: Local Accounting,
Network Accounting, and Xerox Standard Accounting.
For more information, refer to "Types of Account Administration" (P.357).
Note • Xerox Standard Accounting does not appear for some models. An optional component is
required. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center.
13
353
13 Authentication and Accounting Features
Authentication
This section describes the Authentication feature used with the machine.
User Types Managed by Authentication Feature......................................................................354
User Roles and Authorization Groups ......................................................................................355
Types of Authentication............................................................................................................356
Types of Account Administration.............................................................................................357
Authentication and Accounting Relationship ...........................................................................358
Types of User
Users are classified into the following four types. The Authentication feature restricts
operations according to the user type.
System Administrator
The System Administrator can register and change system settings to adapt to the
Authentication and Accounting Features
environment to be used.
A system administrator uses a specific user ID called a system administrator's user ID.
To login as the system administrator, enter the system administrator's user ID in the
user ID entry field on the screen.
Login User
A Login User is a user registered on the machine or a remote server.
To use restricted services, enter the user ID and passcode on the screen.
Note • Users who are assigned as [System Administrator] in [User Role] have almost the same
privileges as the system administrator. For more information, refer to "User Roles and
Authorization Groups" (P.355).
Unregistered User
Unregistered User is a user not registered on the machine.
An unregistered user cannot use restricted services.
13 Local User
A user who does not login to the machine is called a Local User.
Sub User
You can associate sub users with a user ID of a login user in accordance with the
intended use. Up to 10 Sub User IDs can be associated with a User ID.
Note • An optional component is required to use this feature. For more information, contact our
Customer Support Center.
354
Authentication
User Roles
The following three user roles are available:
User
No special authority is given to this user role.
System Administrator
The same authority as a system administrator is given except for the following
operations:
z Operate folders
z
Operate job flows sheets
z Change the passcode of the system administrator
Authorization Groups
The following settings can be configured for each authorization group.
For details on authorization groups, refer to "Create Authorization Groups" (P.260).
355
13 Authentication and Accounting Features
Types of Authentication
The following describes the types of authentication (Login Type) available on the
machine.
The following three authentication methods are available.
User ID Authentication
This authentication method requires users to enter their user IDs and passcodes with
the numeric keypad or the touch screen of the machine.
Authentication is performed using user information registered on the machine or a
remote server.
The following two types of authentication methods are available according to the
registration condition of user information.
manage authentication.
A print job directly sent to the machine from a computer can be received on the machine
after being authenticated through cross-checking process whereby the authentication
information configured on the client's driver with the information registered on the
machine.
For information on driver settings, refer to the help of the driver.
13 can access the services through the control panel based on the permission information
obtained from the remote server.
• When you change Login Type to or from [Login to Remote Account], user information,
private folders, and Personal Sheets registered on the machine will be deleted.
• When you register user information on a remote authentication server, use up to 32 single-
byte characters for a user ID and up to 128 single-byte characters for a password. Note,
however, that up to 32 single-byte characters are allowed for an SMB authentication
password.
356
Authentication
For more information on the connection of IC Card Reader (purchase separately), contact our Customer
Support Center. For more information on how to use and manage IC Card Reader, refer to the manual
provided with the device.
Local Accounting
Network Accounting
Network Accounting performs account administration using user information managed
by a remote service.
In Network Accounting, the remote server collects job data stored on the machine and
counts up the numbers of pages processed for each user.
User information managed by the remote service is sent to be registered on the 13
machine. When the user information on the remote service is updated, the updated
information must be sent from the remote service to the machine.
Remote services supported by the machine include Device Setup Tool (free software)
or ApeosWare EasyAdmin (purchase separately).
357
13 Authentication and Accounting Features
Accounting Types
Authentication and Accounting Features
O: Available
X : Not available
*1 Default
*2 When [Login Type] is [Login to Remote Accounts] and [Authentication System] is not set to [Authentication Agent],
[Accounting Type] is automatically set to [Accounting Disabled]. Accounting, however, can be performed with
358
Services Controlled by Authentication
This section describes the features that are controlled by the Authentication feature.
The restricted features vary depending on how the machine is used.
For information on the folder and job flow sheet restrictions when the Authentication feature is enabled,
refer to "Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders" (P.365).
Overview
This feature can be set for each user, and other restrictions can be set for the machine
as a whole.
For information on the restrictions that can be set for each user, refer to "Account Limit" (P.249), and
for information on the restrictions that can be set for the machine as a whole, refer to "Service Access"
(P.259).
When [Login Type] is [Login to Local Accounts] and [Accounting Type] is [Local
Accounting]
The following services are controlled.
Authentica-
Restrictions per user
tion *1 Per-user
Services
Feature Account Limit Usage Count
User ID
restrictions *2 *3
Copy O O O O
Print O O O O 13
Charge Print,
Private Charge O O O O
Print
Scan O O O O
Fax, Internet Fax O - O
O
Direct Fax O - O
Report/List - - - -
O: Available
X : Not available
*1 This column shows whether authentication is required for each service. "O" indicates that authentication is required.
*2 You can select features available for each user. For more information, refer to "Account Limit" (P.249).
*3 This feature stops machine operation when the number of pages specified in the account limit is processed. For
more information, refer to "Account Limit" (P.249).
359
13 Authentication and Accounting Features
When [Login Type] is [Login to Local Accounts] and [Accounting Type] is [Network
Accounting]
The following services are controlled.
For features supported by ApeosWare Log Management (purchase separately) or ApeosWare
Accounting Service (purchase separately), refer to the manuals provided with the software.
Authentica-
Restrictions per user
tion *1 Per-user
Services
Feature Account Limit Usage Count
User ID
restrictions *2 *3
Copy O O - -
Print O O - -
Charge Print,
Private Charge O O - -
Print
Scan O O - -
Fax, Internet Fax O - -
O
Direct Fax O - -
Report/List - - - -
O: Available
X : Not available
Authentication and Accounting Features
*1 This column shows whether authentication is required for each service. "O" indicates that authentication is required.
*2 You can select features available for each user. The settings can be configured with the remote service.
*3 This feature stops machine operation when the number of pages specified in the account limit is processed. The
settings can be configured with the remote service.
Authentica-
Restrictions per user
tion *1 Per-user
Services
Feature Usage Count
13 User ID
restrictions *2
Account Limit
Copy O O - -
*3
Print O O - -
Charge Print,
Private Charge O O - -
Print
Scan O O - -
Fax, Internet Fax O O - -
*4
Direct Fax - - - -
Report/List - - - -
O: Available
X : Not available
360
Services Controlled by Authentication
*1 This column shows whether authentication is required for each service. "O" indicates that authentication is required.
*2 If ApeosWare Authentication Management (purchase separately) or ApeosWare Authentication Agent (purchase
separately) is used as an authentication system, you can select features to restrict. For information on ApeosWare
Authentication Management (purchase separately) or ApeosWare Authentication Agent, refer to the manuals
provided with the software.
*3 When [Login Type] is set to [Login to Remote Accounts], the Print feature cannot be restricted. To restrict print
operations, use the Charge Print or Private Charge Print feature.
*4 When [Login Type] is [Login to Remote Accounts], the Direct Fax feature cannot be restricted. To disable the Direct
Fax feature, refer to "Direct Fax" (P.212).
Important • Note the following conditions when you use ApeosWare Log Management or ApeosWare
Accounting Service to perform account administration per user:
• When users are registered in multiple domains, each user ID must be unique.
• Before a user sends a job from a computer (print and fax), the user needs to log in from
the computer to the remote server to have the server confirm the user ID.
When [Login Type] is [Login to Local Accounts] and [Accounting Type] is [Xerox
Standard Accounting]
The following services are controlled.
Authentica-
Restrictions per user
tion *1 Per-user
Services
Feature Usage Count
User ID Account Limit
restrictions *2 *3
Copy O O O O
Print O O O O
O: Available
X : Not available
*1 This column shows whether authentication is required for each service. "O" indicates that authentication is required.
*2 You can select features available for each user. For more information, refer to the online help of CentreWare
Internet Services.
*3 This feature stops machine operation when the number of pages specified in the account limit is processed. For
more information, refer to the online help of CentreWare Internet Services.
Note • Xerox Standard Accounting does not appear for some models. An optional component is
required. For more information, contact our Customer Support Center. 13
361
13 Authentication and Accounting Features
When [Login Type] is [Login to Local Accounts] and [Accounting Type] is [Local
Accounting]
The following services are controlled.
Direct Fax O - O - O
Report/List - O*5 - - -
O: Available
X : Not available
*1 This column shows whether authentication is required for each service. "O" indicates that authentication is required.
*2 The user ID of the card is checked against the user ID registered on the machine when IC Card Reader (purchase
separately) is used.
*3 You can select features available for each user. For more information, refer to "Account Limit" (P.249).
*4 This feature stops machine operation when the number of pages specified in the account limit is processed. For
more information, refer to "Account Limit" (P.249).
*5 Report and List can be printed using a smart card not registered on the machine.
When [Login Type] is [Login to Local Accounts] and [Accounting Type] is [Network
Accounting]
The following services are controlled.
For features supported by ApeosWare Log Management (purchase separately) or ApeosWare
13 Accounting Service (purchase separately), refer to the manuals provided with the software.
362
Services Controlled by Authentication
O: Available
X : Not available
*1 This column shows whether authentication is required for each service. "O" indicates that authentication is required.
*2 If ApeosWare Authentication Management (purchase separately) or ApeosWare Authentication Agent (purchase
separately) is used as an authentication system, you can select features to restrict. For information on ApeosWare
Authentication Management (purchase separately) or ApeosWare Authentication Agent, refer to the manuals
provided with the software.
*3 When [Login Type] is set to [Login to Remote Accounts], the Print feature cannot be restricted. To restrict print
operations, use the Charge Print or Private Charge Print feature.
363
13 Authentication and Accounting Features
*4 When you hold your card over IC Card Reader, the machine automatically prints the print job being paused. We
recommend that you use Charge Print or Private Charge Print to avoid unintended printing.
*5 The user ID of the card is checked against the user ID registered on the machine.
*6 When [Login Type] is [Login to Remote Accounts], the Direct Fax feature cannot be restricted. To disable the Direct
Fax feature, refer to "Direct Fax" (P.212).
Important • Note the following conditions when you use ApeosWare Log Management or ApeosWare
Accounting Service to perform account administration per user:
• When users are registered in multiple domains, each user ID must be unique.
• Before a user sends a print job from a computer, the user needs to log in from the
computer to the remote server to have the server confirm the user ID.
Note • Authentication is not performed when [Verify User Details] is set to [No] under [Tools] >
[Accounting] > [Accounting Type] > [Network Accounting].
Authentication and Accounting Features
13
364
Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders
This section describes the restrictions of job flows, folders, and job flow sheets and
folder links when the Authentication feature is enabled.
Overview .................................................................................................................................. 365
When the Authentication Feature is Disabled.......................................................................... 367
When the Authentication Feature is Enabled ........................................................................... 370
Overview
365
13 Authentication and Accounting Features
When the Authentication feature is enabled, this type of job flow sheet is available for
the login user who created the job flow sheet and for the system administrator.
The available operations for job flow sheets vary depending on whether the
Authentication feature is enabled or disabled.
O: Available
X : Not available
U: Available to the System Administrator only
*1 Viewing, copying, selecting, and executing job flow sheets
Personal Folder
This is a folder created by a login user when the Authentication feature is enabled.
The login user who created it and the system administrator can use it.
When the Authentication feature is not enabled, this folder can be operated only by the
system administrator.
The methods you can use folders differ depending on whether the Authentication
feature is enabled.
366
Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders
When the Authentication feature is not enabled, this folder can be shared by all users.
When the Authentication feature is enabled, this folder can be shared by all login users.
Only the system administrator, however, can change the settings.
To create an administrator shared folder, you must press the <Log In/Out> button and
operate the machine as the system administrator.
The available operations for folders vary depending on whether the Authentication
feature is enabled or disabled.
O : Available
X : Not available
U: Available to the System Administrator only
*1 Viewing folders, viewing, deleting, registering, and outputting files, and viewing and starting job flow sheets
O : Available
U: Available to the System Administrator only
13
When the Authentication Feature is Disabled
367
13 Authentication and Accounting Features
O: Available
- : Not available
* The owner of a copied job flow sheet is the user who copied the document.
Important • A job flow sheet created on the [Create Folder] screen under [Setup] or on the [Send from
Folder] screen can be edited, copied, deleted, or selected/run only from the folder where the
job flow sheet was created. The applicable users are all users who can use the folders.
• If job flow sheets, which are no longer available for use as a result of a change in the Login
Type, are linked to folders, they cannot be edited or copied, but still can be used. If you
Authentication and Accounting Features
cancel the links, however, the job flow sheets will no longer be displayed and will be
unavailable.
13 Delete O - - - O O O O
Select/Run O - O - O O O O
O: Available
- : Not available
* The owner of a copied job flow sheet is the user who copied the document.
368
Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders
When the Authentication feature is disabled, the relationships between users and
folders are as follows.
O: Available
- : Not available
O: Available
- : Not available
369
13 Authentication and Accounting Features
For information on the Authentication feature, refer to "Overview of Authentication Feature" (P.352).
When [Login to Local Accounts] is selected, when [Verify User Details] is set to
[Yes] in [Network Accounting] and [Customize User Prompts] is set to [Display
User ID & Account ID Prompts] or [Display User ID Prompt Only], or when
authenticated as a user other than a guest user in [Login to Remote Accounts]
Important • If authenticated as a guest user in [Login to Remote Accounts], you are treated as an
unregistered user (local user) and cannot operate job flow sheets.
Unregistered Users
Local Users System Administrators
Job flow (Local Users)
operation General Folder Admin Personal General Folder Admin Personal Personal General Folder Admin Personal
shared shared shared shared (owner) (Non- shared shared
Authentication and Accounting Features
owner)
Create/
- - - - - - - O - - - O -
Register
Display - - - - - - O O - O O O O
Edit - - - - - - - O - O O O O
Copy * - - - - - - O O - O O O O
Delete - - - - - - - O - O O O O
Select/
- - - - - - O O - O O O O
Run
Link to
- - - - - - O O - O O O O
Folder
O: Available
- : Not available
* The owner of a copied job flow sheet is the user who copied the document.
13 Available Folder Operations
If you change the authentication setting from "disabled" to "enabled", delete all existing
general shared folders, and create personal folders.
When the Authentication feature is enabled, the relationships between users and job
flows are as follows.
For information on the Authentication feature, refer to "Overview of Authentication Feature" (P.352).
370
Authentication for Job Flow Sheets and Folders
Important • If authenticated as a guest user in [Login to Remote Accounts], you are treated as an
unregistered user (local user) and cannot operate folders.
O:
371
13 Authentication and Accounting Features
13
372
Jobs Manageable by Account Administration
This section describes the information that can be managed for the jobs for each
service.
Print
You can manage the following print job information using the Accounting feature:
13
373
13 Authentication and Accounting Features
Scan
You can manage the following scan job information using the Accounting feature:
Corresponding Authenti-
Target User Managed Items
Service cation
E-mail Required Login user Scanned pages, mail transmission pages
Store to Folder Required Login user Scanned pages
Scan to PC Required Login user Scanned pages, file transfer pages
Store & Send Link Required Login user Scanned pages
Network Scanning Required Login user Scanned pages, file transfer pages
Store to USB Required Login user Scanned pages
Note • To use the Store & Send Link feature, an optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
Fax
You can manage the following fax job information using the Accounting feature:
Authenti-
Services (Jobs) Target User Managed Items
cation
Send as Automatic Send Required Login user Transmissions/pages, charging units
Fax
Manual Send (Call-in, Call- Required Login user Transmissions/pages, charging units
Authentication and Accounting Features
out)
Receive Automatic Reception/Print Not Fax reception Receptions/pages, charging units,
Fax/Print required printed pages/number of sheets
Fax
Manual Reception/Print Required Fax reception Receptions/pages, charging units,
(Call-in, Call-out) printed pages/number of sheets
Store Fax Automatic Reception to Not Fax reception Receptions/pages, charging units
- Local Folder required
Folder
Print Folder-received Fax Required*1 Login user Printed pages/number of sheets
Fax Storing for Polling Required*1 - -
Polling (Folders, Polling Folders)
Automatic Send (to Folder) Not Unregistered Transmissions/pages
required user
Automatic Reception/Print Required Login user Polls/pages, charging units, printed
pages/number of sheets
13 Polling File Sample Required*1 Login user Pages/number of sheets
Printout
(Folders, Polling Folders)
Fax Relay Broadcasting, Not Relay Transmissions/pages, charging units,
Relay Printing required Broadcast printed pages/number of sheets
Broadcast
Direct Fax transmission Required Login user Transmissions/pages, charging units
Send as Internet Fax Required Login user Transmissions/pages
Receive Automatic Reception/Print Not Internet Fax Receptions/pages, printed pages/
Internet required Received number of sheets
Fax/Print
Automatic Reception to Not Internet Fax Receptions/pages
Internet
Folder required Received
Fax
Print Folder-received Fax Required*1 Login user Pages/number of sheets
374
Jobs Manageable by Account Administration
Authenti-
Services (Jobs) Target User Managed Items
cation
Receive Automatic Transmission Not Internet Fax Transmissions/pages, charging units
Internet (Transfer) required reception/fax
Fax / forwarding
Internet
Fax
Transfer
*1 When you select [Unlocked] for [Print Files from Folder] under [Tools] > [Authentication / Security Settings] >
[Authentication] > [Access Control] > [Feature Access], authentication is not required to access folders shared by
system administrators, and the machine prints jobs as unregistered user.
z
Restriction on Using the Accounting feature on Fax Jobs:
Note the following conditions when you use the Accounting feature on fax jobs.
- Sending files from different user accounts to the same destination is not counted
as a batch send.
- The number of charging units is calculated using the machine's built-in timer.
Therefore, the communications charges calculated from the number of charging
units may slightly differ from the charges invoiced by the telecommunications
company.
- When fax-received pages are split for printing, the number of pages counted will
be those received, not those printed.
- The number of charging units is not counted for the following communications:
• When dialing a fax number using the numeric keypad or the On-hook/Off-hook
13
375
13 Authentication and Accounting Features
This section describes the settings to use the Authentication feature on the machine.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Enabling Authentication ...........................................................................................................376
Changing the Default Authorization Group Settings................................................................379
Creating an Authorization Group..............................................................................................379
Installation Overview
To use the Authentication feature, configure the following settings.
Important • If job flow sheets, which are no longer available for use because of a change in the Login
Type, are linked to folders, they cannot be edited or copied, but still can be used. If you
cancel the links, however, the job flow sheets will no longer be displayed and will be
unavailable.
Change the default authorization group settings and add an authorization group, as
necessary.
Enabling Authentication
This section describes the procedures for [Login to Local Accounts] and [Login to
Remote Accounts] respectively.
13 When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's
passcode, and select [Enter].
Note • The default user ID is "11111".
• The default passcode is "x-admin".
376
Configuration for Authentication
For more information on the authentication method, refer to "Login Type" (P.258).
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's
passcode, and select [Enter].
Note • The default user ID is "11111".
• The default passcode is "x-admin".
377
13 Authentication and Accounting Features
8 Select [Yes].
9 Select [Access Control].
10 Select [Service Access].
11 Select [Unlocked] for the required services to permit users unlimited access, and then
select [Save].
12 Select [Close] repeatedly until the [Tools] screen is displayed.
13 Select [System Settings].
14 Select [Connectivity & Network Setup].
15 Select [Remote Authentication / Directory Service].
16 Select [Authentication System Setup] > [Authentication System], and then select a
Authentication and Accounting Features
13 displayed on the screen, follow the message and reboot the machine.
• The machine enters the Login mode, and [Login] is displayed at the lower left of the
[Services Home] screen.
• When [Locked (Show Icon)] is selected for a service under [Service Access], [ ] is
displayed on the button of the applicable service on the [Services Home] screen. Also, [ :
Requires Login] is displayed at the lower left of the [Services Home] screen. [ ] and [ :
Requires Login] are not displayed after authentication.
• When [Locked (Hide Icon)] is selected for a service under [Service Access] the applicable
service is not displayed on the [Services Home] screen. The services is displayed after
authentication.
378
Configuration for Authentication
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's
379
13 Authentication and Accounting Features
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's
passcode, and select [Enter].
Note • The default user ID is "11111".
• The default passcode is "x-admin".
13
380
Configuration for IC Card Reader (Optional)
You can use a smart card for authentication by comparing the information registered
on the smart card and the user information on the machine. You can also restrict the
machine use and perform accounting of the jobs using the information registered on
the smart card.
This section describes the supported smart cards and how to register a smart card to
use at the machine.
Note • An optional component is required to use this feature. For more information, contact our
Customer Support Center.
The following shows the reference section for card information and each procedure.
Step 1 Preparations................................................................................................................... 381
Step 2 Logout Method Using the Smart Card .......................................................................... 381
Step 3 Registering Smart Card Information............................................................................. 382
Step 1 Preparations
The following smart card types are supported by the embedded IC Card Reader.
z MIFARE (Type A)
- Fuji Xerox IC Card (Type A)
- Other MIFARE compatible smart cards*
381
13 Authentication and Accounting Features
7 Select [Smart Card Logout Timing], and then select [Change Settings].
8 Select the authentication logout method, and then select [Save].
9 Select [Close].
3) Click [Apply].
Note • You can select multiple smart cards, but the card detection time increases in proportion to
the number of cards selected. We recommend that you select the required cards only.
5 Register the smart card that you selected the [Enabled] check box for.
1) Click [Edit] next to the smart card.
2) Configure required settings.
3) Click [Apply].
6 To encrypt the smart card information, click the [Encrypt] button in [Encryption
Settings].
Important • Once you encrypt the smart card information, you cannot view or edit the information later.
Also, when you click the [Decrypt] button, the information is reset to the default. You should
backup the smart card information before encryption.
You can backup the smart card setting using [Cloning]. For more information, refer to the help of
382
Configuration for Account Administration
This section describes the settings to use the Accounting feature on the machine.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Step 1 Selecting an Accounting Type ...................................................................................... 383
Step 2 Registering User Information........................................................................................ 383
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's
passcode, and select [Enter].
Note • The default user ID is "11111".
• The default passcode is "x-admin".
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the system administrator's
passcode, and select [Enter].
Note • The default user ID is "11111".
• The default passcode is "x-admin".
383
13 Authentication and Accounting Features
4 Select [Accounting].
5 Select [Create / View User Accounts].
6 Select [<Available>], and then select [Create/Delete].
7 Enter a User ID and select [Save].
8 Select [Account Limit].
9 Configure the [Account Limit] and [Feature Access] settings for each service, and then
select [Save].
For more information on the account limit, refer to "Account Limit" (P.249).
10 If necessary, select a user role and an authorization group for the user under [User
Role], and then select [Save].
Note • [User Role] is displayed only when [Login Type] is set to [Login to Local Accounts].
For more information on the user role, refer to "User Role" (P.250).
13
384
User Authentication Operations
The machine has the Authentication feature to restrict the services available.
This section describes the authentication method to use the restricted services.
The following shows the reference section for each procedure.
Authenticating Login Users ..................................................................................................... 385
Changing Passcode................................................................................................................... 386
User Authentication
1 Press the <Log In/Out> button or the login information field on the touch screen.
2 Enter the user ID with the numeric keypad or the keyboard displayed on the screen,
and select [Enter].
When a passcode is required, select [Next] and enter the passcode, and select
[Enter].
Important • Finish user authentication before you cancel the Interrupt mode.
Note • When you select the service restricted, the [Log In] screen may appear. Enter the user ID
and/or the passcode to use the service.
• When the user is authenticated, the <Log In/Out> button is lit.
User Authentication
385
13 Authentication and Accounting Features
Changing Passcode
You can change the passcode to use for user authentication. Change the passcode by
following the steps in this section.
5 Select [New Passcode] and enter a new passcode, and then select [Save].
6 Select [Retype Passcode] and re-enter the new passcode, and then select [Save].
7 Select [Close].
386
14 Problem Solving
This chapter describes solutions to various problems you may have with the
machine.
z Troubleshooting ........................................................................................388
z Machine Trouble .......................................................................................389
z Image Quality Trouble ..............................................................................394
z Trouble during Copying ............................................................................400
z
Trouble during Printing .............................................................................404
z Trouble during Faxing...............................................................................407
z
Trouble during Scanning...........................................................................411
z
Network-related Problems ........................................................................416
z Media Print - Text Trouble ........................................................................430
z
Media Print - Photos Trouble ....................................................................431
z Error Code ................................................................................................432
z
Paper Jams...............................................................................................508
z Document Jams........................................................................................517
z Stapler Faults............................................................................................519
14 Problem Solving
Troubleshooting
This section describes troubles that may occur with the machine and their solutions.
Follow the troubleshooting procedure below to solve the problems.
The machine does not work Action Refer to "Machine Trouble" (P.389).
properly. Yes
No
A message is displayed. Cause Has a paper or document jam occurred?
No Yes Action For information on paper jams, refer to "Paper Jams"
(P.508).
For information on document jams, refer to "Document
Jams" (P.517).
No
Cause Is an error code displayed?
Action Refer to "Error Code" (P.432).
The image quality is poor. Action Refer to "Image Quality Trouble" (P.394).
No Yes
Trouble during copying Action Refer to "Trouble during Copying" (P.400).
No Yes
Trouble during printing Action Refer to "Trouble during Printing" (P.404).
No Yes
Trouble during faxing Action Refer to "Trouble during Faxing" (P.407).
No Yes
Trouble during scanning Action Refer to "Trouble during Scanning" (P.411).
No Yes
Network-related Problems Action Refer to "Network-related Problems" (P.416).
No Yes
Media Print - Text-related Action Refer to "Media Print - Text Trouble" (P.430).
Problems
Problem Solving
No Yes
Media Print - Photos-related Action Refer to "Media Print - Photos Trouble" (P.431).
Problems
Yes
If the error is not resolved even after following the above procedure, contact our
14 Customer Support Center.
When the EP system is available and a check or maintenance is required, the machine
sends a check or maintenance request to our Customer Support Center. A service
representative will visit you as required. This operation should be performed by a
system administrator.
Note • This feature does not appear for some models. An optional component is required. For more
information, contact our Customer Support Center.
• EP system may not be available in some regions. For more information, contact our
Customer Support Center.
For more information on the check or maintenance procedure of the EP system via the Internet, refer to
"EP Diagnostic Request/Repair Request" (P.149).
For more information on the EP system, refer to "EP System" (P.616).
388
Machine Trouble
Machine Trouble
Before you conclude that the machine is defective, check the machine status again.
Problem Solving
Guide.
Is the screen brightness too Adjust the screen brightness on the
low? [Screen Brightness] screen.
Refer to "Adjusting Screen Brightness" (P.31).
14
389
14 Problem Solving
[Disabled].
z
Add memory by installing add-on
memory.
Is the print mode [Off-line]? Press the <Machine Status> button to
check the [Print Mode] on the [Machine
Status] screen. If [Print Mode] is set to [Off-
line], select [On-line].
Is the power cord Switch the main power and power off, and
disconnected from the then firmly plug the power cord into the
machine? connector of the machine and power
outlet. Then switch the main power and
power on.
Refer to "2 Product Overview" > "Power
Source" in the User Guide.
The <Data> Is the interface cable Check the interface cable connection.
indicator does connected? Refer to "Interface Cables" (P.19).
not light even
though you Is the computer's Check the computer environment such as
instructed the environment correctly set? print driver settings.
machine to print. Is the required port status Check the status of the port to use, and
set to [Enabled]? then set the port status to [Enabled].
Refer to "Port Settings" (P.172).
Paper is not fed Is the specified size paper Follow the instructions displayed to load
from Tray 5. loaded in the tray? paper of correct size, and then try again.
Refer to "Loading Paper in Tray 5 (MSI)"
(P.45).
Problem Solving
14 Unable to insert
or remove a
Did you open a cover or turn
the machine off during
Do not forcibly insert or remove the paper
tray. Switch off the power. In a few
paper tray. printing? seconds, switch on the power. When the
machine is ready to receive data, insert or
remove the paper tray.
390
Machine Trouble
Problem Solving
14
391
14 Problem Solving
392
Machine Trouble
Problem Solving
(Selecting the Color for Copying)" in the User
Guide.
Is a message displayed on Replace the toner cartridge of the color
the touch screen prompting indicated in the message.
you to replace the toner Refer to "Replacing Toner Cartridges" (P.56).
cartridge?
Is a message displayed on Replace the drum cartridge indicated in the
the touch screen prompting
you to replace the drum
message. 14
Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges R1, R2,
cartridge? R3, or R4" (P.60).
Cannot staple Is staple jam occurred in the Remove the staple jammed in the
properly staple cartridge? cartridge.
Refer to "Stapler Faults" (P.519).
Is the print driver set Check the [Staple] setting in [Print Setup]
correctly? in the print driver when you send a print job
from the computer.
393
14 Problem Solving
If the image quality of printed documents is poor, identify the symptom in the following
table to perform the remedy.
If image quality does not improve even after performing the remedy, contact our
Customer Support Center.
The copy is Are the paper edges aligned Align the paper edges, adjust them to the
slightly and the leading edge tray's top corners, and reload the paper.
misaligned. adjusted to the tray Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.41).
corners?
14
394
Image Quality Trouble
Problem Solving
Refer to "3 Copy" > "Copy" > "Reduce /
Enlarge (Making Enlarged/Reduced Copies)"
in the User Guide.
Color shift of Is the color calibration Execute auto calibration.
color copies is incorrect? Refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.87).
poor, resulting in
unsatisfactory Is the machine set where it If the document glass is exposed to strong
image quality. is exposed to direct
sunlight?
light when you turn the machine on or
cancel the Energy Saver mode, color shift 14
may occur. Close the document cover and
turn the machine on, and when the
machine becomes ready to copy or print,
turn the machine off and then on one more
time.
395
14 Problem Solving
Black dots are The drum cartridge has Replace the drum cartridge with a new
printed. deteriorated or is damaged. one.
Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges R1, R2,
R3, or R4" (P.60).
Black or colored The drum cartridge has Replace the drum cartridge with a new
lines are printed. deteriorated or is damaged. one.
Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges R1, R2,
R3, or R4" (P.60).
The constant velocity Clean the constant velocity transport glass.
transport glass for the Refer to "Cleaning the White Chute and
document feeder is dirty. Constant Velocity Transport Glass" (P.85).
Problem Solving
Dirt appears at The paper path is dirty. Print a few pages to remove the dirt.
14 equal intervals.
The drum cartridge has Replace the drum cartridge with a new
deteriorated or is damaged. one.
Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges R1, R2,
R3, or R4" (P.60).
396
Image Quality Trouble
Printed toner The paper is damp. Replace the paper with new one.
smudges when Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.41).
rubbed with your
finger. The paper is unsuitable. Load suitable paper.
Toner is not Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.41).
fused.
The paper is
soiled with toner.
The entire paper The drum cartridge has Replace the drum cartridge with a new
area is printed deteriorated or is damaged. one.
black. Refer to "Replacing Drum Cartridges R1, R2,
R3, or R4" (P.60).
High-voltage power supply Contact our Customer Support Center.
may have malfunctioned.
Problem Solving
Nothing is Two or more sheets of Fan the paper well and load it again.
printed. paper are being fed Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.41).
simultaneously (double-
feed).
Power supply or high- Contact our Customer Support Center.
14
voltage power supply may
have malfunctioned.
397
14 Problem Solving
The entire output When Tray 5 is used, the Load paper of the correct type and size
is faint. size and type of the loaded into Tray 5.
paper are different from the Refer to "Loading Paper in Tray 5 (MSI)"
settings on the print driver. (P.45).
Two or more sheets may be Fan the paper well and load it again.
fed simultaneously. Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.41).
Paper becomes The paper is unsuitable. Replace the paper with new one.
wrinkled. Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.41).
Paper has been added to
the paper loaded.
The paper is damp.
Text is blurred. The paper is unsuitable. Replace the paper with new one.
Problem Solving
14
398
Image Quality Trouble
Text or images The paper guides in the Adjust the horizontal and vertical paper
are printed at an paper tray are not set in the guides to the correct positions.
angle. correct positions. Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.41).
Problem Solving
14
399
14 Problem Solving
Unable to Copy
If you cannot copy a document, identify the symptom in the following table to perform
the remedy.
14
400
Trouble during Copying
Problem Solving
The document type selected Set the suitable value for [Original Type].
is not suitable. Refer to "3 Copy" > "Image Quality" >
"Original Type (Selecting the Document
Type)" in the User Guide.
The image quality selected Copy black text. If the printout is too light,
is unsuitable for the select [Text] for [Original Type].
document. Refer to "3 Copy" > "Image Quality" in the
User Guide. 14
The copy is Paper is misaligned in the Align the paper edges, and adjust them to
slightly tray. the tray's top corners to reload the paper.
misaligned. Refer to "Loading Paper" (P.41).
401
14 Problem Solving
14
402
Trouble during Copying
Problem Solving
settings to cancel stapling.
The number of pages to be You cannot staple more than 50 pages.
stapled exceeds the Reduce the number of pages to 50 or
maximum number for fewer.
stapling.
14
403
14 Problem Solving
Unable to Print
If you cannot print a document, identify the symptom in the following table to perform
the remedy.
404
Trouble during Printing
The document is The document size is Change the size of paper in the tray, or
printed on a different from the paper size change the print option to specify a tray
different paper loaded in the specified tray. that contains the correct sized paper.
size than
specified.
The image on the The image is larger than the Expand the printable area of the machine,
document edges printable area. or reduce the image size on the printout.
is missing on the
output.
The printed font Font replacement is set on Check the font replacement table.
differs from the the print driver.
font specified on
the computer.
The printout is The machine does not offer To output offset, the Offset Staking Module
not offset. the Offset feature. or the Finisher is required.
Problem Solving
Printing is slow. [High Resolution] is When image data, such as photos, is
selected for [Image Quality]. printed with the high resolution, the print
speed becomes slow. Select [Standard] for
[Image Quality].
The specified The print driver for another Install the print driver for the model.
print options are model is used.
not enabled.
The required optional kit is Check the optional components installed
not installed on the
machine.
on the machine, and set [Installable
Options] under [Configuration] in the print
14
driver again.
The document The image is larger than the Expand the printable area of the machine,
edges are printable area. or reduce the image size on the printout.
missing on the
printout.
405
14 Problem Solving
14
406
Trouble during Faxing
Sending Problems
If you cannot send a fax, identify the symptom in the following table to perform the
remedy.
Problem Solving
abnormal. the recipient is turned off, is set to
"manual" receiving mode, or does not
support G3 reception.
Call the recipient to confirm the machine
condition.
An incorrect fax number is Check the fax number and try sending
used. again.
The number is not for fax
number.
If no peep sound is heard from the receiver
when you call the number, the number is
14
not for a fax number.
You forgot the external When calling from an extension line, the
access number. external access number is required.
When dialing, dial the external access
number such as "0", and then dial the fax
number.
When the switchboard is changed and you
cannot send faxes, try the external access
number "0*" instead of "0".
407
14 Problem Solving
14
408
Trouble during Faxing
Receiving Problems
If you cannot receive a fax, identify the symptom in the following table to perform the
remedy.
Problem Solving
Refer to "Fax Receiving Mode" (P.113).
The machine is in manual To use Fax information service, set the
send mode. reception mode to [Manual Send] on the
on-hook screen, enter an information code,
and press the <Start> button.
The document is not Check with the sender.
correctly loaded on the Note • Image quality may be affected by a
sender's machine. problem of the sender's machine,
not just by a problem of the
14
machine.
409
14 Problem Solving
14 received
document is
folder, and will be automatically printed.
For information on how to register the folder,
printed, and refer to "Create Folder" (P.230). For
cannot be stored information on the setting of the Folder
in the folder. Selector, refer to "Fax Received Options"
(P.212).
410
Trouble during Scanning
Problem Solving
are loaded. be sure to set [Mixed Size Originals] to
[On]. Otherwise, a paper jam will occur.
Refer to "5 Scan" > "Layout Adjustment" in the
User Guide.
14
411
14 Problem Solving
14
412
Trouble during Scanning
Problem Solving
not set a password cannot Panel] > [Administrative Tools] > [Local
use SMB transmission. Security Policy].
2. Select [Security Settings] > [Local
Policies] > [Security Options].
3. Change [Account: Limit local account
use of blank passwords to console
logon only] to [Disabled].
Is the root of the DFS name
space (\\Domain
Specify a DFS name space with a root
comprised of less than four characters. 14
name\Shared name)
specified with more than
three characters.
413
14 Problem Solving
414
Trouble during Scanning
Problem Solving
Black-and-white [Black & White] is selected Set [Color Scanning] to [Grayscale].
gradation is not for [Color Scanning]. Refer to "5 Scan" > "E-mail" in the User
reproduced Guide.
properly.
14
415
14 Problem Solving
Network-related Problems
When you cannot communicate with the machine or other SMB machines
If [Auto Master Mode] of SMB The machine or other SMB Confirm the setting of [Auto
is set to [On], the number of machines cannot be Master Mode] of SMB. If the
machines whose information searched from the Network setting is enabled, change it
can be stored is limited. The Computers icon. to [Off].
number depends on the
network environment.
14
416
Network-related Problems
Others
Symptom Remedy
Problem Solving
The message "Unknown Change the setting of the SMB receiving buffer to [Hard Disk
document name" is displayed Spool] or [Memory Spool].
for the job name in the job
history instead of the correct
job name.
14
417
14 Problem Solving
*: For more information on configuration and operations, refer to NetWare Online Documentation.
418
Network-related Problems
Problem Solving
settings matches the number print data.*
in the print data.*
The level settings for the IPX Use the set command from Enter the following command
checksum do not match. the console screen on the from the console screen on
file server to confirm whether the file server to set the IPX
the IPX checksum is set to checksum to either level 0 or
level 2. level 1.
set Enable IPX Checksum=x
(x = 0 or 1) 14
The level settings for the Use the set command from Enter the following command
NCP packet signature do not the console screen on the from the console screen on
match. file server to confirm whether the file server to set the NCP
the NCP packet signature is packet signature to either
set to level 3. level 0, 1, or 2, and restart
the file server. set NCP
Packet Signature Option=x
(x = 0, 1, or 2)
*: For more information on configuration and operations, refer to NetWare Online Documentation.
419
14 Problem Solving
*: For more information on configuration and operations, refer to NetWare Online Documentation.
14
420
Network-related Problems
Problem Solving
The [Notify] option was not Confirm whether the [Notify] Specify the [Notify] option
specified when the computer option is specified when when transmitting the print
transmitted the print data. transmitting the print data. data.
Netware command Execute the NetWare
[CASTOFF] has been - command [CASTON] on the
executed on the computer. computer.
14
421
14 Problem Solving
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Server 2003,
Windows Server 2008, or Windows Server 2008 R2
422
Network-related Problems
Problem Solving
browse the printer. off, connect it to the network,
and then turn the machine
on again.
14
423
14 Problem Solving
Symptom Remedy
Cannot connect to Is the machine working properly?
CentreWare Internet Check whether the machine is turned on.
Services.
Is Internet Services (HTTP) port activated?
Print Configuration Report to confirm.
Is the Internet address correctly entered?
Confirm the Internet address again. If the problem persists,
enter an IP address to connect to CentreWare Internet
Services.
Is a proxy server being used?
Depending on the proxy server, connections may not be
possible. Set the browser to [Not using proxy server] or set
that particular address to [Not using a proxy server].
The [Please wait] message is Wait for a while as instructed.
continuously displayed. If the status does not change, click the [Refresh] button.
If this does not impart any effect, confirm whether the
machine is operating correctly.
The [Refresh] button is not Are you using a specified browser?
functioning. Refer to "Installation of CentreWare Internet Services" (P.268) to
Selecting the menu on the left confirm whether your browser is supported.
frame does not update the
right frame contents.
The screen display is Change the window size for the browser.
distorted.
The latest information is not Click the [Refresh] button.
displayed.
Characters are not correctly Use Western European language command.
displayed.
Problem Solving
424
Network-related Problems
Symptom Remedy
Cannot receive e-mail (Print Is the e-mail address for the machine configured?
E-mail, and Internet Fax).
Is [Receive E-mail] set to [Enabled]?
Are settings such as the IP addresses for the SMTP server
and POP3 server (if POP3 is selected as the incoming mail
protocol) configured correctly?
Are the POP3 user name and password entered correctly?
Is [Domain Filtering] set?
Confirm whether your own domain is set to [Allow Domains],
on CentreWare Internet Services.
Are the SMTP server and/or POP server operating properly?
Consult your network administrator.
Cannot transmit e-mail (E- Is the E-mail address for the machine configured?
mail Notification
Is [E-mail Notification Service] set to [Enabled]? (For E-mail
ServiceInternet Fax, and E-
Notification Service)
mail).
Is [Send E-mail] set to [Enabled]?
Is the IP address for the SMTP server configured correctly?
Are the settings for notification of transmission configured
correctly? (for E-mail Notification Service)
Confirm the settings on the [Properties] tab of CentreWare
Internet Services.
Is the destination address entered correctly?
Is the SMTP server operating properly?
Consult your network administrator.
Problem Solving
Internet/Intranet Connection Problems
The possible causes and remedies for problems when connecting to the Internet or
intranet are as follows:
Cause Remedy 14
The Authentication feature Only Basic Authentication is supported by the machine. The
used on the remote server is machine does not support NTLM/digest. For security
not supported by the purposes, change to the Authentication feature using SSL.
machine.
The remote linkage services Purchase products/models/accessories supported by the
used does not support the remote linkage services.
model or accessories of the
machine.
425
14 Problem Solving
Cause Remedy
The IP address is incorrect. Confirm the IP address. If the IP address is incorrect, either
set a static IP address or resolve the IP address using DHCP
or Autonet.
The IP gateway address is Set the correct IP gateway address when connecting to the
incorrect. proxy server, or to a Web server via the IP gateway.
The subnet mask is incorrect. Set the correct subnet mask corresponding to your
environment.
The DNS server address is Confirm the DNS server address.
incorrect.
The DNS server selected Select a DNS server that can resolve the address.
cannot resolve the address. z
When connecting via the proxy server
Set the IP address of a DNS server that can resolve the
address of the proxy server.
z
When not connecting via the proxy server
Set the IP address of a DNS server that can resolve the
destination address.
The address of the address Confirm whether only addresses that do not use a proxy
that does not use a proxy server are set. Even if addresses not through a proxy server
server is incorrect. are specified using the FQDN, if a server is directly accessed
using its IP address, the registered server is not excluded.
Set the address not to use a proxy server.
Likewise, even if you directly specify an address that does
not use a proxy server, if a server is accessed with the
FQDN, the registered server is not excluded. Set an IP
address with the FQDN not to use a proxy server.
The desired server, or the Confirm whether the desired server or the proxy server is
proxy server is down. operating correctly.
The network cable is not Confirm whether the network cable is correctly connected.
connected, or broken. We recommend using a spanning-tree configuration, with
which network disconnection rarely occurs.
Cannot communicate Wait for a while and try accessing again.
because of overloading of the
server application.
Problem Solving
An error occurs that is not Even though an error occurs during background processing,
displayed on the control no massage appears on the control panel. Display the [Job
panel. Status] screen or print the Job History Report to confirm the
result.
Cannot access the proxy The following types of access control are used. Confirm the
server, firewall, or Web configured access control.
server as a result of access z
Address (port) restriction
14 control. z
SSL restriction
z User access restriction (including access right levels)
z Content block
z
Transfer data size restriction
z
Method restriction (cannot use POST etc.)
z HTTP header restriction (only accepting specified
browsers etc.)
z Time restriction (only available during a specific period of
time etc.)
426
Network-related Problems
Cause Remedy
The setting to use the proxy In the environment using the proxy server, you must
server is not configured. configure the machine to use the proxy server to connect to
a desired Web server. Make sure that you configure the
settings to use the proxy server.
The setting to use a proxy In an environment that does not use a proxy server, such as
server is configured even when connecting to an intranet, do not make the settings to
though the environment does use the proxy server.
not use a proxy server.
The proxy server address is When the settings to use a proxy server are configured, you
incorrect. cannot connect to a desired Web server only if the IP
address of the proxy server is correct. Set the correct IP
address of the proxy server.
When the proxy server Set the user name and password on the machine that allow
access requires connection to the proxy server.
authentication, you cannot
connect to the server
because the user name or
password is incorrect.
Symptom Remedy
When 0 (zero) is prepended Do not prepend 0 (zero) to each value of an IPv4 address.
to the head of a value for the
IPv4 address (for example:
124.249.010.033),
Problem Solving
connection fails.
Symptom Remedy
You cannot connect to the When you specify the machine's link-local address, a scope
machine with the link-local
address.
ID must be appended to the address.
For example, when you use Internet Explorer 7 on Windows
14
Vista to access the address "fe80::203:baff:fe48:9010", you
must append the Ethernet adapter local area connection
number (for example, 8) for Windows Vista to the address as
follows: fe80::203:baff:fe48:9010%8
The machine cannot connect Assign a static IPv6 address to the computer running
to a computer running Windows OS that supports IPv6.
Windows OS that supports Then, register the IPv6 address on the machine as host
IPv6. address to allow communication.
A device outside the router When searching for a device outside the router via SMB,
cannot be searched. directly specify the address. Multicasting is supported only
within a local link (FF02::1).
427
14 Problem Solving
Symptom Remedy
When SSL is enabled on When SSL is enabled, directly specify "https://[IPv6
CentreWare Internet address]".
Services, even if you specify
"http://[IPv6 address]", you
are not redirected to "https://
[IPv6 address]".
Symptom Remedy
On an IPv6 network without a Register the computer name of the machine on the "hosts"
DNS server, a computer file stored on the computer running Windows OS that
running Windows OS that supports IPv6. For example, register in the following file:
supports IPv6 cannot be C:\Windows\system32\driver\etc\hosts
connected to a Windows
shared printer.
IPv6 communication cannot NetWare does not support IPv6 communication. Use IPv4
be established with NetWare. for NetWare.
Symptom Remedy
When the machine is Assign a global address to the machine.
configured with only a link-
local address, file transfer
fails.
When you specify the Scan data cannot be transferred with SMB if a destination
computer name on a storage server is specified using the computer name. Use the IPv6
destination server of the format to specify the server.
Scan to PC (SMB) service in
an IPv6 environment without
a DNS server, scan data
cannot be transferred.
Problem Solving
The machine does not In IPv6 environment, use a DNS server and specify a
operate correctly if the destination using a fully qualified domain name (FQDN).
Internet Fax direct destination
is specified in IPv6 address
literal format.
Example:
csw@[ipv6:2001:db8::1]
428
Network-related Problems
Symptom Remedy
Unable to search devices In an IPv6 environment, use Function Discovery of WSD.
with IPv6 addresses in UPnP.
In an IPv6 network with no Directly specify the IPv6 address to specify the computer
DNS server installed, name of an authentication server.
authentication fails if an SMB
authentication server is
specified using the computer
name.
When the Web Applications In IPv6 environment, use a DNS server and specify a remote
service such as DocuShare is service's destination URL using the FQDN.
used, you cannot correctly
specify the destination URL
using the IPv6 address.
Example:
http://[ipv6:2001:db8::1]
IPv6 addresses are not Use an IPv4 network for correct logging.
correctly recorded on output
job logs.
Problem Solving
14
429
14 Problem Solving
The possible symptoms, causes, and remedies for problems when using Media Print -
Text are as follows:
14
430
Media Print - Photos Trouble
The possible symptoms, causes, and remedies for problems when using Media Print -
Photos are as follows:
Problem Solving
14
431
14 Problem Solving
Error Code
003-332
003-333
003-334
003-335
003-336
003-337
003-338
14 003-339
003-340
003-341
003-342
003-343
003-344
003-345
003-346
432
Error Code
Problem Solving
003-761 [Cause] The paper size of the tray selected for auto tray differs from the
paper size of the tray selected for Auto Paper selection.
[Remedy] Change the paper size for the tray, or change the [Paper Type
Priority] settings.
003-763 [Cause] An error occurred when reading the Calibration Chart.
[Remedy] Place the Calibration Chart correctly on the document glass.
003-780
Refer to "Executing Calibration" (P.87).
[Cause] Failed to compress the scanned document.
14
[Remedy] Reduce the resolution or the ratio for [Reduce / Enlarge] to
decrease the data size, or split the data to send it separately.
003-795 [Cause] When enlarging/reducing a scanned document to the paper size
specified, the reduction/enlargement ratio exceeds the allowed
range.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z Manually enter a reduction/enlargement ratio.
z
Change the paper size.
433
14 Problem Solving
434
Error Code
Problem Solving
016-226
016-227
016-228
016-229 [Cause] An error occurred in the software
016-230 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is
blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still is
not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
016-233 [Cause] An error occurred in the software.
14
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is
blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
016-234 [Cause] An error occurred in the Authentication feature of the machine.
016-235 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is
blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still is
016-236
not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
016-237
016-238
016-239
435
14 Problem Solving
14
436
Error Code
Problem Solving
016-401 [Cause] The 802.1x authentication method cannot be processed.
[Remedy] Set the authentication method of the machine to the same
method as set for the authentication server.
016-402 [Cause] The authentication connection timed out.
[Remedy] Confirm the network connection and switch setting of the
authentication device physically connected to the machine via a
network, and check whether it is connected to the machine
correctly. 14
016-403 [Cause] The root certificate did not match.
[Remedy] Confirm the authentication server and store the root certificate of
the server certificate of the authentication server into the
machine.
If you cannot acquire the root certificate of the server certificate,
set [Server Certificate Verification] of [IEEE 802.1x Settings] to
[Disabled] on the touch screen.
016-404 [Cause] An internal error occurred.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
437
14 Problem Solving
client certificate.
z
If an SSL client certificate cannot be set on the machine, select
an option other than [EAP-TLS] in [Authentication Method].
016-407 [Cause] There is a problem with the customized program registered on
016-408 the machine.
[Remedy] Modify the customized program and install it again.
016-409
016-410
016-411
016-412
016-413 [Cause] After automatically obtained the IP address, the machine failed to
retrieve proxy server settings from the DHCP server.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
The default gateway setting
z
The subnet mask setting
z
The DNS server address settings
If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings,
there may be a network failure or a DNS server failure. Consult
your system administrator.
016-414 [Cause] A network error occurred.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z The LAN cable connection
If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings,
Problem Solving
disabled
If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings,
there may be a network failure. Consult your system
administrator.
016-450 [Cause] The SMB host name already exists.
[Remedy] Change the host name.
Refer to "Host Name" (P.179).
438
Error Code
Problem Solving
while, and then execute the operation again.
016-514 [Cause] An error occurred during processing of an XPS document.
[Remedy] If an error occurred while printing from a driver which supports
XPS, print from the application using another print driver (PCL,
etc.).
If an error occurred while direct printing an XPS document (such
as ContentsBridge Utility, E-mail, and Media Print - Text), print
016-515 [Cause]
using the print driver (PCL, etc.) from XPS Document Viewer.
There was insufficient memory during processing of an XPS
14
document.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z Set [Image Quality] to [Standard]
z Print using the print driver (PCL, etc.) from XPS Document
Viewer.
For more information on [Image Options], refer to the help of the print driver.
439
14 Problem Solving
to the machine.
016-524 [Cause] LDAP server SSL authentication error. The server certificate will
expire soon.
[Remedy] Change the SSL certificate of the LDAP server to a valid one. You
can clear this error by selecting [Disabled] for [LDAP - SSL / TLS
Communication] under [SSL / TLS Settings] on the machine;
however, note that selecting this option does not ensure the
14 validity of the LDAP server.
016-525 [Cause] LDAP server SSL authentication error. The server certificate has
expired.
[Remedy] Change the SSL certificate of the LDAP server to a valid one. You
can clear this error by selecting [Disabled] for [LDAP - SSL / TLS
Communication] under [SSL / TLS Settings] on the machine;
however, note that selecting this option does not ensure the
validity of the LDAP server.
440
Error Code
Problem Solving
016-535 [Cause] The specified file does not exist on the Remote Download server.
[Remedy] Confirm the file.
016-536 [Cause] An error occurred when accessing the DNS prior to connecting to
the Remote Download server.
[Remedy] Confirm the connection with the DNS. Also check whether the
Remote Download server name is registered to the DNS.
016-537 [Cause] Could not connect to the Remote Download server. The port of
the destination Remote Download server is not open.
[Remedy] Confirm the port in the network settings.
14
016-538 [Cause] An error occurred when writing the remote download file to the
hard disk. The file obtained from the Remote Download server
could not be written to the hard disk.
[Remedy] Confirm the amount of available space, and delete files that are
no longer required. Alternatively, replace the hard disk.
016-539 [Cause] Kerberos server authentication protocol error
[Remedy] An error occurred in the software. Contact our Customer Support
Center.
441
14 Problem Solving
442
Error Code
Problem Solving
Customer Support Center.
016-569 [Cause] Authentication Agent error
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
016-574 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC
service because the host or server name of the FTP server could
not be resolved when accessing the DNS server.
[Remedy] Confirm the connection to the DNS server. Check whether the
FTP server name is registered correctly on the DNS server. 14
016-575 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC
service because the DNS server address was not registered on
the machine.
[Remedy] Specify the correct DNS server address. Or, specify the
destination FTP server by using its IP address.
443
14 Problem Solving
z Check whether the specified file name can be used in the save
location.
z Check whether enough space is available in the save location.
016-583 [Cause] Failed to create the lock directory in the FTP server while
transferring data using FTP of the Scan to PC service.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z If the lock directory (*.LCK) exists in the destination, delete it
location.
z Confirm that the specified name is not duplicated in the save
location.
z
Check whether enough space is available in the save location.
444
Error Code
save location.
z
Check whether the same folder name exists in the save
location.
z Check whether enough space is available in the save location.
016-585 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC
service because files could not be deleted on the FTP server after
connection.
[Remedy] Confirm the access privilege for the FTP server.
016-586 [Cause] The machine failed to delete the lock directory while transferring
data using FTP of the Scan to PC service.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z
Confirm the access privilege for the server.
z If the lock directory (*.LCK) exists in the destination, delete it
Problem Solving
016-593 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC
service because an internal error occurred after connection to the
FTP server.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
016-594 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC
016-595 service because a network error occurred.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
14
016-596 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC
service because a network error occurred.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
016-597 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using FTP of the Scan to PC
service because a network error occurred.
[Remedy] Stop all access from the other devices, and then execute the
operation again. If the error still is not resolved, contact our
Customer Support Center.
445
14 Problem Solving
For more information on [Quality/File Size], refer to "5 Scan" > "E-mail Options/
Filing Options" > "Quality/File Size (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio
When Scanning)" in the User Guide.
For more information on [Maximum Split Count], refer to "Maximum Split Count"
(P.218).
016-700 [Cause] The job was suspended because the number of the digits for the
Secure Print or Charge Print passcode set on the print driver was
less than the value specified in [Minimum Passcode Length for
Stored Job] on the machine.
[Remedy] On the print driver, set the passcode string equal to or longer than
the value specified in [Minimum Passcode Length for Stored Job].
016-701 [Cause] Unable to process print data because of insufficient memory.
[Remedy] Stop unnecessary ports or delete unnecessary data to free up
disk space.
016-702 [Cause] Unable to process print data because of insufficient print page
buffer.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z Set [Image Quality] to [Standard].
z
Add memory.
For more information on the [Image Quality], refer to the help of the print driver.
For more information about memory, refer to "Allocate Memory" (P.192).
016-703 [Cause] The machine received e-mail which specified an invalid folder
number.
[Remedy] For errors occurring during fax or Internet fax transmission:
Contact our Customer Support Center.
14 [Remedy] Delete unnecessary files from the folder, and save the file.
Refer to "6 Send from Folder" > "Checking/Operating Files in a Folder" in the User
Guide.
446
Error Code
(optional).
If the HDD Extension Kit (optional) is installed:
z
Select [Installed] under [Hard Disk] on the [Options] tab of the
print driver.
If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support
Center.
016-706 [Cause] The hard disk space is insufficient because the number of Secure
Print users exceeded the maximum limit.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary files from the machine, and delete
unnecessary Secure Print users.
For more information on deleting users for Secure Print files, refer to "10 Job
Status" > "Printing and Deleting Stored Jobs", and on folders, refer to "6 Send from
Folder" > "Checking/Operating Files in a Folder" in the User Guide.
016-707 [Cause] Unable to print with the Sample Set feature because the HDD
Extension Kit (optional) is not installed.
[Remedy] To use the Sample Set feature, the HDD Extension Kit (optional)
must be installed. Contact our Customer Support Center
Problem Solving
016-708 [Cause] Unable to annotate because of insufficient hard disk space.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary data from the hard disk to free up disk space.
016-709 [Cause] An error occurred during print processing.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
016-710 [Cause] Unable to register the Delayed Print document because the HDD
Extension Kit (optional) is not installed.
[Remedy] To use the Delayed Print feature, the HDD Extension Kit
(optional) must be installed.
14
016-711 [Cause] The upper limit for the e-mail size has been exceeded.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures, and then try sending the
mail again.
z
Reduce the number of pages of the document.
z Lower the resolution with [Resolution].
z
Reduce the magnification with [Reduce / Enlarge].
z Ask your system administrator to increase the value set for
447
14 Problem Solving
14 [Remedy] For 1), when printing by the Auto Paper selection, set one of the
paper types to other than [Auto Paper Off] in [Paper Type
Priority].
For 2), confirm the print data.
Refer to "Paper Tray Priority" (P.145).
016-722 [Cause] The staple position specified is not supported by the machine, or
the paper size specified is not supported by the finisher.
[Remedy] Confirm the staple position and the paper size, and try printing
again.
448
Error Code
Problem Solving
destination e-mail address) when e-mail is sent.
2) DNS server was unable to resolve the Internet address (the
string after "@") by the DNS server when e-mail is sent.
[Remedy] For 1), confirm the e-mail address.
For 2), confirm the DNS server address.
016-735 [Cause] Attempted to print [Job Template List] while updating the job
template.
[Remedy] Retry printing after waiting for a while. 14
016-738 [Cause] Unsupported paper size was specified when specifying booklet
creation with PostScript (optional).
[Remedy] Specify a paper size supported for booklet creation, and try
printing again.
016-739 [Cause] Used an unsupported combination of document size and paper
size when specifying booklet creation with PostScript (optional).
[Remedy] Specify a combination of document size and paper size
supported for booklet creation, and try printing again.
449
14 Problem Solving
z Increase memory.
016-750 [Cause] The machine received a printing job ticket with a PDF, an XPS
from an application (such as ContentsBridge) that allows direct
transmissions of files, but the printing job ticket data had a
grammar or print instruction unsupported by the machine.
[Remedy] Check whether you are correctly using the application (such as
ContentsBridge) and whether the print instruction was correct.
If your application usage and print instruction are correct, check
14 with the application manufacturer that sent the print job for
operations of the application.
If the error still is not resolved, have the Configuration Report, the
Job History Report, and the print data with the printing job ticket
ready, and contact our Customer Support Center.
450
Error Code
Problem Solving
this service.
[Remedy] Consult your system administrator.
016-760 [Cause] An error occurred during PostScript (optional) processing.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z Set [Image Quality] to [High Speed].
For more information on [Image Quality], refer to the help of the print driver. For
more information on memory, refer to "Allocate Memory" (P.192).
14
016-761 [Cause] An error occurred during image processing.
[Remedy] Set [Image Quality] to [Standard] and execute the operation
again. If the error still is not resolved, set [Print Page Mode] to
[On].
016-762 [Cause] The specified printer language is not installed on the machine.
[Remedy] For [USB] in [Print Mode] under [Port Settings], specify correct
printer language.
016-763 [Cause] Unable to connect to the POP server.
[Remedy] Confirm the POP server IP address set on the machine.
016-764 [Cause] Unable to connect to the SMTP server.
[Remedy] Consult the SMTP server administrator.
451
14 Problem Solving
z
Set the correct date and time on the machine.
016-777 [Cause] A hard disk error occurred during image processing.
[Remedy] The hard disk may be defective. To replace the hard disk, contact
our Customer Support Center.
016-778 [Cause] The conversion processing of the scanned image was interrupted
14 because of insufficient disk space.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary data from the hard disk to free up disk space.
016-779 [Cause] An error occurred during scanned image conversion processing.
[Remedy] Retry scanning. If using large-size paper such as A3 with
[Resolution] set to [600 dpi], specify [Resolution] to [400 dpi] or
lower in [Layout Adjustment]. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
016-780 [Cause] A hard disk error occurred during scanned image conversion
processing.
[Remedy] The hard disk may be defective. To replace the hard disk, contact
our Customer Support Center.
452
Error Code
z Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen
Problem Solving
016-790 [Cause] Unable to send an e-mail with Split Send because of exceeding
the maximum number of splits allowed.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z Reduce the file size for [Quality/File Size].
z
Increase the value for [Maximum Split Count].
For more information on [Quality/File Size], refer to "5 Scan" > "E-mail Options/
Filing Options" > "Quality/File Size (Specifying an Image Compression Ratio
When Scanning)" in the User Guide.
For more information on [Maximum Split Count], refer to "Maximum Split Count"
14
(P.218).
016-792 [Cause] Failed to acquire the specified job history when printing a Job
Report.
[Remedy] The specified job history does not exist.
016-794 [Cause] Media is not inserted correctly.
[Remedy] Check whether the media is inserted correctly.
016-795 [Cause] An error occurred when reading the data on the media.
016-796 [Remedy] On a computer, confirm the content recorded on the media.
016-797
453
14 Problem Solving
454
Error Code
Problem Solving
018-500 [Cause] The certificate does not exist in the authentication server.
[Remedy] Configure the server certificate. Or, cancel authentication.
018-501 [Cause] Communications with the CA server set in the machine failed.
[Remedy] Check the network connection and the address of the CA server.
018-502 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service because computers allowed to login are restricted.
[Remedy] Confirm the property information for the specified user, and check
whether the computers allowed to login to the server are
restricted.
14
018-503 [Cause] Communications with the CA server set in the machine failed.
018-504 [Remedy] Execute the authentication operation again.
455
14 Problem Solving
018-506 [Cause] Communications with the CA server set in the machine failed.
[Remedy] Execute the authentication operation again.
018-507 [Cause] The authentication failed because the user name or password
Problem Solving
14
456
Error Code
Problem Solving
Note • For information on how to change the access
privilege settings on other version of Mac OS, consult
your system administrator or the official website of
Apple Inc.
018-547 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service because the number of users logging into the SMB server
exceeded the limit when logging in to the SMB server.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z
Confirm how many users can access the shared folder.
z Check whether the number of login users have exceeded the
14
limit.
018-556 [Cause] An error occurred on the HTTP server.
[Remedy] Check whether you can access the drive or directory which is
specified as the destination HTTP server for the scanned
documents is accessible, and then execute the operation again. If
the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support
Center.
018-557 [Cause] Invalid characters are used in the file name which is specified as
the destination to transfer the scanned documents.
[Remedy] Specify the file name with the authorized characters.
457
14 Problem Solving
018-561 [Cause] An error occurred during communication with the HTTP server.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z The destination HTTP server for the scanned documents is
018-562 [Cause] An error occurred during communication with the HTTP server.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z The destination HTTP server for the scanned documents is
018-563 [Cause] An error occurred during communication with the HTTP server.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z
The destination HTTP server for the scanned documents is
accessible from your computer.
z The HTTP server settings
018-564 [Cause] An error occurred during communication with the HTTP server.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z The destination HTTP server is registered on the DNS server.
z
The address of the DNS server is set correctly.
Problem Solving
018-565 [Cause] An error occurred during communication with the HTTP server.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z The proxy server name set in the machine is registered on the
DNS server.
z
The connection with the DNS server is established.
z The address of the DNS server is set correctly.
018-566 [Cause] An error occurred during communication with the HTTP server.
14 [Remedy] Check the followings:
z The network cable connection
458
Error Code
z
The HTTP server name
z
The HTTP server path name
018-569 [Cause] The SSL server certificate may have a problem.
[Remedy] 1) Check whether the destination HTTP server for the scanned
document is accessible by PC.
2) Check whether the SSL server certificate is registered on the
HTTP server.
3) Check whether the SSL server certificate is valid.
Check the followings:
- the certificate is unexpired
- the time set on the machine is correct
- the certificate is not on the discard list
4) Check the certificate path to the SSL server certificate, and
import the required CA certificate.
5) If the SSL server certificated is not registered on the HTTP
server, disable the [Verify Remote Server Certificate] setting.
018-570 [Cause] A client certificate authentication error occurred on the HTTP
server.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z The destination HTTP server for the scanned document is
accessible by PC.
z The SSL client certificate is registered on the machine.
server.
018-571 [Cause] An internal error occurred.
[Remedy] Perform the same operation again. If the problem persists,
contact our Customer Support Center.
018-572 [Cause] The specified context name contains invalid characters.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified context name is correct.
018-573 [Cause] The specified connection name contains invalid characters.
Problem Solving
[Remedy] Check whether the specified connection name is correct.
018-574 [Cause] The specified volume name contains invalid characters.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified volume name is correct.
018-575 [Cause] The specified user name or password contains invalid characters.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified user name or password is correct.
018-576 [Cause] The specified path name contains invalid characters.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified path name is correct. 14
018-577 [Cause] The specified file name contains invalid characters.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified file name is correct.
018-578 [Cause] The specified server or tree name does not exist.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z The network cable connection on the machine
459
14 Problem Solving
z The login user does not have Create rights to create a file.
z
The login user does not have Access rights to the directory.
z
The login user does not have Read rights to the file.
z
The login user does not have Write rights to the file.
z
The login user does not have Delete rights of the directory or
file.
z
Made a delete request to the directories or files but all of them
are read-only.
z
Made a delete request to the directories or files but some of
them are read-only.
[Remedy] 1) Check whether the NetWare server is accessible by PC.
2) Check the user has the following rights.
- Open rights to the file
- Create rights to a file
- Access rights to the directory
- Write rights to the file
- Read rights to the file
Problem Solving
460
Error Code
z
Login password
z Volume name
z Context name
Problem Solving
or the same server from multiple machines.
2) If the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support
Center.
018-591 [Cause] When the machine was connected to the server and the name of
a file or folder on the server was determined, the suffix of the
name of the file or folder exceeded the limit value.
[Remedy] Change the file name or forwarding destination folder of the scan
server. Also try moving or deleting the files within the forwarding
destination folder.
14
018-592 [Cause] Failed to delete a scan lock folder.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
1) If an existing lock directory (*.LCK) remains in the forwarding
destination, delete it manually, and then execute the job again.
2) Confirm that there is a folder with the name specified.
018-593 [Cause] Failed to create the scan lock folder.
[Remedy] If an existing lock directory (*.LCK) remains in the forwarding
destination, delete it manually, and then execute the job again.
461
14 Problem Solving
462
Error Code
Problem Solving
018-713 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the
Address Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result
Message No "13" (confidentiality required) for Address Book
query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the operational status of
the server.
018-714 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the
Address Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result
Message No "14" (SASL bind in progress) for Address Book
14
query.
[Remedy] Retry after waiting for a while. If the error still is not resolved,
consult your network administrator.
018-716 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the
Address Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result
Message No "16" (no such attribute) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has an attribute problem. Have your network
administrator confirm the LDAP server status.
463
14 Problem Solving
464
Error Code
Problem Solving
[Remedy] The LDAP server has a security problem. Confirm your
authentication user name and password to cancel an incorrect
login name. If the error still is not resolved, have your network
administrator confirm the authentication settings on the LDAP
server.
018-750 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the
Address Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result
Message No "50" (insufficient access) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The LDAP server has a security problem. Have your network
14
administrator confirm the access rights for the LDAP server.
018-751 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the
Address Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result
Message No "51" (busy) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] The service has a problem. Retry after waiting for a while. If the
error still is not resolved, consult your network administrator.
465
14 Problem Solving
466
Error Code
z
If the network cable connection has no problem, confirm the
active status of the target server.
z
Check whether the server name has been correctly set for
[LDAP Server / Directory Service Settings] under [Remote
Authentication / Directory Service].
018-782 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the
Address Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result
Message No "82" (program error or SASL authentication error) for
Address Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server status.
018-783 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the
Address Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result
Message No "83" (encoding error) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server status.
Problem Solving
018-784 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the
Address Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result
Message No "84" (decoding error) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server status.
018-785 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the
Address Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result
Message No "85" (timeout) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Change the search conditions/start position to narrow the search
range, and execute the operation again. If the error still is not 14
resolved, consult your network administrator.
018-786 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the
Address Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result
Message No "86" (unknown authentication method) for Address
Book query.
[Remedy] Have your network administrator confirm the LDAP server status.
018-787 [Cause] An LDAP server protocol error occurred as a result of the
Address Book operation. The server returned RFC2251 Result
Message No "87" (search filter error) for Address Book query.
[Remedy] Confirm the search conditions set on Address Book. If the error
still is not resolved, consult your network administrator.
467
14 Problem Solving
468
Error Code
Problem Solving
021-501 [Cause] The communication with the EP system using internet failed.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is
blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still is
not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-502 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to EP system via the Internet.
There is a problem with the address of the EP proxy server name.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is
blank, and then switch on the machine power. Execute the
operation again. If the error still is not resolved, contact our 14
Customer Support Center.
469
14 Problem Solving
z
The default gateway setting
z
The subnet mask setting
If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings,
there may be a network failure or the proxy server settings may
be changed or failed. Consult your system administrator.
If the network works normally but the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
021-504 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to EP system via the Internet.
There is a problem with the address of the EP proxy server name.
[Remedy] Check the followings:
z LAN cable connection
z
The subnet mask setting
If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings,
there may be a network failure or the proxy server settings may
be changed or failed. Consult your system administrator.
If the network works normally but the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
021-505 [Cause] The SSL / TLS communication with the EP server failed.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is
blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still is
not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-506 [Cause] SSL Certificate for the EP server is incorrect.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is
blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still is
not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
021-507 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to EP system via the Internet.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is
blank, and then switch on the machine power. Execute the
Problem Solving
14 If the error still is not resolved after checking the above settings,
there may be a network failure or the proxy server settings may
be changed or failed. Consult your system administrator.
If the network works normally but the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
021-509 [Cause] An error occurred while communicating with the EP server.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is
blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still is
not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
470
Error Code
Problem Solving
Center.
021-528
021-529 [Cause] The machine attempted to upgrade the software of EP system via
the Internet, but the latest software version is already installed.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
021-530 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to EP system via the Internet.
021-531 [Remedy] Wait for a while, and then execute the operation again. If the error
still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
14
021-532 [Cause] The machine attempted to upgrade the software of EP system via
021-533 the Internet, but the software upgrade failed.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
021-534
021-535
021-700 [Cause] The USB cable is unplugged or the USB interface may be out of
order.
[Remedy] Confirm that the USB cable is connected and switch off the
machine power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and
then switch on the machine power. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
471
14 Problem Solving
14
472
Error Code
Problem Solving
024-375
024-376 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is
blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
024-700 [Cause] The memory capacity or hard disk required to use the optional
feature is not installed. 14
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, and then switch it on again after
the touch screen goes out. If the error still is not resolved, contact
our Customer Support Center.
024-701 [Cause] The specified paper type is not compatible with the Face Up/
Down Output setting selected.
[Remedy] Specify a paper type that is compatible with the Face Up/Down
setting.
024-702 [Cause] Paper jam occurred while [When Paper Jam Occurs] is set to
[Delete Job] in [Print Service Settings].
[Remedy] Remove the jammed paper, and then try printing again.
473
14 Problem Solving
14 026-703 [Cause]
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
Authentication is canceled when adding documents during faxing
or scanning.
[Remedy] Authenticate when adding documents.
026-704 [Cause] An error occurred during processing DocuWorks documents.
[Remedy] Print using the print driver (PCL, etc.) from DocuWorks Viewer.
474
Error Code
Problem Solving
z
026-711 [Cause] Exceeded the maximum size allowed for a multi-page file when
scanning.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
1) Reduce the resolution (scan quality) of the scan parameters
and execute the operation again.
2) Reduce the number of document pages and then execute the
operation again.
The maximum size is 2 GB for TIFF, XPS, and PDF, and 1 GB for
XDW.
14
026-712 [Cause] An error occurred while operating from CentreWare Internet
Services.
[Remedy] Retry after waiting for a while.
026-718 [Cause] Incompatible print parameters are used. The combination of the
specified features such as Document Size, Paper Size, Paper
Tray, 2 sided printing, and Output Tray is incompatible.
[Remedy] Confirm the print data, and try printing again.
026-719 [Cause] An error occurred while operating the Store to USB service.
[Remedy] Wait for a while and execute the operation again. If the error still
is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
475
14 Problem Solving
14 027-442
If the problem persists, contact our Customer Support Center.
[Cause] The IP address of IPv6 already exists.
[Remedy] Change the [Auto Stateless Address 1] for IPv6 on the machine,
or the IP address of IPv6 on the network device, to remove the
duplication of addresses.
027-443 [Cause] The IP address of IPv6 already exists.
[Remedy] Change the [Auto Stateless Address 2] for IPv6 on the machine,
or the IP address of IPv6 on the network device, to remove the
duplication of addresses.
476
Error Code
Problem Solving
027-513 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service because access to the SMB server was not permitted.
[Remedy] For information about settings, consult your system administrator,
or the official website of Microsoft Corporation or Apple Japan,
Inc.
027-514 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service because an error has been occurred between the SMB
server and the DNS server.
[Remedy] Check the following conditions: 14
z The SMB server is connected to the DNS server.
027-515 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service because an error has been occurred.
[Remedy] Take the following measures:
z Set the DNS server address.
477
14 Problem Solving
14
478
Error Code
z
Invalid characters are used in the save location or the file name.
z
Because the specified save location has the Distributed File
System (DFS) settings, it is linked to another shared folder.
[Remedy] Take one of the following measures:
z Check whether the save location is correct
z
Check whether the specified file name can be used on the SMB
server.
z
Confirm the Distributed File System (DFS) settings with your
system administrator.
To confirm the settings, execute the following procedures:
1. Select [Start] > [Programs] > [Administrative Tools] >
[Distributed File System] on the SMB server.
2. Select the specified save location from the left side frame of the
[Distributed File System] window, and then confirm the target
information displayed on the right side frame of the window.
3. Specify the SMB server, shared name, and save location
based on the information you confirmed in step 2.
027-520 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service because the file name or folder name could not be
retrieved.
[Remedy] Confirm the access privilege to the SMB server.
027-521 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service because the suffix of the name of the file or folder
exceeded the limit value.
[Remedy] Change the file name or forwarding destination folder of the scan
server. Or, try moving or deleting the files within the forwarding
destination folder.
027-522 [Cause] During forwarding using SMB of the Scan to PC service, the
scanned image file could not be created on the SMB server
because of one of the following reasons:
The specified file name already exists.
Problem Solving
z
z
The specified file name exists as a directory.
z Invalid characters are used in the file name.
another user.
z Check whether the specified file name has been used for
14
another file or folder.
027-523 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service because a folder could not be created on the SMB server.
The specified folder already exists.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified name is being used for another file
or folder on the SMB server.
027-524 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service because a folder could not be created on the SMB server.
The specified folder already exists.
[Remedy] Check whether the specified name is being used for another file
or folder on the SMB server.
479
14 Problem Solving
z
The specified file name is being used as a directory.
[Remedy] Check whether the file is not being used by another user at the
specified save location.
027-526 [Cause] The machine failed to delete the lock directory on the SMB server
while transferring data using SMB of the Scan to PC service.
[Remedy] If the lock directory (*.LCK) exists in the destination, delete it
manually, and then execute the operation again.
027-527 [Cause] During forwarding using SMB of the Scan to PC service, a folder
could not be deleted from the SMB server because of one of the
following reasons:
z
The file does not exist.
z
The directory is not empty.
z The specified directory name does not exist.
[Remedy] Check whether the file is not being used by another user at the
specified save location.
027-528 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service because no space is available at the save location on the
SMB server.
[Remedy] Check whether the save location has free space.
027-529 [Cause] The machine failed to transfer data using SMB of the Scan to PC
service because an unexpected error has been received from the
SMB server, or an unexpected internal error has occurred on the
machine.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
027-530 [Cause] There are duplicate file names.
[Do Not Save] is set as a handling method when names are
duplicated for scanned files.
[Remedy] Set the process to be executed when file names are duplicate to
other than [Do Not Save].
Problem Solving
027-531 [Cause] Detected an incorrect filing policy (when add was selected) after
connecting to the server.
[Remedy] When [Rename New File] is set as the process to be executed
when file names are duplicate, confirm that the file format is not
multi-page.
027-532 [Cause] Failed to access the NEXTNAME.DAT file.
[Remedy] When [Rename New File] is set as the process to be executed
14 when file names are duplicate, check the NEXTNAME.DAT file is
correct.
027-533 [Cause] An internal error occurred.
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
027-543 [Cause] The SMB server (NetBIOS) name is invalid.
[Remedy] Check whether the server name of the SMB server is correct.
480
Error Code
Problem Solving
[Domains] > [Users] from the left side frame of the [Active
Directory Users and Computers] window, to display the user
information.
3. Right-click the target user from the right side frame of the
[Active Directory Domains and Trusts] window to select
[Properties].
4. Select the [Account] tab in the [User Properties] window, and
confirm the user name of [User Log On Name (Prior to
Windows 2000)]. 14
027-549 [Cause] SMB protocol error
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
027-564 [Cause] SMB protocol error. The SMB server was not found.
[Remedy] Check whether the connection between the authentication server
and the machine has been established via a network.
For example, confirm the following conditions:
z Network cable connection
z TCP/IP settings
z Connection via Port 137 (UDP), Port 138 (UDP), and Port 139
(TCP)
481
14 Problem Solving
027-590 [Cause] SMB protocol error. The user account has expired.
[Remedy] Obtain a valid user account from your system administrator. Or,
ask your system administrator to extend the account expiration
date.
027-591 [Cause] SMB protocol error. Users are restricted. A blank password is
invalid.
[Remedy] Set the password for the user.
482
Error Code
Problem Solving
been altered on its transmission route.
[Remedy] Inform this error to the sender, and ask the sender to send the e-
mail again.
027-714 [Cause] The received e-mail has been discarded because the address in
its From field differed from the mail address in the S/MIME
signature mail.
[Remedy] Inform the sender that the mail addresses differ, and ask the
sender to send the e-mail again. 14
027-715 [Cause] The received S/MIME certificate has not been registered on the
machine, or has not been set for use on the machine.
[Remedy] Import the sender's S/MIME certificate to the machine, or change
settings to use the S/MIME certificate on the machine if the S/
MIME certificate has already been registered.
027-716 [Cause] The received S/MIME certificate has been discarded because the
certificate was unreliable.
[Remedy] Ask the sender to send the e-mail with a reliable S/MIME
certificate attached.
483
14 Problem Solving
484
Error Code
Problem Solving
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary data from the hard disk to free up disk space.
027-743 [Cause] The settings of the pool server for job templates is not correct.
[Remedy] Confirm whether the settings of the pool server for job templates
are correct.
027-744 [Cause] Problem with the domain name of the pool server for job
templates.
[Remedy] Confirm the DNS server connection and check whether the
domain name is registered on the DNS server. 14
027-745 [Cause] DNS server address is not registered on the machine.
[Remedy] Register the DNS server address on the machine or set the
address of the pool server for job templates as IP address.
027-746 [Cause] The protocol setting of the pool server for job templates is not
correct.
[Remedy] Enable a proper port.
027-750 [Cause] Attempted to execute a fax, a print, or an Internet fax
transmission to the scanned document.
[Remedy] The Fax, Print, or Internet Fax features are unavailable for
scanned documents. Set the job flow correctly.
485
14 Problem Solving
z Set the default values to the mandatory fields of the job flow.
027-753 [Cause] 1) Attempted to execute the service while the port necessary for
the job flow is either deactivated or disabled.
2) Attempted to execute a job flow to send e-mail using the
Encryption or Digital Signature feature while S/MIME
communication is disabled.
[Remedy] For 1), have your system administrator confirm the port status.
For 2), enable S/MIME communication, or modify the job flow so
that e-mail is sent by not using the Encryption or Digital Signature
feature.
027-754 [Cause] [DocuWorks Signature] or [PDF Signature] is set inconsistency in
the job flow.
[Remedy] Check the DocuWorks and PDF signatures for both the system
data settings (machine's current settings) and the executed job
flow settings. If these settings differ, coordinate them.
027-761 [Cause] An on-demand print job was sent to the machine using the Web
Applications feature, but the time interval from receiving the print
job until starting the print processing exceeded the time limit
specified on the machine.
[Remedy] When multiple documents are to be printed, reduce the number of
documents, and then execute the operation again. If the error still
is not resolved, enter the System Administration mode, and then
select [Tools] > [Common Service Settings] > [Machine Clock/
Timers] > [Print-On-Demand Duration], and specify a larger value
or "0".
When on-demand printing is executed using the Web Application
feature, the print processing time is limited. Consequently if many
documents are to be printed or if print processing takes time, a
timeout may occur before all the data are received. To resolve
this problem, change the time limit value according to the
Problem Solving
software failure
14 z
Abnormal change to the job ticket because of a bug on the
sender's remote server
z Abnormal change to the job ticket because of network trouble
[Remedy] Execute the print job again. If the error still is not resolved,
contact our Customer Support Center.
486
Error Code
properly.
z
Check whether there is no network failure.
z
Connect the network cable securely.
z
Confirm the settings in the machine.
027-770 [Cause] The print job has a problem.
[Remedy] Submit a print job again.
027-771 [Cause] The hard disk of the server connected to the machine is full.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary data from the server.
027-772 [Cause] An error occurred during communication with the SMTP server.
[Remedy] Use ASCII characters to modify the host name that has been
specified under [Tools] > [Connectivity & Network Setup] >
[Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name]. If the error still is not
resolved, confirm with your network administrator whether the
SMTP server supports the HELO command.
027-773 [Cause] An error occurred during communication with the SMTP server.
[Remedy] Wait for a while, and then execute the operation again.
027-774 [Cause] The specified e-mail address contains unsupported characters.
[Remedy] Specify the e-mail address using only ASCII characters.
027-775 [Cause] Too many destination addresses have been specified.
[Remedy] Reduce the number of destination addresses. If the error still is
not resolved, confirm with your network administrator whether the
SMTP server supports the EHLO command.
027-776 [Cause] An error occurred during communication with the SMTP server.
[Remedy] Use ASCII characters to modify the host name that has been
specified under [Tools] > [Connectivity & Network Setup] >
[Machine's E-mail Address/Host Name]. If the error still is not
resolved, confirm with your network administrator whether the
SMTP server supports the EHLO command.
027-777 [Cause] The destination SMTP server does not support SMTP-AUTH.
Problem Solving
[Remedy] Set [E-mail Send Authentication] to [Off] under [Tools] >
[Connectivity & Network Setup] > [Outgoing/Incoming E-mail
Settings] > [SMTP Server Settings].
027-778 [Cause] The destination SMTP server does not support the SMTP-AUTH
system set on the machine.
[Remedy] Confirm the authentication type supported by the SMTP server
with your network administrator. The machine supports the
following authentication types: PLAIN (plain text) authentication,
LOGIN (BASE64) authentication, and CRAM-MD5 (challenge- 14
response).
027-779 [Cause] Failed to authenticate the SMTP server.
[Remedy] Confirm the login name and password set to SMTP-AUTH.
027-796 [Cause] The received e-mail was discarded because no documents were
attached to it. (The machine is set to print attached documents
only.)
[Remedy] To print the mail body or header information also, change settings
in the [Properties] screen of CentreWare Internet Services.
Refer to "11 Computer Operations" > "E-mail Printing" in the User Guide.
487
14 Problem Solving
488
Error Code
Problem Solving
[Remedy] Execute the operation again. If the error still is not resolved,
confirm the condition of the other machine.
033-518 [Cause] The other machine cannot correspond to reception of SUB.
[Remedy] Check whether the other machine can correspond to reception of
SUB, and execute the operation again.
033-519 [Cause] The other machine cannot correspond to reception of SEP.
[Remedy] Check whether the other machine can correspond to reception of
SEP, and execute the operation again. 14
033-520 [Cause] The other machine cannot correspond to reception of PWD/SID.
[Remedy] Check whether the other machine can correspond to reception of
PWD/SID, and execute the operation again.
033-521 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Confirm the condition of the machine (memory is full, paper has
run out, or other conditions), and execute the operation again.
033-522 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Ask the sender to execute the operation again.
489
14 Problem Solving
490
Error Code
Problem Solving
password for receiving faxes on the other machine.
[Remedy] If necessary, check whether the correct machine password has
been instructed to the other machine.
033-557 [Cause] The number of services or of recipients exceeds the maximum
limit.
[Remedy] Wait until the number of jobs awaiting transmission decreases, or
reduce the number of recipients, and then send again.
033-558 [Cause] The machine is set to reject faxes without a remote ID, and a 14
remote ID was not sent from the other machine.
[Remedy] Ask the sender to set a remote ID. If necessary, set the machine
to receive even when a remote ID is not sent.
033-559 [Cause] The authentication ID is incorrect.
[Remedy] An error occurred during operation of the maintenance system by
Fuji Xerox. When the communication line is available, contact our
Customer Support Center.
033-560 [Cause] An error occurred during remote maintenance work.
033-561 [Remedy] This is an error occurring during remote maintenance work by Fuji
Xerox. No measure is required.
033-562
491
14 Problem Solving
492
Error Code
Problem Solving
033-731 [Cause] The printing of the received fax document was interrupted.
[Remedy] The auto print processing of the received fax document was
interrupted by a manual print operation. No measure is required.
033-732 [Cause] An error occurred while connecting to EP system.
[Remedy] This is an error occurring during maintenance work by Fuji Xerox.
No measure is required.
033-733 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is 14
blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still is
not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
033-734 [Cause] Because a report job was instructed while preparing to print a
received fax, the printing of the received fax is temporarily
suspended.
[Remedy] No measure is required.
033-735 [Cause] An error occurred during fax transmission.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is
blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the error still is
not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
493
14 Problem Solving
494
Error Code
Problem Solving
User Guide.
072-310 [Cause] An error occurred in Tray 2.
072-311 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is
blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
073-310
073-311
[Cause] An error occurred in Tray 3.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is
14
blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
074-310 [Cause] An error occurred in Tray 4.
074-311 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is
blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
495
14 Problem Solving
the toner cartridge [M] (magenta), and then insert them again. If
the error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support
Center.
092-320 [Cause] Density of Cyan color is low. Drum cartridge or toner cartridge
may not be set properly.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is
blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
14 message is displayed again, pull out the drum cartridge [R4] and
the toner cartridge [C] (cyan), and then insert them again. If the
error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
092-321 [Cause] Density of Black color is low. Drum cartridge or toner cartridge
may not be set properly.
[Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is
blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, pull out the drum cartridge [R4] and
the toner cartridge [K] (black), and then insert them again. If the
error still is not resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
496
Error Code
Problem Solving
14
497
14 Problem Solving
116-341 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is
blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center.
116-342 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
[Remedy] Contact our Customer Support Center.
14
498
Error Code
Problem Solving
116-376
116-377
116-378
116-379
116-380
116-381
116-382
116-383
14
116-384
116-385
116-386 [Cause] The fax cable is not connected correctly.
[Remedy] Connect the cable securely, and then switch off the machine
power, make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch
on the machine power. If the error still is not resolved, contact our
Customer Support Center.
499
14 Problem Solving
memory.
[Remedy] Stop unnecessary ports or delete unnecessary data to free up
disk space.
116-738 [Cause] Size and orientation of specified form do not match the paper to
be printed.
[Remedy] Load papers that match the specified form, and try printing again.
116-739 [Cause] Form or logo data cannot be registered because of insufficient
14 memory or disk space for form / logo data.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary data or increase free space on memory.
116-740 [Cause] A numerical value operation error occurred because a value
exceeding the value limit of the machine was used in the print
data.
[Remedy] Check the print data.
116-741 [Cause] Form cannot be registered because you have reached the
maximum number of form registration.
[Remedy] Delete unnecessary forms. The maximum number of form
registration is 2048.
500
Error Code
Problem Solving
116-777
116-778
116-780 [Cause] There is a problem with the document attached to the received e-
mail.
[Remedy] Check the attached document.
116-790 [Cause] Probable causes are as follows:
1) If the operator cancelled printing a document that was received
using the Store Fax - Local Folder or Store Internet Fax - Local
14
Folder feature:
The first set of the document is not stapled.
2) For causes other than 1)
No set of the document is stapled.
[Remedy] For 1), manually staple the first set of the document. Or, do not
cancel printing of a document that is received using the Store Fax
- Local Folder or Store Internet Fax - Local Folder feature.
For 2), check whether the staple position has been correctly
specified, and try printing again.
117-311 [Cause] Data Security Kit is not attached correctly.
[Remedy] Insert Data Security Kit into the correct slot.
501
14 Problem Solving
502
Error Code
Problem Solving
123-377
123-379
123-380
123-381
123-382
123-383
123-384
123-389
14
123-390
123-392
123-393
123-395
123-396
123-397
123-398
123-399
503
14 Problem Solving
124-346
124-347
124-348
124-349
124-350
124-351
14 124-352
124-353
124-360
124-361
124-362
124-363
124-372
124-373
124-374
124-380
124-381
504
Error Code
Problem Solving
[Remedy] Disconnect the print server cable, and then securely insert the
cable into the connector. Switch off the machine power, make
sure that the touch screen is blank, and then switch on the
machine power
127-310 [Cause] An error occurred in the machine.
127-311 [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is
blank, and then switch on the machine power. If the same
127-312
127-313
message is displayed again, contact our Customer Support
Center. 14
127-314
127-315
127-320
127-337
127-342
127-353
127-354
127-396
127-398
127-399
505
14 Problem Solving
document:
plain paper, bond paper, recycled paper, user-defined custom
Problem Solving
paper.
z Confirm the settings by selecting [Tools] > [Fax Service
506
Error Code
Other Errors
This section describes the remedies when the following messages are displayed.
Error
Cause and Remedy
Message
A fault has [Cause] An error occurred.
occurred. [Remedy] Switch off the machine power, make sure that the touch screen is
Switch off the blank, and then switch the machine power on again.
machine. If the message persists, record the content displayed for [(xxx-
(xxx-yyy)
yyy)]. Then immediately switch the main power and power off,
make sure that the touch screen is blank, and then contact our
Customer Support Center.
Completed with [Cause] An error occurred, and the operation terminated abnormally.
an error. [Remedy] Execute the operation again.
(xxx-yyy)
A fault has [Cause] An auto-recoverable internal error occurred, and the machine
occurred. The restarted automatically.
machine has [Remedy] Select [Close]. to use the machine normally. If the error still is not
rebooted. resolved, contact our Customer Support Center.
Select [Close].
If the problem
persists, call for
service.
(xxx-yyy)
Problem Solving
14
507
14 Problem Solving
Paper Jams
When a paper jam occurred, the machine stops and an alarm beeps. A message is also
displayed on the touch screen. Follow the instructions displayed to remove the jammed
paper.
Gently remove the paper to avoid it to be torn. If the paper is torn, remove all the torn
pieces, making sure that none remain inside the machine.
If a paper jam message appears again after you have cleared the paper jam, another
paper jam may be occurred in some other parts of the machine. Clear this by following
the message.
When the paper jam is cleared, printing is automatically resumed from the point when
the paper jam occurred.
If you were during copying, press the <Start> button to resume the copying from the
point when the paper jam occurred.
WARNING
If you need to pull out a tray to remove paper jam, contact your local Fuji Xerox
representative. Do not pull out a tray, otherwise it may cause injuries.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to remove a paper jammed deeply inside the product, particularly a
paper wrapped around a Fusing Unit or a heat roller. Otherwise, it may cause injuries
or burns. Switch off the product promptly and contact your local Fuji Xerox represen-
tative.
This section describes how to clear a paper jam occurring in the following locations.
The following shows the reference section for the procedures to clear a paper jam in
each location.
Paper Jams in Trays 1 to 4 ........................................................................................................509
Paper Jams in Tray 5 (MSI) ......................................................................................................510
Paper Jams in Fusing Unit ........................................................................................................512
Paper Jams in Duplex Module ..................................................................................................513
Paper Jams in Finisher-AB1 .....................................................................................................515
Problem Solving
508
Paper Jams
Problem Solving
509
14 Problem Solving
14 Note • To resolve the error displayed on the operator panel, you must clear all print media from the
print media path.
510
Paper Jams
Problem Solving
6 Remove the jammed paper.
14
511
14 Problem Solving
512
Paper Jams
Problem Solving
print media path.
14
513
14 Problem Solving
14
514
Paper Jams
Problem Solving
14
515
14 Problem Solving
14
516
Document Jams
Document Jams
When a document jam occurred in the document feeder, the machine stops and a
message is displayed on the touch screen. Follow the instructions displayed to clear
the document jam and then load the document in the document feeder again.
Problem Solving
4 If the message on the display instructs you
to open the inner cover, lift up the handle to Handle
open the inner cover.
14
5 Turn the knob to eject the document upward Knob
to remove.
Important • If the document is caught, do not pull it
out forcibly. The document could be
damaged.
517
14 Problem Solving
14
518
Stapler Faults
Stapler Faults
This section describes how to clear stapler troubles when the optional finisher is
installed.
Perform the procedures on the following pages when copies are not stapled or staples
are bent. Contact our Customer Support Center if the problem persists after you have
tried the following solutions.
Unstapled Bent staple
If copies are stapled as shown in the figures below, contact our Customer Support
Center.
One side of staple rising up Staple bent in reverse direction
Flattened staple Entire staple rising up
Problem Solving
Staple rising up with
center pressed in 14
519
14 Problem Solving
CAUTION
Be careful in removing jammed staples.
520
Stapler Faults
If you cannot remove jammed staples even after you perform the above procedure,
contact our Customer Support Center.
Problem Solving
14
521
15 Appendix
Specifications
This section lists the main specifications of the machine. Note that the specifications
and the appearance of the product may change without prior notice.
Copy Function
524
Specifications
Print Function
Type Built-in
Output Paper Size Same as the Copy function
525
15 Appendix
526
Specifications
Scan Function
527
15 Appendix
Scan to PC z Protocol
TCP/IP (SMB, FTP)
z
Operating System
Microsoft® Windows® 2000, Microsoft® Windows® XP,
Microsoft® Windows Vista®, Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003,
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008, Microsoft® Windows 7,
Microsoft® Windows® XP x64, Microsoft® Windows Vista® x64,
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 x64,
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 x64,
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2,
Microsoft® Windows 7 x64,
Mac OS X 10.5.0/10.5.1/10.5.2/10.5.3/10.5.4/10.6,
NetWare® 5.11/5.12*1
Important • For information about the latest supported OS, refer to the
Fuji Xerox Web site.
• *1 NetWare 5.11/5.12 supports FTP protocol only.
z File Format
Monochrome binary : TIFF (Compression type: MH, MMR),
DocuWorks (Compression type: MH,
MMR), PDF (Compression type: MH,
MMR, JBIG2), XPS (Compression type:
MH, MMR)
Gray scale/Full color : TIFF (Compression type: JPEG),
JPEG, DocuWorks (Compression type:
JPEG), PDF (Compression type: JPEG,
Flate), XPS (Compression type: JPEG)
Scan to e-mail z Protocol
TCP/IP (SMTP)
z File Format
Monochrome binary : TIFF (Compression type: MH, MMR),
DocuWorks (Compression type: MH,
MMR), PDF (Compression type: MH,
MMR, JBIG2), XPS (Compression type:
MH, MMR)
Gray scale/Full color : TIFF (Compression type: JPEG),
JPEG, DocuWorks (Compression type:
JPEG), PDF (Compression type: JPEG,
Flate), XPS (Compression type: JPEG)
Fax Function
Send Document Size Maximum: Legal (8.5 × 14"), Long document (Maximum 600 mm)
Recording Paper Size Maximum: A4
Appendix
528
Specifications
Scanning Resolution Standard : 8 × 3.85 lines/mm, 200 × 100 dpi (7.9 × 3.9
dots/mm)
Fine : 8 × 7.70 lines/mm, 200 × 200 dpi (7.9 × 7.9
dots/mm)
Superfine (400dpi): 400 × 400 dpi (15.7 × 15.7 dots/mm)
Superfine (600dpi): 600 × 600 dpi (23.6 × 23.6 dots/mm)
Coding Method MH / MR / MMR / JBIG
Transmission Speed G3 : 33.6/31.2/28.8/26.4/24.0/21.6/19.2/16.8/14.4/12.0/9.6/7.2/
4.8/2.4kbps
No. of Fax Lines Maximum: G3 - 1 ports
Document Size Maximum: A4, Legal (8.5 × 14"), Long document (Maximum 600
mm)
Scanning Resolution Same as the Fax function
Appendix
529
15 Appendix
Finisher-AB1 (Optional)
530
Specifications
Paper Size Legal (8.5 × 14"), A4, Letter (8.5 × 11"), A5, JIS B5, Executive
(7.25 × 10.5"), Folio (8.5 × 13")
Paper Weight 60 - 216 gsm
Paper Capacity 550 sheets
Important • When using 80 gsm paper
Dimensions/Weight Width 560 × Depth 516 × Height 134 mm, 10.8 kg
Space Requirement Width 1,090 × Depth 1,086 mm (Main Unit + One Tray Module)
(when connected to the Important • When the Tray 5 (MSI) is fully extended.
main unit)
Paper Size Legal (8.5 × 14"), A4, Letter (8.5 × 11"), A5, JIS B5, Executive
(7.25 × 10.5"), Folio (8.5 × 13")
Paper Weight 60 - 216 gsm
Paper Capacity 1,100 sheets
Important • When using 80 gsm paper
Dimensions/Weight Width 560 × Depth 516 × Height 351 mm, 32 kg
Space Requirement Width 1,090 × Depth 1,086 mm (Main Unit + Two Tray Module)
(when connected to the Important • When the Tray 5 (MSI) is fully extended.
main unit)
Appendix
15
531
15 Appendix
Printable Area
2 mm
Unprintable area
4 mm
Appendix
15
2 mm
532
Internal Fonts
Internal Fonts
533
15 Appendix
15
534
Optional Components
Optional Components
The following table shows the optional components available. To purchase these
options, contact our Customer Support Center.
Searchable PDF Kit Allows you to use optical character recognition (OCR) when
scanning.
Note • The Scanner Kit is required to use this feature.
1
Scan to USB Kit * Directly stores data in a USB memory device when scanning.
Note • The Scanner Kit is required to use this feature.
15
USB Cable Kit *1 A cable to connect a USB memory device to the USB memory
slot on the control panel.
Fax Kit Adds the Fax feature to the machine.
Internet Fax Kit Adds the Internet Fax feature to the machine.
Note • The Fax Kit is required to use this feature.
Server Fax Kit Adds the Server Fax feature to the machine.
Note • The Fax Kit is required to use this feature.
535
15 Appendix
15
536
ESC/P-K Emulation
ESC/P-K Emulation
Emulation
This section describes the printer language emulations available on the machine.
Print data conforms to certain rules (grammars). These rules (grammars) are called
printer languages.
The machine supports two types of printer languages: a page description language,
which is used to create images on a page-by-page basis, and an emulation, which is
used to achieve the print results similar to those of other printers. To "emulate" means
to imitate the print results of other printers.
Emulation Mode
When printing data written in a language other than a page description language
supported by the machine, switch the machine to the emulation mode. The
relationships between the emulation mode and the printer to be emulated are as
follows:
z NetWare port
z
lpd port
z SMB port
z
IPP port
z Port 9100 port
z
WSD
Switching by Commands
Commands for switching between printer languages are provided. Upon receipt of a
command, the machine switches to the relevant printer language. 15
Automatic Switching
The machine analyzes the data received by a host interface, and automatically
identifies the printer language to be used. It then switches to the identified printer
language.
537
15 Appendix
Interface-dependent
You can set a printer language for each host interface by using CentreWare Internet
Services. The machine switches to a printer language corresponding to the host
interface that received data.
Fonts
This section explains the fonts used for emulation.
Available fonts
The following fonts can be used for ESC/P-K emulation:
ESC/P-K Emulation
Available outline fonts are as follows:
z Roman
z Sans serif
z
ShuSong
z OCR-B
User-defined Characters
On the machine, you can use user-defined characters.
The total capacity of memory for storing user-defined characters and other user-
defined data can be set on the control panel. This value is retained after the machine
is turned off.
User-defined characters are registered as bitmap fonts, and cannot be shared among
different printer languages.
Font Caching
To ensure hi-speed printing, outline fonts of up to a certain size are cached. Outline
fonts are converted into bitmap data temporarily and then printed. To minimize this
processing time, the processed bitmap data is saved in the memory. This process is
called font caching.
The saved bitmap data is deleted when you turn the machine off or reset it.
Output Feature
This section describes the machine's output feature.
Appendix
Multiple-Up
The Multiple-Up feature reduces the size of multiple-sheet documents and prints them
on a single sheet of paper.
538
ESC/P-K Emulation
The Multiple-Up feature can be used in the ESC/P-K emulation mode. In the ESC/P-K
mode, 2 Up can be used.
Form Overlay
In the ESC/P-K mode, you can register an original form on the machine, and overprint
the form on a printout.
The form to be used for overlaying can be specified on the control panel.
For more information on registering forms, contact our Customer Support Center.
Barcodes
In the ESC/P-K mode, you can use barcodes. The barcodes that can be used are as
follows:
z
EAN-13
z EAN-8
z
Interleaved 2 of 5
z UPC-A
z
UPC-E
z
CODE39
z CODE128
z
POSTNET
Forms
You can use ESC/P-K to register forms on the machine. Up to 64 forms can be
registered.
For more information on registering forms, contact our Customer Support Center.
Basic Settings
Item
Setting Item Value
Number
Output color 5 Sets the output color.
[0] (Default) : Color
[1] : Monochrome
Appendix
15
539
15 Appendix
Item
Setting Item Value
Number
Paper tray 3 Sets the paper tray to be used for printing.
[0] : Auto
[1] (Default) : Tray 1
[2] : Tray 2
[3] : Tray 3
[4] : Tray 4
[5] : Tray 5
If printing from Tray 5, instruct printing and then operate the machine to
start printing. To cancel the setting, change the setting for "Tray 5
Confirmation".
Important • When Trays 1 to 4 is selected, the paper size is determined by the
size of paper loaded in the tray, and thus [Paper Size] cannot be set.
Note • When [Auto] is selected and paper of the same size in the same
orientation is loaded in multiple trays, paper will be fed in the order of
Tray 1 J Tray 2 J Tray 3 J Tray 4. If paper of the same size is
loaded in multiple trays but in different orientations, feeding of the
paper loaded in the landscape orientation is prioritized.
Document size 1 Sets the client-created document size.
[99] (Default) : Paper
[100] : Continuous form paper (10 x 12)
[101] : Continuous form paper (10 x 11)
[102] : Continuous form paper (15 x 12)
[103] : Continuous form paper (15 x 11)
[4] : A4
[5] : A5
[15] : B5
[21] : 8.5 x 14
[22] : 8.5 x 13
[23] : 8.5 x 11
[0] : Postcard
The number of characters printed is: 80 characters/72 rows for
continuous form paper (10 x 12), 80 characters/66 rows for continuous
form paper (10 x 11), 136 characters/72 rows for continuous form paper
(15 x 12), and 136 characters/66 rows for continuous form paper (15 x
11).
Note •When a continuous form paper is selected for [Original Size], [Paper
Position] cannot be set.
•When [Preset%] or [Fit to Cut Sheet] is selected for [Reduce /
Enlarge], the machine automatically calculates the magnification
based on a combination of [Original Size] and [Paper Size]. If the
Appendix
ratio, however, is outside the range of 45-210%, the document will not
be reduced/enlarged, and will be printed at a scale of 100%. When [2
Up] is selected, the machine automatically calculates the
magnification based on a combination of [Original Size] and 1/2 of
[Paper Size].
540
ESC/P-K Emulation
Item
Setting Item Value
Number
Paper size 2 Sets the size of paper to be printed. This setting can be made only when
[Paper Tray] is set to [Auto] or [Tray 5]. This setting can be configured
only for cut sheets.
[4] : A4
[5] : A5
[15] : B5
[21] : 8.5 x 14
[22] : 8.5 x 13
[23] : 8.5 x 11
[0] : Postcard
Important •If [Paper Tray] is set to Trays 1 to 4, [Paper Size] cannot be set.
Note •When [Preset%] or [Fit to Cut Sheet] is selected for [Reduce /
Enlarge], the machine automatically calculates the magnification
based on a combination of [Original Size] and [Paper Size]. If the
magnification, however, is outside the range of 45-210%, the
document will not be reduced/enlarged, and will be printed at a scale
of 100%.
When [2 Up] is selected, the machine automatically calculates the
magnification based on a combination of [Original Size] and 1/2 of
[Paper Size].
Extended Settings
Item
Setting Item Value
Number
Paper position 20 Sets the paper position.
[0] (Default) : Without cut sheet feeder (left)
[1] : With cut sheet feeder (center)
Note •When [Without cut sheet feeder (left)] is specified and FF (line feed
command) is received, the machine skips the number of lines
specified in VFU. When [With cut sheet feeder (center)] is specified,
the machine inserts a page break.
• When a continuous form paper is selected for [Original Size], [Paper
Position] cannot be set.
Output quantity 8 Sets the number of copies to be printed.
[1 to 250] (Default: 1): 1-250 copies
Important •When the output quantity is specified by a client, that number of
copies is printed. After printing, the number set on the control panel
is overwritten with the number newly specified. However, the number
Appendix
of copies specified from the NetWare or lpd port will not overwrite the
number set on the control panel.
15
541
15 Appendix
Item
Setting Item Value
Number
Reduce / enlarge 54 Sets the print magnification.
(Reduce / [0] (Default) : Preset %
enlarge mode) [1] : Variable %
[2] : Fit to Cut Sheet
542
ESC/P-K Emulation
Item
Setting Item Value
Number
Font 14 Sets the font for single-byte characters.
(Alphanumeric [0] (Default) : Roman
fonts) [1] : Sanserif
Important •Since this feature selects the default value, its setting will not be
affected when an extended command is received.
Print control 51 Sets whether to print blank pages if included in the document.
(Blank sheet [0] (Default) : Off
output) [1] : On
Note •Even when [Off] is selected, blank pages are printed if they are
spaces created with user-defined characters or images in white
color.
•When [Off] is selected for this feature and 2 Up or 2 sided printing is
specified, blank pages are not printed.
52 Extends the position of the right margin.
(Character [0] (Default) : Standard
print area) [1] : Extended
Important •Changing the character print area from [Extended] to [Standard]
restores the left and right margins to the default values.
• When the position of the right margin is set here, that position
becomes the right edge of the character print area.
53 Sets whether or not to enable the Image Enhancement feature.
(Image Image Enhancement smoothens the border between black and white,
enhancement) reducing rough edges, and thus seemingly increasing the resolution.
[0] : Off
[1] (Default) : On
ESCP switch 55 Sets the Text Quality mode to high quality or draft.
(Text quality) [0] (Default) : High Quality
[1] : Draft
Important •Since the default value is selected for the [Text Quality], [Reduced
Characters], [Character Code Table], [Page Length], and [1-inch
Perforation Skip] features, their settings will not be affected when an
extended command is received.
Note •Changing settings does not change actual printing quality.
•This setting affect the Text Quality selection commands. For more
information on the Text Quality selection commands, contact our
Customer Support Center.
56 Reduces the size of single-byte alphanumeric characters when printing.
(Reduced Sets whether to reduce their sizes or to print them at a scale of 100%.
Appendix
543
15 Appendix
Item
Setting Item Value
Number
61 Sets the action to be executed when a CR command is received.
(CR feature) [0] (Default) : Carriage return
[1] : Carriage return and linefeed
Position 15 Adjusts the printing position vertically or horizontally, and changes the
adjustment (Vertical positions of the margins.
position [0] (Default) : Off
adjustment) [1-500] : -250 to +250 mm
16 Important •Data outside the printable area is not printed regardless of the
(Horizontal adjustment of the print position. In addition, data moved outside the
position printable area as a result of adjusting the print position is not printed.
adjustment)
Escape 62 A normal extended command is specified starting with hexadecimal 1BH
sequence (Escape ESC as the escape sequence identifying the command, followed by ;
sequence) (3BH).
When you cannot use a semicolon or ESC code with the host computer,
you can use a special string instead as an escape sequence. This setting
specifies whether or not to enable the escape sequence replacement
feature. When enabling, specify the escape sequence with item 63.
[0] (Default) : Disabled
[1] : Enabled
For more information on extended commands, contact our Customer Support
Center.
63 To control an extended command with a text code, you must specify an
(Escape escape sequence (the first two bytes) of the extended command.
sequence Enter two characters using the keyboard displayed on the screen.
character) [&%] (Default) : 0x21 - 0x7e
Form overlay 64 Constantly performs Form Overlay by selecting a form name (No. 01-64)
registered on the machine.
[0] (Default) : Off
[1-64] : No. 1 - No. 64
Important •Since the default value is selected for this feature, this setting is not
affected when an extended commend is received.
•Once a form name is selected, it continues to be displayed even if the
form is deleted. When a form name is selected using the up and
down arrow keys, it is not displayed. In this case, the setting is set to
"Off".
Stapling 66 Sets the stapling position.
[0] (Default) : Off
Appendix
15 machine.
[0] : Off
[1] (Default) : On
Form Type 68 Sets the form type.
[0] (Default) : ESC/P-K
Binary character 72 Sets the character strings to be specified when entering commands in
strings hexadecimal format.
[0] (Default) : Off
[1] : &$%$
[2] : $?!#
544
ESC/P-K Emulation
Item
Setting Item Value
Number
0 Style 73 Sets the typeface for "0".
[0] (Default) :0
[1] :
Number of sets 74 Sets the method of specifying the number of print sets.
[0] : Protocol
[1] : Panel
[2] (Default) : Command
Appendix
15
545
15 Appendix
Magnification Table
Preset %
Document Paper Size A3 A4 A5 B4 B5 11 x 17" 8.5 x 14" 8.5 x 13" 8.5 x 11" Postcard
Size
A3 Long edge 100 70 49 86 60 103 84 78 66 100
Short edge 100 70 48 86 60 94 72 72 72 100
A4 Long edge 143 100 70 123 86 147 120 112 94 48
Short edge 143 100 69 123 86 135 103 103 103 45
A5 Long edge 204 143 100 177 123 210 172 160 135 69
Short edge 207 145 100 178 124 195 149 149 149 65
B4 Long edge 116 81 57 100 70 119 98 90 76 100
Short edge 116 81 56 100 70 109 83 83 83 100
B5 Long edge 164 116 81 143 100 171 140 130 109 56
Short edge 164 116 81 143 100 156 120 120 120 53
11 x 17" Long edge 97 68 48 84 59 100 82 76 64 100
Short edge 106 74 51 92 64 100 77 77 77 100
8.5 x 14" Long edge 119 83 58 102 72 122 100 93 78 100
Short edge 139 97 67 120 84 131 100 100 100 100
8.5 x 13" Long edge 128 90 63 111 77 132 108 100 84 100
Short edge 139 97 67 120 84 131 100 100 100 100
8.5 x 11" Long edge 152 106 74 131 92 156 128 119 100 100
Short edge 139 97 67 120 84 131 100 100 100 100
Postcard Long edge 100 100 145 100 178 100 100 100 100 100
Short edge 100 100 153 100 190 100 100 100 100 100
15 x 11" Long edge 119 83 58 103 72 122 100 93 78 100
Short edge 103 72 50 89 62 97 74 74 74 100
15 x 12" Long edge 119 83 58 103 72 122 100 93 78 100
Short edge 95 66 46 81 57 89 68 68 68 100
10 x 11" Long edge 147 103 72 127 89 151 124 115 97 50
Short edge 142 99 68 122 85 133 102 102 102 45
10 x 12" Long edge 135 95 66 117 81 139 114 105 89 46
Appendix
Unit: %
Note • If the magnification for either the long edge or short edge is outside the range of 45 - 210%,
15 the magnifications for both the long edge and short edge becomes 100%.
546
ESC/P-K Emulation
Unit: %
Note • If the magnification for either the long edge or short edge is outside the range of 45 - 210%,
the magnifications for both the long edge and short edge becomes 100%.
15
547
15 Appendix
Unit: %
Note • If the magnification for either the long edge or short edge is outside the range of 45 - 210%,
the magnifications for both the long edge and short edge becomes 100%.
15
548
ESC/P-K Emulation
Unit: %
Note • If the magnification for either the long edge or short edge is outside the range of 45 - 210%,
the magnifications for both the long edge and short edge becomes 100%.
15
549
15 Appendix
Portrait Landscape
Paper Size
Characters Lines Characters Lines
A4 79 63 113 42
B5 68 53 97 35
A5 54 42 79 27
Postcard 35 30 54 19
8.5 x 14" 81 76 136 43
8.5 x 13" 81 70 126 43
8.5 x 11" 81 58 106 43
Portrait Landscape
Paper Size
Characters Lines Characters Lines
A4 79 66 113 45
B5 68 56 97 39
A5 54 45 79 31
Postcard 35 30 54 19
8.5 x 14" 81 80 136 47
8.5 x 13" 81 74 126 47
8.5 x 11" 81 62 106 47
Note • The values are based on 10-cpi character pitch and 6-lpi line pitch.
• The magnification for both the long edge and short edge is 100%.
• Some paper sizes may not be available depending on your hardware configuration.
Appendix
15
550
ESC/P-K Emulation
Portrait Landscape
Paper Size
Characters Lines Characters Lines
A4 82 70 116 49
B5 71 60 101 42
A5 58 49 82 34
Postcard 39 34 58 23
8.5 x 14" 85 84 140 51
8.5 x 13" 85 78 130 51
8.5 x 11" 85 66 110 51
Note • The values are based on 10-cpi character pitch and 6-lpi line pitch.
• Some paper sizes may not be available depending on your hardware configuration.
Portrait Landscape
Paper Size
Characters Lines Characters Lines
All supported
136 66 136 72
paper sizes
Note • The values are based on 10-cpi character pitch and 6-lpi line pitch.
Portrait Landscape
Paper Size
Characters Lines Characters Lines
All supported
80 66 80 72
paper sizes
Appendix
15
551
15 Appendix
PDF Direct Print is a feature that prints PDF files by directly using the lpr command
instead of a print driver. When this feature is used, the following items will be printed
based on the settings of [PDF] under [Print Mode].
z
Output Quantity z
Layout
z
2 Sided Printing z
Paper Size
z Print Mode z Output Color
Note • Two types of the PDF Direct Printing methods are available: the genuine Adobe PDF Direct
Print and the non-PostScript PDF Direct Print (PDF Bridge). You can select which method to
prioritize in the System Administration mode.
• When you use the lpr command to print, specify the number of copies to be printed in the lpr
command. The copy quantity setting made on [Output Quantity] under [PDF] becomes
invalid. If the copy quantity is not specified in the lpr command, only one copy is printed.
• Before you print PDF file using the lpr command, the LPD protocol of the machine must be
started with the control panel or CentreWare Internet Services.
• PDF Direct Print supports PDF version 1.6.
Item
Setting Item Value
Number
Output quantity 401 Sets the number of copies to be printed.
[1-999] (Default: 1): 1-999 sheets
2 sided printing 402 Sets the 2 sided printing option.
[0] (Default) : 1 Sided
[1] : 2 Sided, Flip on Long Edge
[2] : 2 Sided, Flip on Short Edge
[2 Sided Print] prints 2 sided in the orientation so that pages can be
bound along the long edge.
[2 Sided Print] prints 2 sided in the orientation so that pages can be
Appendix
552
PDF Direct Print
Item
Setting Item Value
Number
Layout 405 Sets the layout for printing.
Note • This item can be set when [PDF Bridge] is selected for [Print
Processing Mode].
[0] (Default) : Auto %
[1] : Booklet
[2] : 2-up
[3] : 4-up
[4] : 100% (size-by-size)
[1] : PS
[PDF Bridge] processes PDF files using the PDF Direct Print feature
provided by Fuji Xerox.
[PS] processes PDF files using the PostScript feature provided by Adobe.
Note • This item is displayed when the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) is
installed. 15
• The print results may differ between the [PDF Bridge] and [PS]
selections.
• When [PS] is selected, the [Layout] setting becomes invalid.
553
15 Appendix
DocuWoks Direct Print is a feature that prints DocuWoks files by directly using the lpr
command instead of a print driver. When this feature is used, the following items will be
printed based on the settings of [DocuWorks] under [Print Mode].
z
Output Quantity z
Layout
z
2 Sided Printing z
Paper Size
z Print Mode z Output Color
z Collate
Important • You cannot print DocuWorks files with Japanese fonts used.
Note • When you use the lpr command to print, specify the number of copies to be printed in the lpr
command. The copy quantity setting made on [Output Quantity] under [PDF] becomes
invalid. If the copy quantity is not specified in the lpr command, only one copy is printed.
• Before you print PDF file using the lpr command, the LPD protocol of the machine must be
started with the control panel or CentreWare Internet Services.
Item
Setting Item Value
Number
Output quantity 501 Sets the number of copies to be printed.
[1-999] (Default: 1): 1-999 sheets
2 sided printing 502 Sets the 2 sided printing option.
[0] (Default) : 1 Sided
[1] : 2 Sided, Flip on Long Edge
[2] : 2 Sided, Flip on Short Edge
[2 Sided Print] prints 2 sided in the orientation so that pages can be
bound along the long edge.
[2 Sided Print] prints 2 sided in the orientation so that pages can be
bound along the short edge.
Print mode 503 Selects which you prioritize: image quality or print speed.
Appendix
554
DocuWorks Direct Print
Item
Setting Item Value
Number
Layout 505 Sets the layout for printing.
Note • This item can be set when [PDF Bridge] is selected for [Print
Processing Mode].
[0] (Default) : Auto %
[2] : 2-up
[3] : 4-up
[4] : 100% (size-by-size)
Appendix
15
555
15 Appendix
PCL Emulation
Emulation
This section describes the printer language emulations available on the machine.
Print data conforms to certain rules (grammars). These rules (grammars) are called
printer languages.
The machine supports two types of printer languages: a page description language,
which is used to create images on a page-by-page basis, and an emulation, which is
used to achieve the print results similar to those of other printers. To "emulate" means
to imitate the print results of other printers.
Emulation Mode
When printing data written in a language other than a page description language
supported by the machine, switch the machine to the emulation mode. The
relationships between the emulation mode and the printer to be emulated are as
follows:
Switching by Commands
Commands for switching between printer languages are provided. Upon receipt of a
command, the machine switches to the relevant printer language.
Automatic Switching
The machine analyzes the data received by a host interface, and automatically
identifies the printer language to be used. It then switches to the identified printer
language.
Interface-dependent
You can set a printer language for each host interface by using CentreWare Internet
Appendix
15
556
PCL Emulation
Fonts
Available fonts
The following fonts can be used for PCL emulation:
Alphanumeric fonts
z CG Times z Univers Bold Condensed
z CG Times Italic z Univers Bold Condensed Italic
z CG Times Bold z Antique Olive
z
CG Times Italic Bold z
Antique Olive Italic
z
Univers Medium z
Antique Olive Bold
z Univers Medium Italic z CG Omega
z Univers Bold z CG Omega Italic
z
Univers Bold Italic z
CG Omega Bold
z
Univers Medium Condensed z
CG Omega Bold Italic
z
Univers Medium Condensed Italic z
Garamond Antiqua
z
Garamond Kursiv z
Helvetica Oblique
z
Garamond Halbfett z
Helvetica Bold
z
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett z
Helvetica Bold Oblique
z
Courier z
CourierPS
z
Courier Italic z
CourierPS Oblique
z Courier Bold z CourierPS Bold
z Courier Bold Italic z CourierPS Bold Oblique
z
Letter Gothic z
SymbolPS
z
Letter Gothic Italic z
Palatino Roman
z
Letter Gothic Bold z
Palatino Italic
z Albertus Medium z Palatino Bold
z
Albertus Extra Bold z
Palatino Bold Italic
z
Clarendon Condensed z
ITC Bookman Light
z Coronet z ITC Bookman Light Italic
Appendix
z
Arial Bold Italic z
Helvetica Narrow Bold
z Times New z Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
z Times New Italic z New Century Schoolbook Roman
z
Times New Bold z
New Century Schoolbook Italic
z Times New Bold Italic z New Century Schoolbook Bold
z Symbol z New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
z Wingdings z ITC Avant Garde Book
557
15 Appendix
Font Caching
To ensure hi-speed printing, outline fonts of up to a certain size are cached. Outline
fonts are converted into bitmap data temporarily and then printed. To minimize this
processing time, the processed bitmap data is saved in the memory. This process is
called font caching.
The saved bitmap data is deleted when you turn the machine off or reset it. For the PCL
emulation mode, data other than that being processed is not saved.
Output Feature
This section describes the machine's output feature. The following two output features
are available:
z Outputting a Pending Print Job
z Forcible Output in Emulation Mode
15
558
PCL Emulation
Paper tray 201 Sets the paper tray to be used for printing.
[0] (Default) : Auto
[1] : Tray 1
[2] : Tray 2
[3] : Tray 3
[4] : Tray 4
[5] : Tray 5
Important • When Trays 1 to 4 is selected, the paper size is determined by the
size of paper loaded in the tray, and thus [Paper Size] cannot be set.
Note • When [Auto] is selected and paper of the same size in the same
orientation in multiple trays is loaded, paper will be fed in the order of
Tray 1 J Tray 2 J Tray 3J Tray 4. If paper of the same size is
loaded in multiple trays but in different orientations, feeding of the
paper loaded in the landscape orientation is prioritized.
Auto size 202 Sets the default paper size. Only available when [Paper Tray] is set to
[Auto]. Only cut sheet can be set.
[4] (Default*) : A4
[5] : A5
[15] : B5
[21] : 8.5 × 14"
[22] : 8.5 × 13"
[23] (Default*) : 8.5 × 11"
[25] : Custom Size
[30] : 8K
Important • When Trays 1 to 4 is selected, [Paper Size] cannot be set. The paper
size loaded in the specified tray is displayed.
Note • When Trays 1 to 4 is selected, the paper size is determined by the
size of paper loaded in the tray, and thus [Paper Size] cannot be set.
• Depending on the combination of [Original Size] and [Paper Size], [?]
may be displayed for the magnification. In this case, the document is
printed at a scale of 100%.
Bypass size 203 Sets the default paper size. Only available when [Paper Tray] is set to
Appendix
559
15 Appendix
Font size 209 Specifies the point size of a font in 25 increments. The value of 100
represents 1 point.
[400] - [5000] (Default: [1200]) : 4.00 to 50.00 point
Font pitch 210 Specifies the pitch size of a font. The value of 100 represents the pitch
size of 1 point.
[600] - [2400] (Default: [1000]) : 6.00 to 24.00 point
Form line 211 Specifies the number of lines on a page.
[5] - [128] (Default: [64]) : 6.00 to 24.00 point
Image enhance 213 Sets whether or not to enable the Image Enhancement feature.
Image Enhancement smoothens the border between black and white,
reducing rough edges, and thus seemingly increasing the resolution.
[0] : Off
Appendix
[1] (Default) : On
Draft mode 215 When printing in black and white, prints the portion printed in black by
15
using the draft mode. This feature is enabled for the entire document.
0 (Default) : Off
1 : On
Color mode 216 Sets the color mode.
0 (Default) : Auto
1 : Color
2 : Mono
561
15 Appendix
Print Quantity 221 Sets the method for specifying the number of copies to print.
Setup [0] : Protocol
[1] : Panel
[2] (Default) : Command
Appendix
15
562
HP-GL2 Emulation
HP-GL2 Emulation
Emulation
This section describes the printer language emulations available on the machine.
Print data conforms to certain rules (grammars). These rules (grammars) are called
printer languages.
The machine supports two types of printer languages: a page description language,
which is used to create images on a page-by-page basis, and an emulation, which is
used to achieve the print results similar to those of other printers. To "emulate" means
to imitate the print results of other printers.
Emulation Mode
When printing data written in a language other than a page description language
supported by the machine, switch the machine to the emulation mode. The
relationships between the emulation mode and the printer to be emulated are as
follows:
Switching by Commands
Commands for switching between printer languages are provided. Upon receipt of a
command, the machine switches to the relevant printer language.
Automatic Switching
The machine analyzes the data received by a host interface, and automatically
identifies the printer language to be used. It then switches to the identified printer
language.
Interface-dependent
You can set a printer language for each host interface by using CentreWare Internet
Appendix
Fonts 15
Available fonts
The following fonts can be used for HP-GL/2 emulation:
Alphanumeric fonts
z Roman
z Sans serif
563
15 Appendix
Font Caching
To ensure hi-speed printing, outline fonts of up to a certain size are cached. Outline
fonts are converted into bitmap data temporarily and then printed. To minimize this
processing time, the processed bitmap data is saved in the memory. This process is
called font caching.
The saved bitmap data is deleted when you turn the machine off or reset it. For the PCL
emulation mode, data other than that being processed is not saved.
Output Feature
This section describes the machine's output feature. The following two output features
are available:
z
Outputting a Pending Print Job
z
Forcible Output in Emulation Mode
Print Area
15
Note • Change the factory default setting if required. For more information on changing procedures,
refer to "HP-GL2 Emulation" (P.563).
564
HP-GL2 Emulation
Paper Margin
The paper size is set to A sizes by factory default. If the print data is larger than the
active coordinates area, the machine prints the data on the next larger A series paper
(in this case, the next larger size of A5 is A4).
When you set the paper margins, however, the active coordinates area is determined
by subtracting the area set in paper margins from the active coordinates area obtained
in the area determination mode. Therefore, set the paper margins if the data is printed
on larger paper than specified. Set the range from 0 to 99 mm. The default value is 0
mm.
Basic Settings
Note • If the document size other than [Auto] is selected, the settings under
[Auto layout] become [ON].
• Depending on the combination of [Document size] and [Paper size],
the document is printed at a scale of 100%.
15
565
15 Appendix
15
566
HP-GL2 Emulation
Extended Settings
567
15 Appendix
[2] : IW
[3] : IP
[4] : Adapted
Note • The setting of the active area determination command is valid when
15 [Document size] is set to [Auto].
162 (Paper Sets the paper margin when auto scaling is being used.
margin) [0] - [99] (Default: 0) : 0 to 99 mm
Note • The setting of the paper margin is valid when [Document size] is set
to [Auto].
163 Sets whether to perform image enhancement, which artificially increases
(Image the resolution of an image and smooth its edges.
enhancement) [0] : OFF
[1] (Default) : ON
568
HP-GL2 Emulation
[Cut]
: specified coordinate
[Round]
: specified coordinate
Appendix
[Rectangular]
: specified coordinate
15
569
15 Appendix
[None]
[Intersect]
[Round]
[Cut]
Fonts
Stroke Roman, Sans-Serif
Pen attributes
15
570
HP-GL2 Emulation
Standard
Defines the printable area of the machine as the hard clip area.
Paper
Defines a size same as the paper size as the hard clip area. However, the area that
allows actual printing is within the printable area.
The hard clip area can be set either with HP-GL emulation mode settings or by the
specified hard clip command “&I”.
The following coordinate values present an example of when the origin is set at the
lower left (Auto Layout in HP-GL/2) of A3 sheet.
+Y (16798, 11876)
(16442, 11520)
Paper Size
15
571
15 Appendix
Printable Area
The printable area in the HP-GL mode is as follows:
Paper Length
Coordinate Value (1/7200 inch)
(1/7200 inch)
Paper
X Axis Y Axis Margin Printable Area Top-right Edge Margin
size
A4 84168 59508 1260 1260 81648 56988 82908 58248 1260 1260
A5 59508 41940 1260 1260 56988 39420 58248 40680 1260 1260
B5 72828 51588 1260 1260 70308 49068 71568 50328 1260 1260
Note • The HP-GL emulation supports three paper sizes: A4, A5, and B5.
Width
YU Top-right X, Top-right Y
Short-side
Height
Long-side
Physical paper
size XR
(0, 0)
Paper Length
Coordinate Value (1/7200 inch)
(1/7200 inch)
Paper
X Axis Y Axis Margin Printable Area Top-right Edge Margin
size
Appendix
A4 59508 84168 1260 1260 56988 81648 58248 82908 1260 1260
A5 41940 59508 1260 1260 39420 56988 40680 58248 1260 1260
15 B5 51588 72828 1260 1260 49068 70308 50328 71568 1260 1260
Note • The HP-GL emulation supports three paper sizes: A4, A5, and B5.
572
HP-GL2 Emulation
Width
YU Top-right X, Top-right Y
Long-side
Short-side
Height
XR
Physical paper
size
Printable Area
Bottom-left X, Bottom-left Y
(0, 0)
Auto Layout
This section explains Auto Layout.
z Set [Document size ([101])] to [Auto ([99])]. The default value is [Auto ([99])].
z Set [Auto layout ([106])] to [ON ([0])] to set the origin position. The default value is
[ON ([0])].
Set [Scaling ([159])] to [ON ([1])]. The default value is [ON ([1])].
15
z
z Select a method for obtaining the active coordinate area using the area
determination mode. The default value is [Auto ([0])].
z
Set the paper margin using [Paper margin ([162])]. The default value is 0 mm ([0]).
z Set the scaling mode. The default value is [Paper Size ([0])].
573
15 Appendix
Document Size
To set Document size to Auto, enter [101] to the [Item Number] box and select [Change
Value], and then enter [99] to the [New Value] box and select [Save]. Once you set
Document size to Auto, you can set Auto layout to ON.
Auto Layout
To set Auto layout to ON, enter [106] to the [Item Number] box and select [Change
Value], and then enter [0] to the [New Value] box and select [Save]. Enabling Auto
layout activates the settings for scaling, area determination mode, paper margins, and
scaling mode.
Scaling
Set whether the original size is enlarged or reduced so that the document size fits the
paper size.
Auto
Automatically selects the method of determining the active coordinates area from PS,
IW, IP, and Adapted in that order of priority.
IW
The area specified by the last IW command in the data becomes the active coordinates
area.
If there are no IW commands in the data, the active coordinates area is determined by
Adapted.
IP
The coordinates encompassing all areas specified by IP commands in the data
becomes the active coordinates area.
If there are no IP commands in the data, the active coordinates area is determined by
Adapted.
Adapted
The active coordinates area is determined by the following conditions:
z
Minimum/Maximum position coordinates plotted by drawing commands
Appendix
PS
15 The coordinates encompassing all areas specified by PS commands in the data
becomes the active coordinates area.
If there are no PS commands in the data, the active coordinate area is determined by
Adapted.
Paper Margin
Set the range from 0 to 99 mm. The default value is 0 mm. To get the active coordinates
area, subtract the area set in paper margins from the active coordinates area obtained
in the area determination mode.
574
HP-GL2 Emulation
Paper Margins
Scaling Mode
Select the mode for determining the document size from the obtained active
coordinates area. Use active coordinates area to determine whether the paper
orientation will be portrait or landscape.
If it is a Paper Size
Set the document size from the obtained active coordinates area and the origin point
setting. The document size can be selected from six sizes of A series paper (A0, A1,
A2, A3, A4, or A5).
3) Subtract the value set in paper margins from the active coordinates area obtained
in step 2.
4) The minimum size that includes the active coordinates area obtained in step 3 will
be the document size. 15
If the Scaling Mode is the ACA
1) Obtain the coordinate area to be active from the HP-GL data entered, in accord
with the area determination mode.
2) As a margin, add the larger value of either the font size specified in the page, the
default size or one half the specified pen width, to the active coordinates area
obtained in step 1.
3) Subtract the value set in paper margins from the active coordinates area obtained
in step 2.
575
15 Appendix
4) The ACA obtained in the process up to step 3 will be the document size.
For Example:
If the following data is entered when the scaling mode is paper size, origin position is
Auto, paper margin is 10mm, and area determination mode is IP:
All pen width settings are 0.1 mm.
The following data does not contain a character size specification command.
IN;
IP-8399,-5938, 8399, 5938;
IW-8399,-5938, 8399, 5938;
PU;
SP1;
:
:
SP0;
1) As the area determination mode is IP, the active coordinates area is specified as
the area -8399,-5938,8399,5938 by an IP command.
2) Because there are no font size specification commands and all pen widths are 0.1
mm in the above example, add the height/2 of the default font size for A3 size
paper (75 plotter units) to the active coordinates area obtained in step 1.
The active coordinates area obtained in step 2 is -8474,-6013,8474,6013.
3) The value set in paper margins (10 mm = 400 plotter units) is subtracted from the
active coordinates area obtained in step 2.
The active coordinates area obtained in step 3 is -8074,-5613,80740,5613.
4) As the active coordinates area obtained in step 3 exceeds the A4 size and is A3
size, the document size is determined to be A3.
In addition, when the paper margin setting is 0 mm and the active coordinates area
is 8474,-6013,8474,6013, and this exceeds A3, but is A2 or smaller, the document size
is determined to be A2.
The method for determining the paper size differs according to the paper size and
scaling mode settings on the operation panel.
576
HP-GL2 Emulation
If A4, B5, or A5 paper is not loaded in the trays, all five sizes become possible sizes; a
message is displayed on the touch screen prompting the user to load paper.
If the Document Size is Auto and the Scaling Mode is Paper Size
The hard clip setting is inactive. The hard clip area is always the paper's hard clip area.
z If the document size = paper size, it plots at the same scale (100%).
z If the document size > paper size, it plots at a reduced scale.
z If the document size < paper size, it plots at the same scale (100%).
A3 A4 A5 B4 B5
A0 35 25 100 31 100
A1 50 35 25 43 31
Appendix
A2 71 50 35 61 43
A3 100 71 50 87 61
A4 100 100 71 100 87
If the Document Size is Auto and the Scaling Mode is ACA
The hard clip setting is inactive. The hard clip area is always the advanced hard clip
area.
577
15 Appendix
The scaling factor is determined according to the ACA and the paper size. The range
for the ACA for each paper size is as follows:
0 Degrees 90 Degrees
Paper
Size Min Value Max Value Min Value Max Value
P2x - P1x P2y - P1y P2x - P1x P2y - P1y P2x - P1x P2y - P1y P2x - P1x P2y - P1y
Print Area
Print Area
15
578
HP-GL2 Emulation
Print Area
Appendix
15
579
15 Appendix
This section describes the notes and restrictions to observe when using the machine.
Options
z
To use the Print Stored File feature, the Scanner Kit (optional) is required.
z To use the machine as a PostScript printer, the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional) is
required.
Character Code
In data transmission from a computer or read processing of data in a medium such as
a USB memory device, if characters that the machine does not support are included in
folder and file names, these characters may not be displayed correctly.
15 When the Media Print - Photos service is used, only ASCII characters can be used.
Compatibility of Machines
ApeosPort series models are incompatible with DocuCentre series models. Once you
purchased one of the series models, you cannot upgrade or downgrade to the other
series model afterward.
580
Notes and Restrictions
cannot use the numeric keypad either. Consequently, the recipients you can specify
are limited to those who are registered on the Address Book.
You must add an address book entry using CentreWare Internet Services, Device
Setup Tool (free software), or ApeosWare EasyAdmin. The system administrator,
however, can register new recipients from the control panel of the machine even
when the method of recipient specification is limited.
z The users who belong to an authorization group for which [Restrict Recipient
Selection Method] is set to [No Restriction] can directly specify a recipient for fax /
Internet fax or an e-mail transmission.
Stored Programming
z The following features and operations cannot be registered on a stored program.
- Registration and call of a stored program
- EP Diagnostic Request
- System Settings
- The [Media Print - Text] and [Media Print - Photos] buttons on the [Services Home]
screen
Appendix
581
15 Appendix
Software Option
When you buy the Software Option, we provide you with the documentation including
"LICENSE AGREEMENT". Set the software key (passcode) specified on the
documentation for [Tools] > [System Settings] > [Common Service Settings] >
[Maintenance] > [Software Options] on the machine to use the feature.
z The individual Software Option is required for each machine. (You cannot install one
Software Option on multiple machines.) You can install multiple Software Options on
a machine.
z
For some Software Options, a device must be installed with the software key.
Power Source
z
The machine has the power switch and the main power switch. While the power
switch is off, the machine does not operate.
z
While the power switch is off, the machine does not receive faxes.
Output Color
When you select [Auto Detect] in [Output Color] for a copy job or select [Color] in
[Output Color] for a print job, the machine may consume yellow, magenta, and cyan
toner cartridges and drum cartridges even when your document is black and white.
In addition, when [Background Suppression (Color Copy)] is set to [High Speed] under
Appendix
[Tools] > [Common Service Settings] > [Image Quality Adjustment], yellow, magenta,
and cyan toner cartridges and drum cartridges are always used. Thus these color toner
cartridges and drum cartridges are consumed even when your document is black and
white.
15
Notes and Restrictions on the Use of the Copy Feature
Copy Feature
The machine does not offer the Improves Fit feature.
582
Notes and Restrictions
Pages per Side for Black & White and Color Mixed Documents and Meter Count
If you copy a document that contains black & white and color pages by specifying
[Pages per Side], an output sheet that has both black & white and color pages will be
counted as a color page.
PostScript Driver
Some options such as Poster (Photo Enlargement) are not supported by the PostScript
driver. With the Pages Per Sheet (N-Up) feature, you can specify 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16 pages
up, and with or without frame borders.
In this case, select [RAW] for [Adobe Communication Protocol] under [Tools] >
[Connectivity & Network Setup] > [Port Settings] >[USB] to properly print data which
includes EPS files with binary data.
ContentsBridge 15
With ContentsBridge, you can print PDF, TIFF, JPEG, and XPS data by drag and drop.
To print DocuWorks documents, however, DocuWorks Viewer Light (free distribution)
or DocuWorks 6.0 or later (purchase separately) is required. PDF and TIFF print data
will be transferred to the machine directly, whereas DocuWorks document data will be
first processed by the client computer, and then transferred to the machine and printed.
583
15 Appendix
of those slots can be recognized. The slot to be used differs depending on the card
readers. Some of the cards and slots of memory card readers may not be used on the
machine, and the operation is not guaranteed.
When printing 2 sided, depending on the application being used, blank sheets can be
inserted automatically to adjust pages. These blank sheets inserted by the application
also are counted by the meter.
584
Notes and Restrictions
ThinPrint
z
To install "ThinPrint.print" to Windows Server 2003 or Windows Server 2008, a ".print
Application Server Engine" license is required.
z ThinPrint can operate in an IPv4 environment, but not in an IPv6 environment.
z
Up to three can be connected simultaneously. The fourth or above connection
requests are stored in the queue. Up to 10 connection requests can be stored in the
queue. If exceeding 10, another connection request is no longer received. After
preceding connections are terminated, the connection requests in the queue will be
processed subsequently when the total number of the connections becomes less
than four.
z
Functions to control jobs, such as canceling or suspending jobs, are not provided.
Instead, you can cancel a job on the [Job Status] screen from the control panel, or
from CentreWare Internet Services.
z The machine prints jobs in the order in which they are spooled. The jobs may not be
printed in the order in which the job requests are received by the machine.
z If the power is switched off, this feature can store the order of jobs spooled and their
data. If the power switched off while a job is being received, the job is deleted.
585
15 Appendix
Store to USB
z The Scanner Kit and the Scan to USB Kit are required to use this service.
z You cannot use this service on job flows (whose Target is Scan Jobs or Folder).
z The USB 2.0 compliant memory device is supported.
z Unlike a dialog box in a computer, no message appears when you insert a USB
memory device into the machine. Neither file nor directory names in a USB memory
device are displayed on the touch screen.
z
You cannot delete the files or folders in a USB memory device using the machine.
z
To prevent you from removing a USB memory device while it is being accessed, an
icon showing that the removal of a USB memory device is prohibited appears on the
touch screen. Be sure to remove a USB memory device from the machine after the
message "Data has been transferred." is displayed on the touch screen.
z
When the data size exceeds the capacity of the USB memory device while the
machine is performing the Store to USB service, the job in progress is cancelled.
z
Neither the Media Print - Text nor Media Print - Photos feature can be used while the
Store to USB service is in progress. The Store to USB service cannot be used as well
while the Media Print - Text or Media Print - Photos feature is in progress.
z You can enable or disable the Store to USB service from CentreWare Internet
Services in the System Administration mode. You cannot set it from the touch
screen. (The default setting is [Enabled].)
z
You can set not to display the [Store to USB] service on the [Services Home] screen
from the touch screen.
Appendix
z
You can use a commercially available memory card reader that is single-slot type to
save data, but the operation is not guaranteed. When you use a multi-slot memory
card reader, only one of those slots can be recognized. The slot to be used differs
depending on the card readers. Some of the cards and slots of memory card readers
may not be used on the machine, and the operation is not guaranteed.
15 z The machine may not be able to recognize a USB memory device that was formatted
by a digital camera or a tool other than the Windows standard format tool.
586
Notes and Restrictions
z Names such as workgroup names, server names, and shared names on the network
may not be displayed alphabetically on the list.
S/MIME Communication
The E-mail and Internet Fax services support S/MIME.
Searchable PDF (when the Searchable PDF Kit (Optional) is Installed) (ApeosPort
series models only)
z
We recommend that you set [300 dpi] for [Resolution] when you use the optical
character recognition (OCR) feature.
z
For Store to Folder, you cannot select [Searchable] for [Searchable Text].
z
When you use CentreWare Internet Services to retrieve a file from a folder, you can
set [Searchable Text] if all scanned images of the file in the folder are set as follows:
- Image Size: 15 x 15 mm to 309 x 432 mm
- Color Scanning: Auto Detect, Color, Grayscale, Black & White (Black & White only
for some models)
Appendix
- Original Type: Photo & Text, Text (for faxes, all types)
- Color Space: sRGB
- Resolution: 200dpi, 300dpi (for faxes, all resolutions)
- Reduce / Enlarge: 100% (for faxes, all ratios)
587
15 Appendix
z If you cancel the scanning of a document by pressing the <Stop> button on the
control panel or the [Delete] button in the touch screen, selecting [Preview] may not
display all the scanned files.
Split Files
You cannot select [Single File for Each Page] when using the Store to Folder or Job
Flow service.
Thumbnail View
z Files in a folder may not be displayed in thumbnail view in the following cases. In
those cases, display them in list view.
- Some file is not displayed in thumbnail view even though it is stored in the folder.
- Characters and images are not correctly displayed because they are scaled down
Appendix
15 If the power is cut off immediately after a scanned file is stored in a folder, or if the
z
hard disk space is insufficient to display thumbnails, files in the folder may not be
displayed in thumbnail view. In that case, display them in list view.
588
Notes and Restrictions
Relay Broadcast
The machine has the function of an initiating station but does not have the function of
a relay station.
The machine does not support G4 communications, but if a relay station supports G4
communications, the machine can select a G4 communication function that a relay
station performs as an instruction for relay broadcast.
Simple Fax
z
While you are making the settings for [Fax / Internet Fax], you cannot switch to the
[Simple Fax] screen. To switch to the [Simple Fax] screen, you must return to the
[Services Home] screen. Once you return to the [Services Home] screen, the
settings you have made will be cleared.
z
You can re-enter a recipient after entering the recipient to prevent sending a fax to a
wrong address.
z
You cannot use address numbers to specify recipients for Broadcast Send, group
dial numbers, the Address Book, and wildcards.
Printer Lockout
Appendix
If the power is switched off when both [Set Lockout Duration] and [Allow User to Lock
Out] are selected in [Printer Lockout], the manually configured [Lock Out Printer]
setting is cleared. If the power is switched on again, [Set Lockout Duration] will be
effective regardless of the [Lock Out Printer] setting.
Activity Report 15
z The number of a smart card cannot be displayed.
z When you use an older type smart card (a smart card compatible with IC Card
Reader for FeliCa/IC Card Reader Pro 1.0), the number of the smart card may be
displayed.
589
15 Appendix
- DocuCentre-IV C4430
- DocuCentre-IV C2260
- ApeosPort-IV C5570
15 - DocuCentre-IV C5570
- ApeosPort-IV C4470
- DocuCentre-IV C4470
- ApeosPort-IV C3370
- DocuCentre-IV C3370
- ApeosPort-IV C3371
- DocuCentre-IV C3371
- ApeosPort-IV C2270
- DocuCentre-IV C2270
590
Notes and Restrictions
- ApeosPort-III C4405
- DocuCentre-III C4405
- ApeosPort-III C3305/C2205
- DocuCentre-III C3305/C2205
- ApeosPort-III 4000/3000
- DocuCentre-III 4000/3000
- ApeosPort-III 7000/6000/5000
- DocuCentre-III 7000/6000/5000
- ApeosPort-III C4400
- DocuCentre-III C4400
- ApeosPort-III C3300/C2200
- DocuCentre-III C3300/C2200
- DocuCentre-III 4000/3000
- ApeosPort-II 7000/6000/5000
- DocuCentre-II 7000/6000/5000
- ApeosPort-II C7500/C6500/C5400
- DocuCentre-II C7500/C6500/C5400
- DocuCentre-II 4000/3000
- Papered-II 4000/3000
- DocuCentre-II C4300/C3300/C2200
- ApeosPort-II C4300/C3300/C2200
- ApeosPort C7550 I/C6550 I/C5540 I
- ApeosPort 750 I/650 I/550 I
- ApeosPort C4535 I/C3626 I/C2521 I
- ApeosPort 450 I/350 I
- DocuCentre Color f450/f360/f250
- DocuCentre f285/f235
z When [Resend Attempts] is set to [On] and the status of the Internet Fax Direct
feature enters Resend Required, the subsequent jobs will not be executed until the
jobs in Standby status finish.
z
Transmission results of Internet faxes cannot be listed on Transmission Report - Job
Undelivered or Transmission Report by recipients. Transmission results of Internet
Direct faxes can be listed on the reports.
The Internet fax profile that can be processed varies depending on the machine that
the recipient uses. When specifying an Internet fax profile, confirm whether it can be
processed by the recipient's machine.
When an Internet fax profile not supported by the recipient's machine is specified
15
z
If the Internet fax profile you specified is not supported by the recipient's machine,
the image you sent cannot be displayed or printed on the recipient's machine. Before
using an Internet fax profile, confirm if it can be processed by both your machine and
the recipient's machine.
z
TIFF files and Internet fax profiles that can be processed upon Internet fax reception
- TIFF file format: TIFF-FX (RFC2301)
- Internet fax profile: TIFF-S, TIFF-F, TIFF-J, TIFF-C
591
15 Appendix
If receiving an unsupported Internet fax profile, the machine may not be able to print
the file. If receiving a TIFF-C profile, the machine prints in black and white.
z Transmission conditions for broadcast transmission
- When sending a document via a broadcast transmission, it can be sent to both
Internet fax and regular fax addresses at the same time. To Internet fax addresses,
the document will be sent by e-mail, and to regular fax addresses, the document
will be sent by fax.
- When the transmission conditions are different for each address, set all addresses
to the following settings:
• Transmission mode:G3 Auto
• Internet fax profile :TIFF-S
• Read/delivery receipt:None
E-mail Forwarding
If the fax you received is a JBIG-compressed image, and if the Internet fax profile of the
forwarding destination is set to TIFF-F, the machine converts the image into MH format
when forwarding. When the Internet fax profile is TIFF-S, the data is forwarded with its
size and resolution unchanged.
The machine determines whether a TIFF file attached to an e-mail complies with the
content type defined in RFC2301 and RFC3250. If the content type is compliant with
RFC2301 and RFC3250, the machine selects appropriate paper to render the file
image as a fax-received image.
15 Even when the file was received via Internet Fax, if its content type is not compliant with
FRC2301 or RFC3250, the machine will not properly select paper for it. For example,
an incoming fax that is B5 size may be printed on A4 paper instead.
Such problems may improve depending on the usage. Contact our Customer Support
Center for further information.
592
Notes and Restrictions
If the data size is still too large to send, reduce their size by lowering the image
resolution or transmission resolution.
Network Security
We do not guarantee the security of any information disclosed over the network.
Notes on Security
E-mail uses the Internet, which is a network connecting computers worldwide, as its
transmission path. Thus, since other signals also are sent over the Internet, you must
pay attention to security to prevent third parties from reading or tampering of your e-
mail.
Consequently, to transmit important information, we recommend that you use other
transmission methods that guarantee security. In addition, to avoid the reception of
unwanted e-mail, we recommend that you not disclose your e-mail address to third
parties unless necessary.
593
15 Appendix
Example 2:
When you select [Off] for Document 1 (4 pages) and [2 Pages] for Document 2 (2
pages), both Documents 1 and 2 are set to [2 Pages] and the number of printed pages
is calculated as follows:
z
Total pages: 5
z
2 up: 5
On ApeosWare Log Management or ApeosWare Accounting Service, the numbers of
pages for 2in1, 4in1, and 8in1 are also calculated in the same way as described above.
The meter on the [Billing Information] screen calculates the number of printed pages
correctly regardless of the [Pages per Side] setting.
z
When installing the machine in an environment that is operating a mail transfer agent
(MTA) in a private segment, set the machine to adapt to the operation system being
used.
z For information about supported ISPs, contact our Customer Support Center.
15 z
When received via POP, the fax cannot be sent using the Fax Gateway feature. This
is because POP receiving does not forward an Internet fax document received by e-
mail to the fax machine.
Feature Specifications
Details of the features related to e-mail are as follows:
z Transmission specifications
Supported protocol : SMTP
Port number : 25 (default)
594
Notes and Restrictions
595
15 Appendix
Job Instruction
Job
Job from the
Execution
Control Panel*1
Copy Required O
Print Printing of a document*2 instructed from a Required*3 O
client computer
Printing of a document*4 instructed from the Required O
<Job Status> button > [Secure Print Jobs &
More]
Fax Fax transmission, Broadcast Send Required O
Store for Poling Required O
Incoming Fax Print Required*3 O
Printing of a document in the Public Folder Required O
([Job Status] > [Secure Print Jobs & More]
on the control panel)
Direct Fax Direct Fax transmission Not required U
Internet Fax Internet fax Transmission Required O
Internet fax reception/printing Required*3 O
Internet fax reception/Store Internet fax - Not required U
Local Folder
Forwarding an incoming Internet fax to a Not required U
regular fax machine
Forwarding an incoming fax to an Internet Not required X
fax
Scan Store to Folder, Scan to PC, E-mail, Required O
Network Scanning, Store & Send Link, and
Store to USB
Report/List Automatic printing of a report/list other than Not required X
Appendix
596
Notes and Restrictions
Job Instruction
Job
Job from the
Execution
Control Panel*1
z
Files in a folder can be retrieved in DocuWorks or PDF format from CentreWare
Internet Services, but DocuWorks and PDF files that are encrypted or with signature
attached cannot be retrieved from CentreWare Internet Services.
z When you retrieve a file in PDF format from CentreWare Internet Services, the PDF
file cannot be optimized for Web view.
15
Internet/Intranet Connection
Depending on the web server, server application, proxy server, and firewall, you may
not be able to connect to the Internet or intranet.
597
15 Appendix
To connect to the Internet or intranet using a third party server application, proxy, or
firewall, the following requirements must be met:
z Support Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server
2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows Vista, or Windows 7
z
Comply with the following conditions:
- RFC2616: Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP/1.1
(Standard connection/SSL connection/Proxy authentication)
- RFC2617: HTTP Authentication: Basic and Digest Access Authentication
(only Basic authentication is supported, the other authentications are not
supported)
- RFC2817: Upgrading to TLS Within HTTP/1.1
- RFC2818: HTTP Over TLS
z Supporting the HTTP/HTTPS schemata
z Supporting the GET/CONNECT/POST methods
Supported OS
There are notes and restrictions on Microsoft Windows XP Professional x64 Edition,
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions, Microsoft Windows Vista x64 Edition,
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 x64 Editions, Microsoft Windows 7 x64 Edition, and
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 x64 Editions Drivers. For notes and restrictions on
the supported operating systems, refer to our Web site before using the operating
systems.
z
For the print drivers for Mac OS 9 (without Plug-ins), the User Details Setup, Secure
Print, Sample Set, Delayed Print, and Print Stored File features are not available. For
the other restrictions, refer to the manual or Readme included in the driver's CD-
ROM.
15
Print Driver for Mac OS X
z
Mac OS X 10.5/10.6 is supported.
z
The Direct Fax feature cannot be used.
z
There is neither the feature to adjust image quality nor to save toner. There are also
some limitations, for example, in paper size settings and paper types. To fully utilize
the Print feature, install the Adobe PostScript 3 Kit (optional).
598
Notes and Restrictions
- The [Pages per Side] feature can be specified only when you print PDF files.
- When [Port Settings] is set to [NetWare] or [SMB], set the transport protocol to
[TCP/IP].
- HTTP or HTTPS can be used for the communications between the machine and
a remote server. 15
- Printable file formats are [TIFF], [PDF], and [XPS].
- Print data is spooled to the hard disk of the machine, and then printed as a job.
Therefore, the print data is recognized as a job while the data is being spooled to
the hard disk.
- The Secure Print feature cannot be used.
- Printing is available even when [Auto Print] is set to [On] under [Machine Clock /
Timers].
- "Web Applications - Print" is displayed on the [Job Status] screen.
599
15 Appendix
- The <Online> indicator is unlit while the print data is being spooled to the hard disk.
Encrypted Communication
Encrypting HTTP communication enables you to encrypt communication data for IPP
printing (SSL encrypted communication). The data is encrypted only on the network,
but send data itself is not encrypted.
Remote Accounts feature. You cannot restrict the output color* or the number of
pages.
* If ApeosWare Authentication Management (purchase separately) or ApeosWare Authentication Agent (purchase
separately) is used as an authentication system, you can restrict the output color.
15 z
In this feature, neither Print nor Direct Fax can be restricted. To restrict print
operations, use the Charge Print or Private Charge Print feature. If there is a security
problem, prohibit Direct Fax. To prohibit Direct Fax, contact our Customer Support
Center.
z When you change Login Type to or from [Login to Remote Accounts], user
information, private folders, and Personal Sheets registered on the machine will be
deleted.
600
Notes and Restrictions
usage. If the receiving buffer size is smaller than the transmitted data, the machine
may not be able to receive the data.
601
15 Appendix
While Printing
z When [Receiving Buffer - SMB] is set to either [Spool to Hard Disk] or [Spool to
Memory]
If the transmitted print data size exceeds the available capacity of either the hard disk
or memory, the print data is not received.
Note • When the print data exceeds the receivable size, some computers may immediately re-
transmit the print data. In this case, the computer appears to be not operating. Remedy this
problem by canceling the print data transmission from the computer.
z When [Receiving Buffer - SMB] is set to [No Spooling]
When the machine receives a print request from a computer, the machine cannot
accept print requests from any other computers.
z When a computer's IP address or a computer name is changed
When you change a computer's IP address or a computer name, queries and cancel
processes submitted from the machine are no longer executed correctly. Thus, turn
the machine off and on when there is no print data in the receiving buffer.
Appendix
Note • From the control panel on the machine, you can cancel print jobs or force the machine to
print the jobs remaining in the receiving buffer. For more information on the operation, refer
to "10 Job Status" in the User Guide.
z When the machine is off-line
15 If a computer instructs a print job while the machine is off-line, the machine does not
receive the data, and a write error dialog box is displayed on the computer.
602
Notes and Restrictions
z When printing via the SMB port on Windows XP, the user name may not be displayed
correctly.
SMB Authentication
When an IP address or a host name is used to designate the authentication server for
SMB authentication, even if the domain name is incorrect, the authentication succeeds
if the correct user name and passcode are entered.
again.
However, if the machine was turned off immediately after a computer instructed a
print job, the job may remain on the computer. In this case, when the machine is
turned on, the data stored on the computer is printed before any jobs instructed
subsequently. 15
z When [Receiving Buffer - LPD] is set to [Spool to Hard Disk]
All print data spooled in the machine hard disk, including the data which is being
printed, is saved. In this case, when the machine is turned on, the data stored on the
machine hard disk is printed before any jobs instructed subsequently.
z When [Receiving Buffer - LPD] is set to [No Spooling]
All print data spooled in the machine receiving buffer, including the data which is
being printed, is erased. The print data does not remain when the machine is turned
on again.
603
15 Appendix
However, if the machine was turned off immediately after a computer instructed a
print job, the job may remain on the computer. In this case, when the machine is
turned on, the data stored on the computer is printed before any jobs instructed
subsequently.
While Printing
z
When [Receiving Buffer - LPD] is set to either [Spool to Hard Disk] or [Spool to
Memory]
If the transmitted print data size exceeds the available capacity of either hard disk or
memory, the print data is not received.
Note • When the print data exceeds the receivable size, some computers may immediately re-
transmit the print data. In this case, the computer appears to be not operating. Remedy this
problem by canceling the print data transmission from the computer.
z
When [Receiving Buffer - LPD] is set to [No Spooling]
When the machine receives a print request from a computer, the machine cannot
accept print requests from any other computers.
z
When a computer's IP address or a computer name is changed
When you change a computer's IP address or a computer name, queries and cancel
processes submitted from the machine are no longer executed correctly. Thus, turn
the machine off and on when there is no print data in the receiving buffer.
Note • From the control panel on the machine, you can cancel print jobs or force the machine to
print the jobs remaining in the receiving buffer. For more information on the operation, refer
to "10 Job Status" in the User Guide.
Printer Name
The system is set so that printer names used for identification by clients are not
duplicated on the network. When assigning a new printer name, if the same printer
name already exists on the network, the system automatically changes the printer
name when the machine is started.
<Rules for changing printer name>
Printer names are changed according to the following rules:
z
Names of 31 characters or less
Appendix
Adds a number to the end of the printer name. If the same printer name with the
number added already exists on the network, increases the added number by one.
z Names of 32 characters
15 Changes the last character of the printer name to a number. If the same printer name
with the last character changed already exists on the network, increases the
changed number by one.
If the printer name is changed, the previous printer name set before the change is
displayed when browsing [Protocols] on the [Properties] tab of CentreWare Internet
Services. However, since the changed printer name is registered on the network,
clients can browse the machine by using the changed printer name. Turning the
machine off and then on after changing the printer name activates the machine with
the changed printer name. If the same printer name already exists on the network,
the printer name is changed according to the rules described above when the
machine is started.
604
Notes and Restrictions
Assign a printer name so as not to duplicate other printer names on the network.
Zone Name
Zone names can be set in [Protocols] on the [Properties] tab of CentreWare Internet
Services. However, if the zone name set does not exist on the network to which the
machine is connected, the zone name is automatically changed to the default name.
To set a zone name, use the zone name that already exists on the network to which
the machine is connected.
Printer Name
z
If you change a printer name or a host name that is already assigned, documents
may be printed by a printer that is not selected.
z
If a printer name or a host name is duplicated on the same network, one of the
duplicated names is automatically changed by adding a number to avoid duplication.
z If you change a printer name or a host name, because of the limitation on the number
or type of characters used, a name differing from the designated name may be
assigned. We recommend that you not change printer names or host names.
printable
z IPv6 does not support the following protocols:
- NetWare IP
z
- UPnP Discovery
Some features of SMB are not supported (If you attempt to use services with a
15
NetBIOS name, communication may not be available in some environment).
z IPv6-in-IPv4-tunneling in the machine itself is not supported.
Important • If [IP Mode] is set to [IPv6 Mode], the IPv6-inIPv4-tunneling cannot be performed.
z If more than one router exist in the same subnet, a communication error may occur.
z
In a dual stack environment, some services may cause performance problems
depending on the network settings (for example, when you attempt to set the
605
15 Appendix
machine to prioritize IPv6 in an environment where the Web server is started with
IPv4).
z In a multi-prefix environment (where multiple IPv6 global addresses are used), data
transmission from the machine to a device installed on another network may fail.
z
In a multi-prefix environment (where multiple IPv6 global addresses are used), an
address that is not assigned to the machine may be used for communication.
z The machine may be assigned an unavailable address, such as site local addresses
(fec0::) or the documentation prefix (2001:db8::/32), as an autoconfigured IPv6
address or as an IPv6 DNS server address.
z
The machine may use the DNS information for IPv4 rather than that for IPv6 if: the
machine is in Dual Stack mode, the DNS information for both IPv4 and IPv6 is
configured, the machine is to be communicate with a device that is specified using
the FQDN, and the machine has just been turned on.
z
The machine may display an incorrect machine address.
Example:
Either the IPv4 or IPv6 address is not displayed in Dual Stack mode.
A different IPv6 address is displayed.
z A time synchronization server cannot be specified in IPv6 format. Use the IPv4
format to specify a time synchronization server directly.
z WINS does not support IPv6 communication.
z When a self-signed certificate is used for SSL communication, observe the following
restrictions when specifying the printer URL:
- When specifying the machine by using the domain name (for IPv4 or IPv6):
Set the host name and domain name for the machine before creating a self-signed
certificate.
Example:
When the FQDN is "csw.ipv6.domain.local", specify csw for the host name, and
ipv6.domain.local for the domain name.
- When specifying the machine by using the IPv4 address:
Import a self-signed certificate that is created in IPv4 or Dual-Stack mode.
- When specifying the machine by using the IPv6 address:
Secure IPP (IPP-S) communication is not available.
z When IPv6 is enabled and IPv4 is disabled on the machine, you cannot specify a
storage location for the Browse function of the Scan to PC (SMB) service is not
available.
When the Scan to PC (FTP) service is used, only ASCII characters can be used for
Appendix
file names.
z In the following cases, since the addresses may not be recognized as those of the
same machine, the lpq command (for status check) and the lprm command (for
15 canceling) may not be available for LPD print jobs.
- When simultaneously operating IPv4 and IPv6 addresses with the same host
- When simultaneously operating multiple IPv6 addresses with the same host
z IPv6 addresses may not be correctly recorded on job logs. Use an IPv4 network for
correct logging.
z When searching a device outside the router via SMB, directly specify the address.
Multicasting is supported only within a local link (FF02::1).
606
Notes and Restrictions
Print E-mail
The machine cancels receiving e-mails but does not display error codes when disk
space is insufficient.
Appendix
15
607
15 Appendix
This section describes how to use an external telephone connected to the machine with
the Fax feature.
Placing a Call
The following describes how to place a call using the external telephone.
To place a call, the following two methods can be used:
z Dialing with the receiver lifted (off-hook dialing)
Off-hook Dialing
The following describes how to place a call with off-hook dialing.
608
Using the Telephone
On-hook Dialing
The following describes how to place a call with on-hook dialing. When placing a call,
we recommend that you turn the line monitor volume to "Loud".
The volume of the line monitor can be changed in the System Administration mode. For more
information on how to change the volume, refer to "Line Monitor Volume" (P.142). By factory default,
the volume is set to [Normal].
15
5 After the call is finished, place the receiver back in the cradle.
Important • Make sure that the receiver is placed properly in the cradle. Otherwise, the line remains
"busy".
609
15 Appendix
Activity Report
Item Description
No. The serial numbers for transmissions is shown.
Doc. Job numbers that the machine automatically assigned to
documents when the documents were received.
Remote Station Information on recipient to which transmission is made is
recorded in the following order of priority.
Transmitting (speed dialing)
cRecipient
dRemote terminal name
eG3 ID (including spaces)
fTel. No.
gCommunication mode EC (or G3, SG3)
Transmitting (when all digits are dialed)
cRemote terminal name
dG3 ID (including spaces)
eTel. No.
fCommunication mode EC (or G3, SG3)
Receiving
cRemote terminal name
dG3 ID (including spaces)
eCommunication mode EC (or G3, SG3)
Note • You can set the number of character digits displayed for
the recipient whether the first 40 digits or the last 40
digits. For details on setting up, see "Activity Report -
Recipient" (P.149). The factory default displays the first
40 digits.
Start Time The date and time that the communication began are shown.
In Batch Send, the start time of the transmission for each doc-
ument is recorded.
Duration The duration of the transmission is displayed. In Batch Send,
Appendix
610
Activity Report
Item Description
Mode The mode used for the communication is shown.
There are three modes: G3, EC, and SG3 (Super G3). (This
field is blank if a mode other than above these was used.)
Contents The information about the communication is indicated.
See the Note field at the bottom of the report for a list of
abbreviations and their definitions.
Transmitting
cRemote service dRedial eFolder XXX fBroadcast/Multi-
Poll gPolling hRelay Broadcast Assignment iFax forward-
ing box XXX
Receiving
cFolder XXX dPolling eReceiving line box XXX
Note • XXX indicates the Folder number.
Status The result of the operation is indicated.
Completed......The operation ended normally.
Busy ...............The recipient is busy or did not answer.
Auto Send ......The document is being re-sent and the set re-
send times has not been exceeded.
Canceled........The communication was terminated.
Check Remote Station ... An error caused by the recipient or
the line during communication.
Send Again ... Document must be re-transmitted
due to an error occurred in the
sending process for the auto re-
transmission limit being exceeded.
Receive Again ... Ask recipient to re-instruct poll due
to an error occurred in the polling
process.
... Ask recipient to re-send due to an
error occurred in the receiving
process.
Disconnected ... Check that the line is properly
connected.
XXX-XXX Error code
For more information on lines, refer to "2 Product Overview" >
"Machine Components" > "Telephone line connectors" in the User
Guide and for more information on XXX-XXX (error code), refer to
"Error Code" (P.432).
Total All pages received or sent are recorded.
Appendix
15
611
15 Appendix
This section describes how to install the HDD Extension Kit (optional) to the machine.
1 Switch off the power, and then switch off the main power.
For information on how to switch off the power and the main power, refer to "2 Product Overview" >
"Power Source" in the User Guide.
15
612
Installing the HDD Extension Kit (Optional)
15
For information on how to switch on the power and the main power, refer to "2 Product Overview" >
"Power Source" in the User Guide.
613
15 Appendix
Glossary
Term Description
Border Limit One more sheet is used when the length of the transmitted
(Page split threshold value) document exceeds the length of paper installed on the
receiving terminal. A margin at the bottom of a received
document can be eliminated so that the data can be printed on
one page.
The amount of space that can be removed from the bottom of
a document is the border limit. When the border limit value is
small, the data is printed on the next page. But when it is large,
a larger space can be cut so that data can be printed on one
page.
Communication(s) A communications network that can offer voice data
(telephone), image data (fax), video data (videotex) and PC
data (PC communication service) over the same channel.
In this guide, it is mostly referred to as transmitting/receiving
images as well as speaking with a remote user.
Dial In this guide, it refers to entering a recipient's fax number.
The method of dialing provided by the machine include:
manual dialing using the numeric keypad, speed dialing, one
touch dialing, and using the Address Book, etc.
Dial Tone A tone generated from the telephone line. It indicates that you
are connected to the line.
ECM Error Correction Mode.
A type of G3 transmission. ECM transmission sends the
document image data in segments and retransmits segments
that the remote machine receives incorrectly.
"ECM" described on the [Activity Report] shows that the
communication was processed using ECM.
Fax Gateway Connects the Internet network to regular telephone lines,
enabling e-mail documents to be sent as fax documents to
regular fax machines.
Fax Server A feature that transfers image data received by the machine to
a Server Fax server and transfers image data received by a
Server Fax server to the machine via a network based on the
settings you made.
Using this feature enables you to manage multiple machines.
F Code A transmission method defined by Communications and
Appendix
614
Glossary
Term Description
G3 A facsimile communication system standardized by the
advisory committee for International Telecommunications
(CCITT, now the ITU-T).
Header A record of the sender. It is printed on the top edge of a
received document.
ICM Image Color Matching.
A color management software used with Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. It corrects device-
dependent color differences to match the colors printed on
your output with the colors displayed on your screen.
Internet Fax Unlike a regular fax machine, Internet Fax uses corporate
networks or the Internet to send or receive e-mail (TIFF
attachments).
Line Monitor Allows you to audibly monitor a transmission through the
speaker after dialing and until you are connected.
Local Device This term refers to this machine. This is a general term for
terminals such as telephones, facsimile machines, and
personal computers.
Off-hook Dialing Dialing with the handset off the hook.
On-hook Dialing Dialing with the handset on the cradle.
Polling A feature that allows you to retrieve a document from a remote
machine.
Profile A protocol controlling image resolution, paper size, and other
attributes when sending or receiving faxes using Internet Fax
(Internet Fax). The profiles that can be used vary with the
Internet fax of the remote terminal. When specifying a profile,
check that it can be handled by the other party's Internet Fax-
enabled machine.
Recipient The person or terminal you send a document to. "Dialing"
indicates the operation of entering a recipient's telephone
number.
For Internet Fax (Internet Fax), this refers to the recipient's e-
mail address.
Remote Terminal A terminal with which you want to communicate. This is a
general term for terminals such as telephones, facsimile
machines and personal computers.
Appendix
Receiving Paper Size A feature that specifies the output paper size for received fax
documents. The specified paper size will be declared to
recipients from the sender.
Send Password This feature requires to enter an "S" and the ID of a remote
terminal after entering its fax number. This prevents
transmission errors. 15
Super G3 (SG3) A G3 communication system conforming to ITU V.34.
This system offers higher transmission speed (33.6 kbps) than
the normal G3 mode.
Transmission Interval The period between transmissions.
615
15 Appendix
EP System
Customer
proxy server
EP-BB
the Internet
Fuji Xerox
customer's
intranet
EP Center
15 The machine notifies amount used of consumables such as toner cartridges to us. We
send you consumables based on usage track records.
616
Index
Index
Administrator Shared Job Flow Sheet .............. 366 automatically printed reports/lists ...................... 109
Alert Tone ......................................................... 142
Allocate Memory ............................................... 192 B
Allow Casual Users to Edit From Field ............. 218
Allow Guest Users to Edit Field ........................ 218 Back Cover ........................................................ 168
Allow to edit From if Search Found ................... 219 Background Pattern (Watermark) ...................... 152
Allow User to Disable Active Settings ............... 264 Background Suppression (Black Copy) ............. 147
Allows to edit From if Search Failed ................. 219 Background Suppression (Color Copy) ............. 147
Alternative Name for Account ID ....................... 254 Background Suppression (default value) ... 165, 200
617
Background Suppression (Photo & Text) ..........169 configuring the SNMP port ........................ 311, 319
Background Suppression (Scan Jobs) ..............147 Confirmation Options ......................................... 207
Background Suppression Level .........................204 Connect with Accounting/Billing Device ............ 255
Background Suppression Level (Text) ...............169 Connection Interval ........................................... 139
Banner Sheet .....................................................196 connectivity ................................................ 527, 529
Banner Sheet Offset ..........................................196 Connectivity & Network Setup ........................... 172
Banner Sheet Tray .............................................196 consumables ....................................................... 54
Base Tone .........................................................141 consumables status notice (by e-mail) .............. 294
Batch Send ........................................................209 continuous copy ................................................ 525
Bates Stamp ......................................................167 continuous copy speed ...................................... 525
Billing - Day Time ...............................................246 continuous print speed ...................................... 526
Billing - Midnight ................................................246 Contrast ..................................................... 164, 200
Billing - Night Time .............................................246 Control Panel Alert Tone ................................... 141
Billing Data List ..................................................106 Control Panel Select Tone ................................ 141
Billing Information ..............................................116 Convert Custom Size to Standard Size ............. 220
Block Inbound Faxes .........................................212 Copy Control ..................................................... 168
Block Unknown Fax Numbers ...........................212 Copy Defaults .................................................... 163
Border Limit .......................................................210 Copy Output ...................................................... 166
Broadcast Checkbox on 1st Tab ........................208 Copy Reports .................................................... 102
Broadcast Report ...............................................109 Copy Service Settings ....................................... 162
Broadcast Starting Rate .....................................215 Copy Tab - Features Allocation ......................... 162
Broadcast/Multi-Poll Report ...............................149 copying a job flow sheet .................................... 239
Cover Page ....................................................... 244
C Cover Tray ......................................................... 168
Create / View User Accounts ............................ 248
calibration ....................................................87, 148 Create Authorization Groups ............................. 260
capacity ..............................................................530 Create Folder .................................................... 230
Center Erase/Binding Edge Erase .....................166 Create Job Flow Sheet ...................................... 232
CentreWare Internet Services ...........................268 Create Job Flow Sheet Keyword ....................... 240
Certificate Revocation Retrieval Settings ..........190 Create Text String ............................................. 154
changing the paper type ......................................49 creating a new job flow ...................................... 235
Charge Print Jobs ..............................................256 Creating Fax Group Recipients ......................... 246
Charge Rate Per Unit ........................................254 CTD ..................................................................... 81
Charge/Private Print Settings ............................262 Current System Software .................................... 99
checking paper tray status .................................101 Custom Buttons 1 to 3 ....................................... 143
cleaning the machine ...........................................79 Custom Colors ................................................... 170
coding method ...................................................529 Custom Paper Name/Color ............................... 144
Index
618
Index
Date Format ...................................................... 151 Edge Erase - Top & Bottom Edges ................... 211
Date Stamp ....................................................... 167 Edge Erase (default value) ................ 165, 166, 201
Daylight Savings ............................................... 140 Edit E-mail Recipients ....................................... 219
Default Language .............................................. 143 editing a job flow sheet ...................................... 240
Default Print Paper Size .................................... 156 E-mail ........................................................ 294, 302
Default Programming ........................................ 112 E-mail Address .......................................... 242, 249
Default Watermark (Watermark) ....................... 151 e-mail address of the machine .................. 299, 327
Default Watermark Effect (Watermark) ............. 151 E-mail Control .................................................... 217
Delay Start ........................................................ 245 E-mail Encryption .............................................. 343
Delay Start - Specific Time ............................... 207 E-mail notification .............................................. 294
Delete All Certificates/Initialize Settings ............ 151 E-mail Printing ................................................... 294
Delete All Data .................................................. 150 E-mail Sending When Search Failed ................. 219
Delete Expired Files .......................................... 231 E-mail Subject ................................................... 201
Delete Files After Retrieval ............................... 231 E-mail/Internet Fax Service Settings ................. 217
Delete Folder .................................................... 232 emulation ................................... 527, 537, 556, 563
Delete Form ...................................................... 194 emulation mode ................................. 537, 556, 563
Delete Layout Template .................................... 154 encryption .......................................................... 336
deleting a job flow sheet ................................... 239 Encryption Key for Confidential Data ................. 159
Delivery Confirmation Method ........................... 215 Energy Saver mode ............................................. 21
Delivery Receipts/Read Receipts ..................... 207 Energy Saver Timers ......................................... 140
Density (Watermark) ......................................... 152 entering System Administration mode ............... 120
Department ....................................................... 242 entering text ......................................................... 32
Device Access .................................................. 259 EP diagnostic request/repair request ................ 149
dial type ..................................................... 213, 214 EP proxy server setup ....................................... 180
Digital Signature ................................................ 343 EP system ......................................................... 616
dimensions ........................................................ 525 error code .......................................................... 432
dimensions/weight .................................... 530, 531 Error History Report ................................... 102, 114
Direct Fax .......................................................... 212 ESC/P Form Memory ........................................ 192
Display Consumables Screens ......................... 157 ESC/P Logical Printers List ............................... 103
document size ................................................... 529 ESC/P Settings List ........................................... 103
DocuWorks Direct Print ..................................... 554 ESC/P-K emulation ............................................ 537
DocuWorks signature ........................................ 348 Ethernet II .......................................................... 277
Domain Filter List ...................................... 104, 106 Ethernet Rated Speed ....................................... 176
Domain Filtering ................................................ 191 EtherTalk ........................................................... 291
Domain Name ................................................... 179 Executing calibration ........................................... 87
drum cartridge ............................................... 54, 60 Expiration Date for Files in Folder ..................... 223
Dual Color - Non-target Area Color ................... 164 extended printable area ..................................... 532
Index
619
Fax Control ........................................................208 G3 Line - Line Type ........................................... 214
Fax Data in Folder Priority .................................211 General Settings - 2nd Column ......................... 206
Fax Defaults .......................................................207 General Shared Folder ...................................... 366
Fax Number .......................................................244 Generation of URL Link ..................................... 205
Fax Received Options .......................................212 Given Name ...................................................... 242
Fax Receiving Mode ..................................113, 210
Fax Reports .......................................................105 H
Fax Screen Default ............................................206
Fax Service ........................................................155 H transport unit .................................................. 516
Fax Service Settings ..........................................206 halftone/printable colors .................................... 524
Fax Transfer from Address Book .......................215 handling paper ..................................................... 40
Fax Transfer Maximum Data Size .....................216 hard clip area ..................................................... 571
Feature Access ..................................................249 HDD ................................................................... 524
feeding speed ....................................................530 Host Name ........................................................ 179
File Format .........................................................200 HP-GL/2 Auto Layout Memory .......................... 192
File Transfer Report - Fax Server ..............110, 149 HP-GL/2 Logical Printers List ............................ 104
Files Retrieved By Client ...................................220 HP-GL/2 Palette List .......................................... 104
Fine-tune 100% .................................................168 HP-GL/2 Settings List ........................................ 104
Finisher-AB1 ......................................................530 HP-GL2 emulation ............................................. 563
first copy output time ..........................................525 HTTP ................................................................. 269
First Tab - Scan .................................................199 HTTP Proxy Server Name ................................. 179
Folder List ..........................................................107 HTTPS ............................................................... 338
Folder Name ......................................................231 HTTPS Proxy Server Name .............................. 180
Folder Report .....................................................148
Folder Selector List ............................................105 I
Folder Selector Setup ................................211, 212
Folder Service Settings ......................................220 IEEE 802.1x Settings ........................................ 190
Font Color (Watermark) .....................................152 IEEE802.3 ......................................................... 277
Font List .............................................................104 Image Enhancement ......................................... 147
Font Size (Watermark) .......................................152 Image Quality .................................................... 147
fonts ...................................................................526 image quality processing ............................. 49, 146
Force Watermark - Client Print ..........................152 image quality trouble ......................................... 394
Force Watermark - Copy ...................................152 Image Rotation .................................................. 166
Force Watermark - Media Print - Image Rotation - Rotation Direction .................. 166
Text and Photos .................................................152 Image Shift ........................................................ 166
Force Watermark - Print Stored File ..................152 Image Transfer Screen ...................................... 204
Front Cover ........................................................168 Incoming E-mail Print Options ........................... 217
Index
FTP ............................................................306, 313 Incoming Internet Fax Print Options .................. 215
FTP Client ..........................................................311 Index .................................................................. 244
FTP client port ...................................................307 inhibited media .................................................... 39
fusing unit ..............................................66, 68, 512 Initialize Hard Disk ............................................. 150
Insert Separators ............................................... 168
G Internal fonts ...................................................... 533
Internet Fax Control ........................................... 214
G3 Line - Dial Type ............................................214 Internet Fax Kit .................................................. 324
G3 Line - Fax ID ................................................214 Internet Fax Path ............................................... 214
620
Index
621
Macintosh ..........................................................278 off-hook dialing .................................................. 608
Manual Receive .................................................113 Office ................................................................. 242
Manual Redial List - Dial Mode ..........................209 Office Finisher ................................................... 515
Manual Redial List - Saved Entries ....................209 Offset Stacking .................................................. 155
Manual Send ......................................................210 One Tray Module ............................................... 531
Manual Send/Receive Default ...........................210 on-hook dialing .................................................. 609
Manually Configured IPv6 Address ...................178 operating system ....................................... 526, 529
Manually Configured IPv6 Address Prefix .........178 Operation of Up/Down Buttons .......................... 157
Manually Configured IPv6 Gateway ..................178 Optimize PDF For Fast Web View .................... 200
Mask Account ID (***) ........................................254 optional components ......................................... 535
Mask User ID (***) .....................................253, 261 Original Orientation ................................... 166, 201
Maximum Address Entries .................................217 original paper size ............................. 524, 527, 530
Maximum Data Size per E-mail .........................218 Original Size Defaults ........................ 170, 202, 213
Maximum Image Size ........................................244 Original Type ..................................... 164, 200, 207
Maximum Login Attempts by Original Type - Auto (Black & White) ................. 164
System Administrator .........................................262 Original Type - Auto (Non-Black & White) ......... 164
Maximum Number of Sets .................................170 Original Type - See-Through Paper .................. 169
Maximum Passcode Length for Stored Jobs .....224 Out of Paper Warning Tone .............................. 142
Maximum Split Count .........................................218 outgoing/incoming E-mail settings ..................... 181
Maximum Stored Pages ............168, 203, 205, 211 Output Color ...................................................... 164
Maximum Total Data Size ..................................218 Output Color Recognition .................................. 147
Media Print Service Settings ..............................222 output format ..................................................... 529
media print trouble .............................................430 output paper size ....................................... 524, 525
memory ..............................................................524 output paper weight ........................................... 524
Memory Full Procedure .....................168, 203, 211 Output Size Defaults ......................................... 203
messages ..........................................................432 output tray capacity ........................................... 525
Microsoft Network ..............................................287 Overwrite Hard Disk .................................. 110, 265
Minimum Passcode Length ...............................262
Mixed Size Originals ..........................165, 201, 207 P
Mixed Size Originals - 2 Sided Copy .................168
Mixed Size Originals Scan Mode .......................211 Pages per Side .................................................. 166
Multi-poll Report .................................................110 paper capacity ................................................... 531
paper color ........................................................ 144
N paper jams ......................................................... 508
paper size .................................................. 144, 531
Name .................................................................242 Paper Size Settings ........................................... 156
NetWare port .....................................................284 paper size/paper weight .................................... 530
Index
622
Index
Port Status - SOAP ................................... 175, 176 Quality/File Size ................................................. 201
Port Status - USB .............................................. 172 Quality/File Size for Retrieval ............................ 220
Port Status - WSD ............................................. 175 Quantity Display ................................................ 170
Port Status- SMB .............................................. 173
PostScript Default Color .................................... 196 R
PostScript Font Absence .................................. 197
PostScript Font List ........................................... 104 Read Receipts ................................................... 218
PostScript Font Substitution .............................. 197 Receive Control ................................................. 262
PostScript Logical Printers List ......................... 103 Receive E-Mail .................................................. 326
623
Receiving Buffer - EtherTalk ..............................194 Sample Job ....................................................... 166
Receiving Buffer - IPP .......................................193 Saturation .................................................. 165, 204
Receiving Buffer - LPD ......................................193 Save Deleted Faxes .......................................... 209
Receiving Buffer - NetWare ...............................193 Save In .............................................................. 243
Receiving Buffer - Port 9100 ..............................194 Save in Charge Print ......................................... 264
Receiving Buffer - SMB .....................................193 Save in Private Charge Print ............................. 263
Receiving Buffer - USB ......................................193 Save Undelivered Faxes ................................... 209
Receiving Paper Size ........................................210 Saved Faxes - Auto Delete ............................... 209
receiving protocol .......................................299, 327 Scan Ahead for Copy Job ................................. 256
Reconfirm E-mail Recipient ...............................143 Scan Defaults .................................................... 200
Reconfirm Fax / Internet Fax Recipient .............144 Scan File Transfer Report ................................. 149
recording paper size ..........................................528 Scan Reports ..................................................... 104
Reduce / Enlarge ...............................................163 Scan Service Settings ....................................... 199
Reduce 8.5 x 11" Original to A4 .........................211 Scan to e-mail ................................................... 528
Reduce/Enlarge Presets ....................170, 203, 213 Scan to PC ................................................ 302, 528
Re-enter Broadcast Recipients ..........................208 Scan/Fax Configuration Report ................. 104, 105
Re-enter Group Recipients ................................208 scanning halftone .............................................. 527
Re-enter Recipients ...........................................208 scanning resolution ........................... 524, 527, 529
Re-enter Speed Dial Recipients ........................208 scanning speed ................................................. 527
registering a server to setup ..............................225 Screen After Auto Clear .................................... 142
Relay Broadcast ................................................245 Screen Brightness ............................................. 143
remote accounting .............................................357 Screen Default ................................................... 142
remote authentication ........................................376 screen type .......................................................... 87
Remote authentication system ..........................313 Screen/Button Settings ...................................... 142
Remote Folder ...................................................245 Searchable - Page Orientation .......................... 204
replacing drum cartridges ....................................60 Searchable Text ................................................ 201
replacing staple cartridge .....................................65 Searchable Text Compression .......................... 202
replacing toner cartridges ....................................56 Security Settings ............................................... 187
Reports ..............................................................148 semi standard paper ............................................ 35
Reset Account ...................................................250 send document size .......................................... 528
Reset Total Impressions ....................................251 Send E-Mail ....................................................... 326
Reset User Accounts .........................................251 Sender ID .......................................................... 209
Resolution ..........................................201, 207, 244 Separator Rollers Inside the Printer .............. 75, 76
Response to Read Receipts ..............................217 Serial Number ..................................................... 99
Restrict Recipient Selection Method ..................160 Server Fax ......................................................... 329
Restrict User to Edit Address Book ...................160 Server Name/IP address ................................... 243
Resume Job After Print Error .............................195 Service Access .................................................. 259
Index
624
Index
625
U Web Applications - When SSL Certificate
Verification Fails ................................................ 229
unable to copy ...................................................400 Web Applications Service Setup ....................... 225
unable to print ....................................................404 Web Applications Version ................................. 228
unable to receive a fax .......................................409 web browser ...................................................... 268
unable to send a fax ..........................................407 Web Browser Setup .......................................... 228
Uncollated - Default Separators Tray ................166 Web Site .............................................................. 99
unit (millimeters/inches) .....................................157 Windows 2000 ................................................... 278
UNIX ..................................................................278 Windows Server 2003 ....................................... 278
Unregistered Forms ...........................................195 Windows Server 2008 ....................................... 278
unregistered user ...............................................354 Windows Vista ................................................... 278
unusable paper ....................................................40 Windows XP ...................................................... 278
URL File Expiration ............................................204
usable paper ........................................................36 X
USB ...................................................................279
USB port ............................................................279 Xerox Standard Accounting ............................... 252
User Account Billing Information ........................117 XPS Print Ticket Processing ............................. 197
User Authentication ...........................................385 XPS signature ................................................... 348
User Details Setup .............................................260
User ID for Login ................................................261
User Name .........................................................243
User Name for FTP Scan ..................................202
User Role ...........................................................250
using a proxy server ..........................................179
using the ethernet interface .................................19
using the USB interface .......................................19
626
ApeosPort-IV C4430, DocuCentre-IV C4430
Administrator Guide
ME4873E2-1 (Edition 1)
December 2010
Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2010 by Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.
Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.
Alternative Proxies: